U.S. Environmental Protection Agency .
__ _ Office of Administration and Resources Management
£ -^^^^ ^ Office of Information Resources Management
^^SiifisS^gf
% PRO^
^7*^"**^ Washington, D.C. 20460
NFORMATION
RESOU
ANAGEMENT
IRECTIVES
VOLUME 2:
NCC-IBM User's Guide
NCC-VAX User's Guide
LAN Technical Guidlines
-------
ARCHITECTURAL MANAGEMENT AND PLANNING BRANCH
NATIONAL DATA PROCESSING DIVISION
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
LOCAL AREA NETWORK
TECHNICAL GUIDELINES
I ••• '• •'"-
LAN DESIGN AND PLANNING
(LAN TSR PROCESS)
January, 2988
-------
FOREWORD
EPA recognized the growing importance of personal computers for use within the Agency
in 1983 and convened an Agency Task Force on Microcomputers. Based on its recommenda-
tions, NDPD began a PC Pilot program in 1984. That year there were less than 100 microcom-
puters wuhin the Agency; today there are over 4,500. We are now embarking on the next stage
of microcomputer technology: local area networks.
Local area network (LAN) pilots have been installed at several sites throughout the Agen-
cy, and based on the experiences at these sites, plus countless meetings and plenty of in-depth
and hands-on research, we have compiled the guidelines presented in these two volumes. They
have been designed to take you step by step all the way through the LAN implementation
process: from the initial decision to install a LAN and then planning for it to the day-to-day
operations.
For those groups whose computing needs require networking, a contract is in place which
you can use to acquire both the equipment and the support. This manual shows you how to
make use of this contract. We hope you will find it helpful in achieving your computing goals.
Don Fulford, Director
National Data Processing Division
-------
PREFACE
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual is intended to be used as a guide for those groups which are interested in the
potential a local area network has for making them a more efficient and productive organiza-
tion. It is designed to be read by several different levels within the group, from manager to tech-
nician. The main purposes of this document are:
(1) To provide the reader with an understanding of what it takes to plan and administer a
local area network;
(2) To identify the components and prices available on the LAN contract with Systems
Management American (SMA);and
(3) To publish the procedures necessary to plan a LAN and order the required com-
ponents from SMA.
If you think your group could benefit from having a LAN, read the Introduction (Chapter
1) and perform a Needs Analysis. If such an analysis shows that the technology can be cost-ef-
fective and you want to purchase and install a local area network, read the remaining chapters
in Volume I. Then plan the network and submit a TSR for approval, using the checklists from
the Planning Guidelines (Chapter 2).
Volume I contains general information regarding the LAN including making the initial
decision, planning, and purchasing. Descriptions of the components available through the SMA
contract and their costs are provided in Appendices C, D, and E in this volume. Volume II is
devoted to the more technical details of site preparation, installation, and daify operations.
Within Volume I, the following audiences were targeted for the specified sections:
Executive Summary - SIRMOS and other upper level management;
Chapter 1, Introduction - SIRMOS, LAN Administrators, and others who may be in-
volved in planning for a LAN;
Chapter 2, LAN Planning Guidelines - LAN Adrninistrators and others who may be in-
volved in the planning phase of the LAN implementation;
Chapter 3, LAN Purchase Guidelines - LAN Administrators and others who may be in-
volved in the purchasing phase of the LAN implementation;
Chapter 4, LAN Administration Guidelines - LAN Adrninistrators and those who may be
supervising the LAN Administrators; (Note: It is the responsibility of the SIRMO to designate
the LAN Administrator.)
Appendix A, OIRM Policy and Standards - SIRMOS, LAN Administrators, and others
responsible for the management and planning of LANs;
e
-------
Appendices B, C, and D, LAN and Desktop Publishing Component and Services descrip-
tions • LAN Administrators and others who may be involved in the purchasing phase of the
LAN implementation;
Glossary; and
Bibliography.
Volume n is much more technical in nature than Volume 1and contains the step-by-step
details needed for such phases in the LAN implementation as cabling and site preparation, in-
stallation, testing, cmd daUy operations. It is like a Users' Guide in that it is a reference manual
for the person who will be doing the real 'nuts and bolts* work on the LAN. The LAN Ad-
ministrator needs to be very familiar with this volume regardless of whether or not he/she is ac-
tually doing the technical detail work. Its contents include:
Appendix E, Site Preparation;
Appendix F, Installation and Testing;
Appendix C, Operations;
Appendix Ht NDPD LAN TSR;
Appendix I, Region 4 Site Survey;
Appendix J, NDPD Support Roles; and
Appendix K, Technical Support Phone Numbers.
m
-------
Table of Contents - Volume I
FOREWORD
PREFACE
HOWTO USE THIS MANUAL ii
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION
1.1 OVERVIEW 1-3
12 PURPOSE 1-3
13 BACKGROUND 1-5
1.4 BENEFITS OF A LAN 1-7
1.5 COSTS OF ALAN 1-9
1.6 ALTERNATIVES TO A LAN . 1-12
1.7 OIRM POLICY AND STANDARDS FOR LOCAL AREA NETWORKS
FOR MICROCOMPUTERS 1-14
1.8 SUPPORT CONSIDERATIONS 1-14
1.9 SUMMARY 1-21
NOTES: 1-22
CHAPTER 2 - PLANNING GUIDELINES
Planning Overview
2.1 NEEDS ANALYSIS AND ALTERNATIVES EVALUATION (STEP 1) 2-7
22 NETWORK SYSTEM DESIGN (STEP 2) 2-19
23 SITE PREPARATION (STEP 3) 2-30
2.4 TRAINING (STEP 4) 2-33
25 OPERATIONS PLAN (STEP 5) 2-35
2.6 SUPPORT PLAN (STEP 6) 2-38
2.7 NETWORK ADMINISTRATION PLANNING (STEP 7) 2-41
Z8 SUMMARY 2-42
NOTES 2-43
IV
-------
Volume I- LAN Design & Planning
PLANNING CHECKLISTS
COST ANALYSIS WORKSHEETS
CHAPTER 3 - PURCHASE GUIDELINES
3.1 INTRODUCTION 3-3
3.2 POLICIES AND STANDARDS 3-7
33 PRE-PURCHASE CONSIDERATIONS 3-8
3.4 ACQUISITION PROCESS 3-8
CHAPTER 4 - ADMINISTRATION GUIDELINES
4.1 PURPOSE AND OVERVIEW 4-3
42 ATTENDING LAN ADMINISTRATOR TRAINING 4-5
43 PLANNING AND PROCUREMENT 4-6
4.4 SITE PREPARATION 4-7
4.5 INSTALLATION AND TESTING 4-7
4.6 LOCAL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES 4-8
4.7 DAILY OPERATIONS 4-12
4.8 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS 4-12
4.9 REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 4-13
4.10 CHANGE CONTROL 4-14
4.11 EXPANSION PLANNING 4-15
4.12 SUMMARY 4-15
APPENDIX A - DRAFT OIRM LAN POLICY
APPENDIX B.1 - DESKTOP PUBLISHING COMPONENTS
APPENDIX B.2 - DESKTOP PUBLISHING COST SPREADSHEET
APPENDIX B3 - DESKTOP PUBLISHING TRAINING
-------
Table of Contents
APPENDIX Cl - LAN COMPONENTS
APPENDIX C2 - LAN COST SPREADSHEET
APPENDIX C3 - LAN TRAINING
APPENDIX C4 - LAN SERVICES
APPENDIX D - AVAILABLE MODEM CONTRACTS
GLOSSARY
BIBLIOGRAPHY
-------
Table of Contents - Volume II
APPENDIX E - SITE PREPARATION
E.1 OVERVIEW E-3
E^ CABLING E-3
E3 ELECTRICAL POWER E-ll
E.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACCESS E-15
APPENDIX F - INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
F.I OVERVIEW F-3
F.2 SITE PREPARATION F-4
F3 HARD WARE INSTALLATION AND TESTING F-10
F.4 OPERATING SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND TEST F-17
F.5IMTIAL NETWORK SETUP AND VERIFICATION F-35
F.6 APPLICATIONS LOADING AND VERIFICATION F-52
F.7 COMMUNICATIONS TESTS F-68
F.8BACKUP F-80
Attachment F/l - NOVELL NETWARE PROCEDURES
F/1.1 INSTALLING AND CONFIGURING SERVER SOFTWARE F/l-1
F/l^ ADDITIONAL MENU UniJTY FUNCTIONS F/l-5
F/13 MULTI-USER SECURITY VERIFICATION F/l-5
F/1.4 FILER SERVER CONFIGURATION-AT TYPE PCS F/l-9
F/l.5 FILE SERVER HARD DISK FORMAT F/l-10
ATTACHMENT F/2 - NOVELL NETWARE COMMAND LINE UTILITIES
F/2.1 COMMANDS WITH DOS EQUIVALENTS F/2-1
P/22 USER INFORMATION AND ACCESS COMMANDS * F/2-1
F/2J PRINTER COMMANDS F/2-2
F/2.4 ADVANCED COMMANDS F/2-3
F/2J SYS:SYSTEM DIRECTORY F/2-3
ATTACHMENT F/3 - LICENSE AGREEMENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
F/3.1 LICENSE AGREEMENTS F/3-1
F/3.2 COPYRIGHTS , F/3-2
F/33 PUBLIC DOMAIN SOFTWARE F/3-3
vzn
-------
LAN Technical Guidelines
ATTACHMENT F/4 - NOVELL SYSTEM LOGIN SCRIPT
APPENDIX G - LAN OPERATIONS
G.I PURPOSE AND OVERVIEW G-3
G2 FILE SERVER MANAGEMENT AND MAINTENANCE G-3
G3 PRINT SERVER MANAGEMENT AND MAINTENANCE G-13
G.4 COMMUNICATIONS GATEWAYS MANAGEMENT G-16
G.5 SECURITY MANAGEMENT AND MAINTENANCE G-17
G.6 APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT G-17
G.7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT MANAGEMENT G-23
-------
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
It is a long-term strategic goal at the Agency to achieve full connection of all of EPA's
computing resources. The whole system should appear to our end users as a
single, integrated resource. At the same time we need to keep data transmission rates high
and error-free. We must also make security flexible and assured.
Local Area Networks, or LANs, represent a major link in this strategic goal. They
provide a means to connect personal computers so that they can swiftly exchange informa-
tion. This information can take the form of messages, programs, data files, or records
within a file for multi-user data base applications. LAN standards have emerged and the
costs associated with the hardware have decreased steadily, and there have been rapid in-
creases in the number of successful LAN implementations over the past five years. Pilot
installations within EPA (e.g., Region 4, NEIQ OGC) have demonstrated the effective-
ness of LANs for data sharing and communications.
What are the implications for EPA? LANs add or improve the following capabilities:
• increased speed in accessing Agency resources;
• small, local, information-sharing applications;
• off-loading of some data entry and program development tasks from the
mainframes; and ••
• increased sharing of disks, printers, and other resources.
Utilizing these distributed processing resources and task off-loading capabilities
means that those applications which require mainframe processing or data storage can then
be accessed and executed more efficiently.
Because LANs will represent an important and growing link in our overall distributed
data processing network over the next ten years, OIRM has developed policy guidelines
regarding their management and planning. (Appendix A, OIRM Policy Directive 88-02,
draft.) These guidelines delineate the rules which must be followed when a LAN installa-
tion is begun. They also define the various responsibilities of the Office of Information
Resources Management (OIRM), the National Data Processing Division (NDPD), and
the user organizations' Senior Information Resources Management Officials (SIRMOs)
and LAN Administrators,
OIRM shall:
• Develop and promulgate policy governing Agency LANs.
• Develop and promulgate guidance on LAN applications development
• Develop and promulgate guidance on LAN information security.
• Develop and promulgate EPA requirements governing applications for personal
computers and LANs.
ES-1
-------
LAW Design & Planning
NDPD shall:
• Develop guidance and programs to ensure that Agency LANs are acquired, in-
stalled and managed in accord with this policy. • .
• Provide guidance and assistance to Assistant Administrators, Associate Ad-
ministrators and Regional Administrators in implementing the requirements of
this policy.
• Provide technical advice and assistance to EPA on LAN technology.
• Develop hardware and software requirements for EPA LANs that support the
objectives of this policy.
• Establish and manage EPA LAN acquisition contracts.
• Review LAN TSRs to ensure proposed LANs comply with the requirements of
this policy and with LAN Technical Guidelines.
• Provide telecommunications support between LAN gateways and the EPA Wide
Area Network.
• Provide in-wall wiring as necessary at Headquarters, Research Triangle Park, and
Cincinnati.
The SERMOs shall:
• Review justifications and management plans for LAN technology to be acquired
by their organizations.
• Review procurement requests for LAN technology submitted by their organiza-
tions.
• Designate an Administrator for each LAN in their cognizance.
The LAN Administrators shall oversee or perform the following tasks:
• Develop the design of their LAN.
• Oversee or perform the installation of their LAN.
• Manage or perform daily operation and maintenance of their LAN.
• Serve as point-of-contact with NDPD for LAN.
• Ensure compliance with guidance on LAN data security.
• Ensure users are trained on LAN technology.
LANs as a viable information-sharing technology have matured because of the emer-
gence of standards for the media and the communications protocols. In the Agency's
diverse computing geography, adherence to these industry standards is essential for die
success of the ultimate Unking of all our processing resources via the nationwide network.
With this goal in mind, NDPD has developed requirements for LAN installations for each
of four environments: (1) predominantly PC/MS-DOS systems, (2) Apple Macintosh com-
puters, (3) DEC VAX installations, and (4) Prime installations. Requirements have also
been established for SNA, 3270-type communications with the NDPD mainframe and
Regional IBM 4381 processors. Conformance to these requirements will help users avoid
the pitfalls of installing equipment which will later prove unsuitable or inadequate for ex-
panded needs, and help ensure the eventual transparent Unking of many of the Agency's
computing resources into a single, unified whole.
ES-2
-------
Executive Summary
The installation of a LAN can provide numerous benefits to the Agency's various or-
ganizations. These benefits can be categorized as organizational, personal, or financial in
nature. Organizational benefits provide new ways to do old jobs, and the LAN also
provides the means for doing things that previously couldn't be done. Improved intra-of-
fice communications and enhanced data sharing are examples of this type of benefit By
sharing resources on the LAN, staff members can be provided with higher quality hardware
than perhaps could be justified on an individual basis, and thus benefit personally. For ex-
ample, a single high-capacity laser printer with expanded font and graphics capability can
be shared by numerous users. Individual personal computer users with similar needs, but
not attached to a network, may be able to afford only lower-priced models with features
that are minimally "acceptable" rather than "full-featured."
There are basically three types of financial benefits to be gained from the installa-
tion of a LAN: shared hardware and software, unproved hardware use, and increased
productivity. Sharing hardware and software can immediately reduce program costs by
decreasing the number of components to purchase and maintain. A shared peripheral will
not sit idle as often as a device dedicated to a single user. Increased productivity is some-
what more intangible, but nonetheless can represent major cost savings.
While LANs do have demonstrated benefits, they also have costs which planners and
managers must be aware of before they adopt the technology as a solution to their infor-
mation-sharing needs. A LAN has been described as "a tangle of adapters, cables, software,
drawings, diagrams, manuals, technical mumbo-jumbo, and bureaucratic hub-bub." Plan-
ning and installation take time and expertise, either of which may not be available locally.
It requires "technical tickling" from installing adapters and running cables to writing utility
programs which enhance operations. Hardware and software costs are usually easy to iden-
tify; however, accurate cost analysis cannot be accomplished for design and planning main-
tenance, management and support, and training without the benefit of considerable
experience.
Because LANs represent a relatively new technology which is significantly more com-
plex than the personal computers which they will link, a major portion of this document is
dedicated to guidelines for the planning and implementation of LANs within the Agency.
Much has been written about LANs in the trade press; indeed there is almost an over-
whelming abundance of information available. While the guidelines are not designed to
replace this information, they have been written to present the portions of this informa-
tion which are essential for the Agency's LAN installations and operations. As always,
NDPD will serve as the "court of last resort" We will provide support to answer your ques-
tions to the greatest extent possible within our resources.
The guidelines are available in two volumes. Volume I has been prepared for the
manager, LAN Administrator, and others responsible for planning the LAN and includes:
• Introduction;
• Planning*
• Purchasing;
• Administration Guidelines; and
ES-3
-------
LAN Deslan A Planning
• Appendices containing a draft of the OIRM LAN Policies and descriptions and
pricelists for Desktop Publishing and Local Area Network components and ser-
vices.
The second volume contains more technical detail for the LAN Administrator and
his or her assistants who will implement the LAN. Its contents include:
• Site Preparation;
• Installation and Testing;
• Operations; and
• Appendices containing a sample LAN TSR and other technical information, in-
eluding phone numbers of various sources for support
ES4
-------
CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION
Contents
1.1 OVERVIEW 1-3
12 PURPOSE 1-3
13 BACKGROUND 1-5
13.1 WhatisaLAN?
U.2 Do I Need a LAN for my Workgroup?
13.3 I believe a LAN could be useful What is EPA doing to assist me in acquiring a
LAN?
1.3.4 What are the minimum requirements for NDPD approval?
1.4 BENEFITS OF ALAN 1-7
1,4.1 Organizational Benefits
1.4.2 Personal Benefits
1.4.3 Financial Benefits
1.5 COSTSOFALAN 1-9
7.5.7 Hardware Costs
1.5.2 Design and Planning Costs
1.53 Maintenance Costs
1.5.4 Software Costs
1.5.5 Management and Security Costs
1.5.6 Training Costs
13.7 Support Costs
1.6 ALTERNATIVES TO A LAN 1-12
1.7 OIRM POLICY AND STANDARDS FOR LOCAL AREA NETWORKS FOR
MICROCOMPUTERS 1-14
1.8 SUPPORT CONSIDERATIONS 1-14
1JL7 Background
1JL2 Support Requirements
1.83 Summary of LAN Support Requirements
L9SUMMARY 1-21
NOTES: 1-22
1-1
-------
Volume I-LAN Design A Planning
Notes:
1-2
-------
Introduction
1.1 OVERVIEW
Local area networks (LANs) represent a relatively new technology which has the
potential to enhance the Agency's computing capabilities significantly. However, even
though they involve PCs as a major component, they are much more complex than a single,
stand-alone personal computer. This manual has been designed to help you work your way
through the complexities of the world of LANs. After becoming more familiar with the
general characteristics, benefits, and costs of a LAN, you may decide to investigate further
to see if a LAN is a feasible alternative for you and your group. Once you have performed
your cost/benefit analysis and determined that a LAN can be a cost-effective tool, you will
want to use the various chapters of this manual to help you plan, purchase, install, test,
operate, and manage your system.
This chapter will introduce you to LANs and the lands of problems for which they
are the best technological solution currently available. It then discusses the benefits and
costs of a LAN. There is also a brief description of Agency alternatives to a LAN. The
final section in this chapter discusses how the Agency plans to support all phases of a LAN
implementation.
The remainder of the manual contains guides which provide detailed, step-by-step,
assistance with the steps, as depicted in Figure 1.1, required to effectively implement a
local area network: needs identification, planning and design, purchase, installation and
testing, operation, and administration. A chapter (to be authored by OIRM/PSD staff) is
also planned which will assist you in developing program applications on a LAN. It will be
included when available.
These guidelines are composed of two volumes. Volume I, LAN Design and Plan-
ning, contains all that is required to plan the implementation of a LAN, and it is recom-
mended for managers and planners. Volume H, LAN Technical Manual, contains more
detailed technical information and is recommended for those whose responsibility it is to
actually "power up" the equipment Each chapter has been designed in such a way that you
should be able to use it independently and not have to refer to any other pan of the manual,
except for the appendices. For example, Chapter 2, Planning Guidelines, provides you
with all the information you need to plan a functional LAN for your specific situation; in-
cluded in this chapter are checklists for you to use during your planning. Once you have
completed the planning phase, you will then be ready to refer to Chapter 3, Purchase
Guidelines. This is the way it has been designed; it is our hope that you will be able to util-
ize it in the same manner. Any comments on or suggestions for this manual or its contents
should be addressed to:
Carolyn Chamblee or E-mail: GChamblee
U.S.EPAMD-34
RTP.NC 27711
1.2 PURPOSE
Local area networks (LANs) designed to link personal computers to one another
have reached a level of technological maturity such that their use within the Agency can
1-3
-------
Volume I-LAN Design & Planning
Steps In LAN Implementation
— -jmrn
Assign LAN Administrator
Prepare LAN TSR
1) NMds Ararytrt
2) SytJtm DMlgn
3) Sto Preparation
4) Training
5) Optrvbofts
6) Support
7) Administration
Prepare Purchase Documents
1) Policy and Standard*
4\ ^n • nMi r attmoa
zj opvcnicmons
3)Exotptlon«
4) NOPO RM
-------
Introduction
be demonstrated to be a cost- effective solution to certain electronic information-sharing
and data processing requirements.
It is the goal of this guide to acquaint you with the mechanisms and capabilities of a
LAN and to give you an understanding of what a LAN can and CANNOT do for you. It is
designed to assist you with understanding what a "local area network," or LAN, is and what
it does. It addresses present procedures that can be enhanced or eliminated, new office
capabilities, and the long-term implications of installing a LAN. Of equal importance are
the costs and tradeoffs involved and alternative approaches to meeting user data process-
ing and information distribution requirements. Armed with this knowledge, you can deter-
mine if the installation of a LAN, or some other more appropriate alternative, can best
meet your immediate and long-term electronic information-sharing needs.
Much has been written about LANs, both in the trade press and also in numerous
books and vendors' manuals and guides. It is not the intent of these NDPD guidelines to
replace or duplicate this wealth of information, but rather to provide a "technology trans-
fer," a condensation of this information, in order to match the Agency's particular require-
ments. A bibliography of resource materials with which LAN planners and supervisors are
encouraged to become familiar is included as an appendix to this volume.
1.3 BACKGROUND
In order to give you a better understanding of the capabilities of a LAN and its ap-
plications within the Agency, the following questions and answers have been prepared.
1.3.1 What Is a LAN?
What exactly is a local area network? Webster's New World Dictionary defines "net-
work* as "a system of roads, canals, veins, etc. that connect with or cross one another... a
group, system, etc. of interconnected or cooperating individuals." A LAN, then is just that
Like roads or canals, the wires (or optical fibers) of a LAN provide a path for moving
information among a system of cooperating individual computers. The "local area" refers
to a relatively small geographic region — an office area, a building, or at most, a campus of
buildings, as opposed to offices located in different cities. Of course it is possible to link
various LANs with one another, and EPA will eventually do this through its WAN, Wide
Area Network, which will link all of our offices throughout the nation.*
1.3.2 Do I Need a LAN for my Workgroup?
One book states, "Business was transacted and people communicated before there
were personal computer networks, so obviously there are other ways to get the job done.
A network should offer some improvement over the system it replaces, provide a new ser-
vice that saves time or money, or so enhance the work environment as to increase produc-
tivity and efficiency. Your job is to determine what that improvement, innovation, or
enhancement is and how to measure it. It is the goal of this manual to help you deter-
mine if the installation of a LAN would be appropriate for the particular needs of your of-
fice or workgroup. You should note that the installation of a LAN will not make up for
poor procedures. Management should have in place procedures for handling planning,
correspondence, document preparation, and file management A LAN then can allow
these procedures to be executed more effectively.
1-5
-------
Volume t-LAN Design A Planning
1.3.3 I believe a LAN could be useful. What Is EPA doing to assist me In acquir-
ing a LAN?
• Developing Requirements
Because a long-term goal of the Agency is to provide total "connectivity" of all its
computing resources, adherence to the requirements developed by the Agency is neces-
sary. At a particular site there might be what appear to be very good reasons for acquir-
ing a non-standard LAN. For example, a local vendor may present an excellent proposal
which provides a very low-cost solution for a small installation. The vendor may convinc-
ingly propose exceptional local support for the installation and operation of the LAN.
While this may appear to be a good solution for the site's needs, it is imperative that
management understand the long-term goals of the Agency for connectivity and the im-
plications for installing a non-standard LAN. LANs which do not conform to the published
requirements or which are not ordered through the contract with SMA will require an ad-
ditional amount of paperwork just to obtain NDPD approval of the configuration. Even
with that approval, there can be no support provided by NDPD. Should connections
beyond the local site of a non-standard LAN be desired at any time in the future, the con-
nection will probably be much more difficult, if not impossible, to achieve.
• Providing These Guides
These guides represent the first phase of the support which OIRM and NDPD will
be providing for the installation and operation of LANs within the Agency. Pilot systems
were installed, and the information gleaned from these sites was incorporated into these
guidelines.
• Providing an Agency-wide Contract for LAN Purchases
NDPD has established a mechanism to provide LAN technology to the Agency. The
Desktop Publishing/Local Area Network contract (68-01-7463) with System Management
American (SMA) has been awarded and provides a means for both acquisition and sup-
port for both token ring and Appletalk networks and services.
1.3.4 What are the minimum requirements for NDPD approval?
NDPD has developed these guidelines to show the specific planning which must be
done for a LAN to be successful. We believe that this guidance should be followed ex-
plicitly to ensure success. The NDPD staff is committed to the success of your LAN and
to providing the support required for that success, as demonstrated by the development of
this document and the LAN acquisition contract with SMA.
NDPD does not want to require an inordinate burden of paperwork for anyone, but
this guidance should be followed in detail for the successful implementation of your LAN.
However, NDPD will provide LAN technical approval, which is required for the acquisi-
tion of equipment, if your Senior Information Resource Management Official (SIRMO)
sends a TSR to the System Resource Information Group, MD-34A, Research Triangle
Park, NC 27711, to the attention of G. Scruggs, requesting ADP Approval for the Local
Area Network and identifying a LAN Administrator for the proposed network. (The LAN
Administrator's duties are described in detail in Chapter 4). Supporting documentation
1-6
-------
Introduction
LAN Cost/Benefit Comparison
Organizational
Personal
Financial
Design
Planning
Maintenance
Software
Management
Training
Figure 12 Benefits versus Costs of a LAN
for this TSR must include a brief description of the cabling which will be used and the con-
figuration of the LAN. This minimum requirement is just that - a minimum requirement.
The guidance for planning and implementation incorporated in this manual is your best
opportunity for an implementation which accomplishes the desired goals successfully, and
you are encouraged to follow it carefully.
1.4 BENEFITS OF A LAN
The installation of a LAN can offer numerous benefits, both for the immediate
workgroup and, eventually, throughout the Agency as global connections are established.
For purposes of discussion, these benefits are divided into three categories: organization-
al, personal, and financial, and are depicted in Figure 12,
1.4.1 Organizational Benefits
Organizational benefits include new ways to do old jobs, and the LAN also provides
a means for doing things that previously couldn't be done. While the cost-savings benefits
will seldom provide a total justification for the installation of a LAN, those savings, coupled
with organizational benefits such as improved communications and/or enhanced data shar-
inc. can.
0*.
1-7
-------
Volume l-LAN Design & Planning
Organizational benefits include the following:
• Scheduling and calendars can be posted;
• Multi-user databases and other applications;
• Most current version of document always available;
• Merging sections of document with multiple authors much easier;
• Agency boilerplate and workgroup templates readily available;
• Document review and revision much more efficient; and
• Security of confidential data can be enhanced.
1.4.2 Personal Benefits
By sharing resources on the LAN, staff members can be provided with higher quality
hardware than perhaps could be justified on an individual basis. For example, a single,
fast, high-resolution plotter or high-capacity laser printer with expanded memory for
graphics can be shared on the LAN. Non-connected individuals with similar needs may be
required to purchase lower-priced models with features that are minimally "acceptable"
rather than "full- featured."
Personal benefits include the following:
Access to better printers;
Access to more disk storage capacity;
Access to expensive, seldom-used software;
Less chance of data loss through regularly scheduled backups;
Easier transfer of information to co-workers; and
More convenient access to other resources.
1.4.3 Financial Benefits
There are four types of financial benefits to be gained from the installation of a LAN:
• shared hardware and software;
• improved hardware and software use;
• increased productivity; and
• often the most economical solution for a particular data processing or com-
munications problem.
While sharing hardware will have an immediate, tangible impact on program costs,
improved hardware use and increased productivity are somewhat more subtle, but none-
theless can represent major cost savings. A requirements analysis and feasibility study for
some applications, such as that done for the hazardous waste site information collection
for CERCLJS, will demonstrate that a LAN is the most cost-effective means to provide the
required functionality, compared with other ADP solutions.
A prime example of shared hardware is the laser printer. Similar savings are true of
any other piece of expensive peripheral equipment which can be shared. While laser
printer costs are coming down in proportion to the initial costs of a LAN, you shouldn't
lose sight of the fact that the upkeep and maintenance costs of multiple printers can be sig-
nificantly more expensive than for multiple LAN cards. Also, multiple printers will require
1-8
-------
Introduction
multiple sets of font cartridges and downloadable font software. Substantial savings can
be realized when this resource is shared The LAN can provide ready access to resources
which each user may seldom utilize and which would consequently be cost-prohibitive to
provide for each individual, such as a high-resolution graphics plotter or high-speed letter
quality printer for those specialized tasks (e.&, multi-part forms) which the laser printer
cannot handle. Software sharing can also save money. By purchasing LAN versions of
popular packages and making them available via the network, fewer personal copies of that
software are needed When personal copies are replaced with the LAN version of a par-
ticular package, the unneeded personal copies can be released to other users within the
Agency via the Software Exchange Program. This also results in lower upgrade costs.
Some expensive packages such AutoCad, which are only needed intermittently, can be
shared on the LAN.
When the LAN is properly implemented and functional software has been installed,
a noticeable improvement in staff productivity can be realized When the "sneaker-net" of
sharing data via floppy diskettes passed through the halls is replaced, there will be a
measurable amount of staff time saved.
1.5 COSTS OF A LAN
A LAN can be a complex assortment of adapters, cables, software, drawings,
diagrams, manuals, jargon, and red tape. Planning and installation take time and exper-
tise, either of which may not be available locally. Technical adepmess is required for
numerous phases of the LAN's implementation, from installing adapters and running
cables to writing utility programs which enhance operations. These are not trivial en-
deavors. Hardware and software costs are usually easy to identify when the proposed sys-
tem is carefully planned. Less susceptible to accurate cost analysis without the benefit of
considerable experience are design and planning, maintenance, management and support,
and training costs. These costs of a LAN implementation are discussed below:
Hardware
Design and Planning
Maintenance
Software
Management and Security
Training
Support
1.5.1 Hardware Costs
Numerous analyses have indicated that the hardware costs, including the costs of the
adapters, cabling, servers, and controllers, represent the tip of the iceberg — but they are
all that casual observers usually anticipate when they first consider installing a LAN. Of
course they are not insignificant Besides the network interface card (NIC), each worksta-
tion will require 640 Kb of memory to run the network access program and additional disk
storage for the network programs.
1-9
-------
Volume t-LAN Design & Planning
• Cabling and Wiring
Cabling must be carefully planned Cabling and installation costs can overshadow
the costs of all the other components combined because of the required labor. Because
labor is such a large part of the total cabling expense, it will often be more prudent to in-
stall excess capacity wiring rather than to have to return at some future date and install a
second run. When it appears feasible to utilize existing wires (such as unused pairs of
telephone wire), these must be thoroughly inventoried and tested before use, and the
limitations of unshielded wiring must be incorporated into plans for anticipated expansion.
If new wiring is to be installed, Type 2 shielded twisted pair should be the minimu^ con-
sidered.
• Dedicated Servers
Although some LAN operating system vendors claim that they provide for sharing
and connectivity without dedicated servers, with users sharing the files on each other's hard
disks, it has been our experience that a file and print server requires a personal computer
dedicated to the task. No one should use the system for other purposes; this reduces the
risk of untimely power-downs. It also maintains optimum performance for the user as well
as the server. NDPD experience and experience from the pilot LAN sites has demon-
strated that communications gateways, i.e., links to other systems such as an SNA connec-
tion to a regional 4381 Logical Mainframe, will also require an additional dedicated PC
The multi-user LAN version of PC Focus will also require a dedicated "database server"
PC at those sites desiring that capability.
1.5.2 Design and Planning Costs
As mentioned above, careful planning is the key to the successful installation and im-
plementation of a LAN. Quite often the expertise of an outside consultant will be required.
The SMA contract mentioned earlier provides planning consultation services, and it is to
your advantage to make use of these services. (See Appendix C for pricing information.)
If program staff do the design and planning themselves, then the time they spend on the
LAN project should be recognized as such when it the actual costs are being estimated.
1.5.3 Maintenance Costs
Increased maintenance costs are the result of the increased complexity of a network
system compared to a group of stand-alone PCs. As the LANs become critical to the
organization's operation, on-site maintenance may be required to minimise downtime.
The adapters are susceptible to the same ailments as all electronic equipment For the
hardware components, average costs on the SMA contract are 7% to 9% of the purchase
price per year for ship-in maintenance, and 11% to 15% per year for on-site maintenance,
The cabling adds another component which can fail, either due to improper installation or
at the connectors. Cabling of large installations can present problems which are difficult
to troubleshoot and require experienced technicians with specialized test equipment
Finally, the software will likely undergo revisions throughout its life cycle, and it must be
upgraded appropriately to maintain the highest level of performance and consistency
throughout the Agency for support
1-10
-------
Introduction
1.5.4 Software Costs
Depending on the operating system purchased, either each server or each worksta-
tion will require a licensed copy of the network software. The recommended Novell Net-
ware operating system must be purchased for each server in the network, regardless of
whether that server has 10 users or 100. The Agency standard packages require PC/MS-
DOS 3.1 or later in order to operate correctly, therefore some older PCs may require DOS
upgrades before they can be attached to the LAN. Slowly but surely LAN versions of the
major applications packages (word processing, data base management, integrated spread-
sheets) are emerging. Ultimately these will cost less than an equivalent set of single-user
packages. But the cost to upgrade may be substantial, with no direct path provided for
"trading in" the single-user packages which have already been acquired. These programs
may simply be shelved and their costs written off.
1.5.5 Management and Security Costs
Startup of the LAN will quickly demonstrate that it simply cannot run itself. Besides
the time-consuming installation process itself, issues of security and access must be ad-
dressed on an on- going basis as personnel move and as staff needs change. Performance
of the network should be monitored and operational parameters and resources updated to
attain optimal performance (i.e, as few complaints from users as possible about disk ac-
cess delays, waiting for the printer, changing printer forms and fonts, disk space shortages,
etc.). Users must be acquainted with the resources available to them and with the nuan-
ces of accessing them efficiently and with a minimum of frustration. Thus there are costs
in assigning someone, namely the LAN Administrator, to manage the local area network.
• LAN Administrator
The LAN Administrator has primary responsibility for managing the daily operations
of the LAN, as well as involvement in its planning, installation, and maintenance. Some
of the LAN-related activities which the LAN Administrator might be involved in include
assigning user IDs and allocating network resources (e.g., disk space, printer access), es-
tablishing and implementing problem resolution procedures, installing and updating
software, providing user education and assistance, planning and installing extensions to the
local network and inter-network bridges, and planning for Agency-wide growth paths with
other LAN Administrators and OERM personnel. How much time this will require
depends on the number of workstations and users on the LAN and the-applications which
have been installed. It can require anywhere from 5 to 100 percent of a person's time,
depending on the installation. During the planning and installation phases of the im-
plementation, the LAN Administrator should plan to devote full time to the **&-
In addition to trouble-shooting and problem-solving, an important part of the LAN
Administrator's role will be to monitor the utilization and performance of the network so
that needed expansion can be anticipated and planned appropriately. The LAN Ad-
ministrator should be able to see more clearly than anyone else the requirements for growth
and the direction of change needed for future effective LAN operations. Proper documen-
tation of the LAN's daily use will be critical in evaluating the need for expansion.
1-11
-------
Volume t-LAN Design a Planning
• Support Personnel
The printer server requires regular attention for ordering supplies, changing paper,
toner or ribbons, and font cartridges or print wheels. The disk server must be backed up
regularly and disk space managed appropriately. These tasks can be performed by the LAN
Administrator or other support personnel without a great deal of technical training, but
they must be performed, and time must be scheduled to accomplish the tasks. The larger
a network or the more diverse the applications being used, the more demanding will these
jobs become.
1.5.6 Training Costs
In order for the LAN Administrator and support personnel to perform their func-
tions effectively, they will require a certain level of expertise about the jobs. Likewise,
users cannot be expected to use the LAN as productively as possible without orientation
to its design functions, abilities, and limitations. A part of the training costs includes the
disruption of the daily schedule that will accompany the changeover to the LAN. This cost,
as well as the other training costs, is not peculiar to a LAN, however, and will be incurred
when any new system is implemented.
"While the amount of training required may be slight (a maximum of one day for typi-
cal users), it must be anticipated and budgeted. Formal training can be acquired through
the SMA contract, NCC, Information Centers, local commercial sources, or in-house
resource personnel. Some informal on-site orientation training must be available for new
users, and local refresher courses are recommended.
1.5.7 Support Costs
Because of the technical complexity of a LAN, particularly one with numerous
workstations and gateways, the costs of supporting the network must be included in any
cost/benefit analysis, and in any projections for total life-cycle costs. The LAN Ad-
ministrator will at times require technical assistance, for example, when attempting to op-
timize network performance or install new servers or gateways, or when a major problem
develops. This assistance can be gained either through the SMA contract, or else by utiliz-
ing local resources. In either case, there will be costs associated with the personnel time
devoted to the tasks.
1.6 Alternatives to a LAN
A LAN may not be the only or the best solution for your particular application or
data communications and resource-sharing problems. The purpose of this section is to ac-
quaint you with alternatives and to moderate the "desire to acquire." Because of the abun-
dant costs involved, we must avoid a technology if it does not provide a cost-effective
solution to a well-documented objective.
There are numerous technological methods for tackling most data processing needs,
and EPA has the resources already available to meet many of those requirements. Other
problems may require a less complex solution than the LAN. Let's look briefly at some
existing Agency computing resources.
1-12
-------
Introduction
• Port Selectors
If the sole requirement is shared access to the Agencywide area network of com-
puters (e.g., E-mail, NDPD mainframe, Regional logical mainframes), then installation of
a port selector switch could be more cost-effective than installing a LAN with SNA and
asynchronous gateways.
• NDPD IBM 3090/Reglonal IBM 4381 Mainframes
A "Regional ADP Modernization" effort is underway which is replacing the aging
DEC PDF ll/70s with more powerful IBM 4381 small mainframes. This network of
frames communicating with the NDPD 3QPO provides for applications which require
the computational power and/or storage capacity of the mainframe. National data bases
cannot be effectively managed on a network of personal computers. PCs serve better as
data entry systems or as a means for local analysis of subsets of the larger data base which
have been downloaded.
• Prime Administrative Systems Minicomputers
The Primes were purchased to support the Agency Administrative Systems. The
Prime is a minicomputer which supports multiple users simultaneously, and which can offer
an alternative to networked PCs for certain job objectives, especially when a workgroup
has few or no PCs currently installed.
Presently there are 49 Primes installed within the Agency. Each can support from
16 to 128 simultaneous users. Packages which come standard with the systems include
INFO, a data base management system; 20/20, an integrated spreadsheet and graphics
package with multiple-file linking capabilities; and WordMARC word processing. Many
other applications are available, including SAS, Tellagraph, and ARC/INFO (a
Geographic Information System package), and EPA- specific applications such as the
APDS — Automatic Procurement Documentation System, which automates much of the
RFP document preparation process. The Primes are all linked via the Primenet network
over Wide Area Network and LAN segments, and documents, files, and printing can be
moved easily from system to system with little user intervention. Network access includes
IBM 3270, IBM ASCII/graphics, and VAX connectivity.
The Prime solution shares numerous advantages with PC LANs; including central-
ized support for disk backups, large disk capacities, easily shared documents and project
files, ease of use, and transparent Agency-wide connectivity. At the same time, there are
limitations and costs. Analysts in the Washington Information Center (WIC) recommend
that each Prime site designate 1/3 person-year of staff time for an administrator for each
system. Terminals are connected to the CPU at a 9600 baud communication rate, and
therefore full-screen applications can be noticeably slower than similar PC applications.
Because there is a single processor which is shared among all the users, response time can
be noticeably degraded when a certain usage level is attained on each system. Required
maintenance charges run from $600 to $1,000 per month for on-site repair service. There
is a single processor, and when it fails, all workgroup computing stops until it is repaired.
This is not true in the distributed processor environment of a LAN, where each worksta-
tion can continue local tasks even if a file or print server should fafl.
M3
-------
Volume t-LAN Design & Planning
• DEC VAXes /Laboratories
To meet the Laboratories* demands for data collection and analysis, EPA has
replaced aging DEC PDPll/70s with DEC VAX 785's and MicroVAXes. All the
Laboratories' VAXes are linked via the Agency's X2S network to the NDPD VAX cluster
and to each other. Terminals are attached to the VAXes through DECnet/Ethernet ter-
minal servers. Personal computers in the Laboratories that need to communicate direct-
ly with the VAXes generally utilize Ethernet for data transfer. The MicroVAXes are used
for data acquisition, along with a large installed base of POMS DOS- compatible PCs. A
prime goal in the design and installation of these Laboratory computers has been 'no single
point of failure" that could cause a disruption of a laboratory's operation.
NDPD has adopted the policy of allowing individual Laboratories to acquire and es-
tablish the hardware and software systems which best suit their particular data acquisition
and analysis needs. Because of the difficulty in choosing a single "best solution" from
among the many off-the-shelf data acquisition software and hardware systems, NDPD has
limited its policy to the following two areas: (1) Laboratory Information Management Sys-
tem (LJMS) for the high-volume compliance monitoring labs, and (2) compatibility with
the Ethernet/X-25/SNA communications network for all systems which anticipate the need
for remote communications with other resources.
1.7 OIRM POLICY AND STANDARDS FOR LOCAL AREA NET-
WORKS FOR MICROCOMPUTERS
OIRM is in the process of establishing an Agency policy on Local Area Networks. A
draft of the policy, which is currently under Agency review, is provided-in Appendix A.
This policy defines the players and the rules for implementing LANs in the Agency. Close-
ly associated with this LAN policy, and also contained in Appendix A, is an OIRM-ap-
proved statement on Standards and Recommendations for Local Area Networks. These
standards, in concert with the LAN policy, represent the critical basis for uniformity and
connectivity for the Agency's personal computer workstations. General standards that
apply to all LANs, as well as the standards for each type of LAN based on the predominant
workstation, are included.
As noted in the EPA Policy for LANs, NDPD is responsible for technical approval
for all LANs, which are to conform to the standards presented here, unless-specificalJy ap-
proved by the Director, NDPD. The standards are based on the preponderance of kinds
of microcomputers within your organization. For example, if your basic computing
resource is the DEC VAX with VT100 and/or VT200 terminals, along with some
microcomputers, you should follow the standards for the DEC technology. Any questions
on these standards should be referred to NDPD.
1.8 SUPPORT CONSIDERATIONS
1.8.1 Background
The personal computer has brought changes to the way computers have been sup-
ported in the Agency. Prior to the PC, all user support was done from a central group
within the National Computer Center (NCC). With the advent of the PC and an increased
1-14
-------
fri&m/uct/do
focus on end-user computing, many support functions were moved to Information Centers
located where there were concentrations of PCs. The PC LANs do encompass end-user
computer concepts, but they also make the marriage to the overall computing resource
more important The single user is no longer in charge of his or her isolated world Once
the connectivity occurs, you move back to the realm of traditional data processing with
standard group needs such as formal backup schedules, recovery of files, management of
disk server space, etc. In this mixed world of formal ADP needs and end users with "per-
sonal" computers, the support issue becomes complex. Currently in EPA, end users are
generally independent when addressing their limited world. They want to maintain that
independence as much as possible. Today if you have a PC and develop problems with the
hardware or software that you cannot fix, you either call the vendor, work with other users
you know, or you call the Information Center for help. In the traditional ADP environ-
ment, you either consult other knowledgeable users or call NCC User Support; for
telecommunications problems, you call the NCC Telecommunications group for resolu-
tion.
With shared processing, LANs require access to both communities. This section
defines the support chain for the PCs and LANs with the general underlying assumption
that PCs are still "personal" computers. A user commits to developing a minimal level of
competence with these systems that will allow him or her to be somewhat self-sufficient in
the daily use of the system. LANs are a shared resource but they still embody the concept
of a "local" system. Organizations installing and operating LANs also make a commitment
that within the organization the minimal levsl of competence to manage and operate the
LAN on a daily basis will be developed. Seamless telecommunications among all Agency
resources is a strategic goal of the Agency. NDPD is tasked with making sure the Agency
reaches that goal LANs will require connectivity both within the local group and outside
to other LANs and the rest of the Agency computing resources. Therefore, the following
roles and responsibilities are defined in this context.
1.8.2 Support Requirements
• Needs Analysis
It is the responsibility of the workgroup to recognize and document its need for a
LAN. This requirement may be mandated by a national program or NDPD under certain
circumstances, but the planning responsibility remains with the user organization. For ex-
ample, if a user organization has a preponderance of PCs that need to be connected to
Agency computing resources, AMPB in its planning effort may reconiniepd a LAN for that
connectivity. Or, if a Region needs to participate in a national program such as Super-
fund/CERCLIS, that program may require installation of a LAN. The user organization
is responsible for leading and participating in the needs analysis. Funding is also the
responsibility of the user organization.
• Design
Designing a LAN requires not only some knowledge of the capabilities and limita-
tions of the hardware and software, but also a good perception of the goals and require-
ments the organization hopes to satisfy by implementing a network. There are numerous
books and articles that will support the design effort, and user organizations knowledge-
1-15
-------
Volume t-LAN Design & Planning
able in this area can design their LAN, subject to NDPD approval. Other organizations
with less technical expertise in LANs can utilize SMA services, via the LAN contract, to
design their systems.
In any case, a formal design is required that addresses the wiring plan, existing PCs,
planned PCs, peripherals for general use, the software needed to satisfy the goals of the
LAN, and training for the LAN Administrator and users. This design is submitted to
NDPD as a TSR with supporting documentation, and is described fully in Chapter 2. Con-
nectivity with other Agency computing resources must be addressed both for current needs
and for projected needs. Appropriate NDPD TSRs are necessary to allow proper plan-
ning for services required. In cases where SMA is tasked with the LAN design, proper PRs
and TSRs should be completed by SMA.
For those LANs which require direct NDPD support, schedules must be coordinated
in order to minimi^ the impact on ongoing NDPD tasks.
• Approval
The EPA policy states that the design of all local area networks is to be approved by
NDPD. Therefore, once the needs analysis and network design have been completed,
those documents need to be reviewed and approved by the SIRMO for the organization.
The documents are then forwarded to NDPD for review and approval. The review will
verify the design, note potential deficiencies, make recommendations for improvement
based on the strategic direction of the Agency, and verify adherence to Agency guidelines.
An additional emphasis will be to examine the LAN's relation to the existing Agency com-
puting environment, identify connections that will require modifications to the current en-
vironment, and identify potential operational problems that may occur as a result of the
design.
• Ordering
The Agency vehicle for procuring PC/MS DOS and Apple Macintosh LAN hardware
and software is the Agency's LAN contract with SMA. lids contract mechanism offers
reasonable pricing, some bundled services such as loading the Novell operating system
onto the server, optional services such as installation on a cost basis, and solid, industry
standard, compatible hardware and software. It also offers a simple procurement
mechanism since the contract has been awarded and no further competition or sole source
justifications are required. The Purchase Guide, Chapter 3, is devoted to explaining in
detail how to purchase a LAN. Price lists with explanations of all items available through
the contract are also a part of Chapter 3 and are included in Appendices B and C in this
volume.
• Installation
Installation of the LAN assumes that you have completed all the "in the wall" wiring
for the LAN, that you have tested that wiring and that it is suitable for LAN support It is
also assumed that you have tested all electric circuits that PCs and peripherals will be
plugged into and that the circuits are properly grounded and sound. The installation is by
1-16
-------
Introduction
far the most time consuming portion of LAN implementation. It is crucial that a planned,
organized, and consistent approach be used for these tasks.
The SMA contract offers installation support for servers, bridges, gateways, and user
workstations on a fee basis. An agreement on the number of hours and labor mix required
for the installation need to be agreed upon by SMA and your organization. Your design
and planning will be the basis for these costs so it is important that they be accurate. No
•in wall" wiring is available from SMA so the LAN Administrator will need to work with
the existing facilities manager and/or a local contractor to support this wiring (In
Washington, all wiring must be coordinated with Dwight Rodgers at the Washington In-
formation Center. Other locations must provide a wiring plan for review by Bob Denny
of NDPD in Research Triangle Park). Wiring should be Type 2 cable which consists of
both shielded twisted pair and regular telephone wiring. Cabling installation is discussed
in detail in Volume it Appendix E. Some of the other installation tasks are simplified
when buying through SMA because they will be responsible for burn-in, testing, format-
ting, and loading all ordered software on the file server. With proper notice via the TSR,
communication services will be available on schedule for installation testing. NDPD/NCC
will support the installation and testing of the gateways to other Agency resources, if re-
quired.
Some National Program Offices may incorporate the LAN as a part of their normal
support offerings, developing applications that take advantage of this technology. For
those offices, the National Program Office will be responsible for installing and testing
their applications. These tasks cannot begin until the network hardware and software is
installed and functioning properly.
If, during installation, a problem arises that cannot be handled by the LAN Ad-
ministrator, he or she should contact NCC User Support for assistance. SMA also offers
installation assistance on a cost basis.
• Training
Appropriate training is available under the SMA contract Seven courses are offered,
each designed to address a particular group's needs, and each is described in detail in Ap-
pendix C These courses will be offered on a cost basis either in Research Triangle Park
or at the user location. In addition, the EPA Information Centers and NCC Training will
continue to offer applications training for Agency standard programs such as Lotus 1-2-3
and dBASEIH Plus.
Management personnel must understand what the capabilities and limitations of the
LANs are so that they can make informed decisions regarding their use. They also need
to understand the costs associated with LANs. A management commitment of the man-
power and time needed to install the LAN as well as that required to continue to support
the LAN over time is necessary if the LAN is to be successful. Thus managers are en-
couraged to attend the Executive Management Overview course.
The most urgent need for training is for the LAN Administrator. This individual is
the pivotal point for the success or failure of the LAN. There is a lot of help available from
NDPD and SMA for most aspects of the LAN design, installation, and trouble shooting.
However, the daily operation of the LAN, as well as the first line of support for the LAN,
1-17
-------
Volume f-LAN Desian & Planning
is the responsibility of the LAN Administrator. This training is available as the LAN AH-
ministratnr course developed by SMA.
User training is a crucial part of LAN implementation. The way the users conduct
their daily business will change once they become members of a LAN. In order to obtain
the full utility of the available connectivity and sharing, users must understand how to ac-
cess those services. Training will show the user how files are created, used, and deleted on
the LAN. Backups, printer usage, and local rules of operation need to be addressed. SMA
offers a basic and an advanced course for users which can be taught on-site at the time a
LAN is installed. In some cases, a national application such as CERCUS will be an in-
tegral part of the LAN. Users will need special instruction to use these applications. This
instruction is the responsibility of the National Program Office.
Scheduling, registration, and evaluation are the responsibilities of the course offerer.
The EPA Project Officer is to be notified of upcoming courses so that NDPD Training
can advertise times, places, and number of slots available, etc.
Remember that a training plan must be Included in the design document submitted
for NDPD approval. Details for preparing the training plan are presented in Chapter 2.
• Acceptance
Once the LAN has been installed and tested, it will go through an initial acceptance
phase. This phase includes releasing the system to the users for normal operations, install-
ing any special software from appropriate national programs offices, and following normal
operational procedures. Users will be encouraged to use the system as much as possible
during this period. Given the new technology, new equipment and software, and new ap-
plications, demands on the LAN Administrator will be high during this phase. Problems
of operator error, equipment failure, application bugs, lack of understanding, and unstable
communications may occur. It is the responsibility of the LAN Administrator to obtain
needed support from NDPD, SMA, the National Program Offices (for their applications),
or Information Centers as needed to bring the LAN up to its highest level of productivity.
• Local Day to Day Operation
The day-to-day operation of the LAN is the responsibility of the user organization
under the direction of the LAN Administrator. If there are organizations without adequate
staffer those that prefer NDPD operation, NDPD will provide the dairy operation support
on a full costing basis via one of the Agency contracts.
Each local organization wOl have its own operational rules and procedures. These
should be based on the guidance issued by NDPD. These procedures should dearly iden-
tify responsibilities and contacts for users. Backup schedules should be published as well
as any limitations on using the LAN resources such as print volume, etc. For national ap-
plications, there may be schedules for uploading data, etc that must be married to the local
schedule.
One part of the normal daily operation of the LAN is to review the operational
parameters of the system, monitor activity, and try to ascertain any hotspots or problem
areas. This will be the responsibility of the LAN Administrator. Through such monitor-
1-18
-------
Introduction
ing, he/she will be able to identify expansion needs and other system needs, such as addi-
tional server and print capacity.
• Maintenance
Maintenance includes both hardware and software. For hardware maintenance, a
user organisation may choose to do its own or to purchase it from the vendor. Both the
FDC and SMA contracts offer maintenance for their products. Purchasing and implement-
ing maintenance is the responsibility of the LAN Administrator.
NDPD has a LAN laboratory where new products are tested on a standard LAN con-
figuration. This setup can be used to assist LAN Administrators with troubleshooting
hardware, software, and compatibility problems. As new releases of the operating system
become available, NDPD will conduct tests to identify compatibility problems that may
occur in the EPA environment and verify correct operation with existing Agency resour-
ces. NDPD will notify LAN Administrators that they need to upgrade their copies of the
operating system and of any problems identified to date. NDPD will commit to support-
ing the latest approved version of the operating system. As new versions are adopted, the
older version will be supported for only six additional months. Daily support for problem
resolution regarding the operating system will be provided by NDPD. SMA also offers
support, and there is a subscription to the Novell Hotline available via the SMA contract
Since NCC is subscribing to this service, most user organizations will not need the Novell
subscription. However, as networks grow larger, this service will become more important.
Just as applications like dBASE m Plus change over time, national applications like
CERCUS also change. They too must go through the upgrade process. National Program
Offices must institute a change management procedure to keep all Agency implementa-
tions of their applications at the current release level A prudent procedure would be to
maintain the most current copy of the software on the 3090 for distribution.
• Troubleshooting
The usual role of troubleshooting is to identify and resolve problems with the LAN.
Hardware and software diagnostic tools such as the token ring diagnostics will be used in
this process. The first line of defense in troubleshooting is the local LAN Administrator.
• User Support
The user is responsible for his or her PC This includes any local software residing
on the individual PC All funding, procurement (within Agency regulations), license agree-
ments, updates, and problems are the final responsibility of the user. If the software was
purchased from the FDC PC contract, the user should first call the FDC User Support
number for assistance. If help is not forthcoming and if these packages are Agency stand-
ard packages, help will be available from the Information Centers. If there is a problem
with the hardware and the unit is under warranty or you have purchased maintenance, call
the appropriate vendor. If no vendor assistance is available, you can contact your local In-
formation Center for help. Depending on the item in question, the Information Center
may or may not be able to help.
1-19
-------
Volume t-LAN Design A Planning
Users on a local area network have the additional potential for problems which the
network system software, network applications software, and network hardware provide.
Operational problems may exist such as one user tying up the printer and preventing others
from obtaining timely access to it For network hardware, software, and operational
problems, the first line of help is the LAN Administrator. The LAN Administrator (or his
or her backup) is the individual appointed within an organization to be totally responsible
for the local area network. This individual is involved from the cradle to the grave when
designing, installing, training, and operating the LAN. He or she is the single point of con-
tact with NDPD to resolve problems, integrate needed changes, and to plan for expansion
as required.
The LAN Administrator can handle most questions regarding the network but still
may need occasional help. If he or she cannot resolve the problem, help is available from
other sources, including NCC User Support (FTS 629-7862), NCC Telecommunications
(FTS 629-4506), the Information Centers, and SMA (on a fee basis, contact them at
919/544-6311 or 800/356-7813). Note that problems such as a lack of understanding of how
to print a document from a word processor should still be referred to the local Informa-
tion Center for help.
While NDPD generally provides the support as detailed in Appendix H, its staff is
limited and occasionally there is need for additional support Support for the LAN tech-
nology is available via the SMA LAN contract This contract offers planning design, in-
stallation, problem determination and trouble shooting, and LAN evaluation services.
This support is a cost item and must be planned for by the user organization. NDPD recom-
mends that an organization purchase a limited number of hours for use at critical times
when NDPD troubleshooting support is less flexible. If a problem arises, NDPD is not
available, and no contract mechanism is in place, it could take two or more weeks to cut
the PR, agree to costing, and have SMA appear on- site. The services available from SMA
are discussed in detail in Chapter 3.
• Security
Log books and recordkeeping are essential. Security of the file server, any confiden-
tial printouts, data integrity, and user access must be explicitly planned and documented.
No confidential data or any data subject to the Privacy Act can be made available over a
LAN without the written approval of the Director, OIRM. Special care must be taken to
preserve the confidentiality of some data, and that care is not limited to file security on the
LAN, but extends to security of printed output as well
Assuring data security in terms of backups of file servers and user access rights is the
responsibility of the LAN Administrator. Written procedures are needed at each location
with signoffs giving specific individuals access to applications and files. Data integrity
within the application is the responsibility of the program office developing the applica-
tion. For example, if certain fields in a data base are considered key fields, only a limited
number of persons should be able to modify those fields, add records, and delete records.
The applications developer needs to address these limitations in the design and implemen-
tation of the software. Planning the security of the LAN most be addressed in the sup-
porting documentation submitted with the LAN TSR for NDPD approvaL
1-20
-------
Introduction
PCs Installation 1st 3 months
(manweeks) (%)
< 10 2 35-50
10-25 3 50-75
25-100 3-12 50-100
100+ 12 100
Ongoing
(%)
5-10
10-30
2040
35-100
Table 1.1 Estimated Required Workhours for LAN Administrator
1.8.3 Summary of LAN Support Requirements
User organizations can expect that the LAN Administrator's ongoing dudes will re-
quire a minimum of five percent of his or her time for small networks, and may actually be
a full-time job for large and complex implementations. Installation will require full-time
effort over a period of weeks plus additional staff effort if support is not purchased from
SMA. NDPD will assist with the connection of the gateways and their testing. At times
when significant problems occur or upgrades to network software are implemented, the
LAN Administrator again may need to devote full time to these operations. Estimates of
the time which the LAN Administrator can expect to devote to his or her duties, based on
the number of PCs attached to the LAN, are presented in Table 1.1.
*• '
1.9 SUMMARY
The goal of this chapter has been to acquaint you with the technology of LANs and
to help you understand that installing one for your workgroup is not a trivial task. A LAN'
is a logical step to take to provide additional computational abilities to staff members who
are presently using PCs productively, and a LAN has numerous productivity benefits. You
must remember, however, that a successful implementation requires:
• A thorough grasp of the objectives to be achieved with its installation;
• A clear understanding of what the LAN can and cannot do; and
• A thorough and well-documented implementation plan.
When considering a LAN and beginning your feasibility analysis and cost justifica-
tions, the following points should not be overlooked:
• LANs entail design, personnel, hardware, software, installation, training, support,
maintenance, and security costs;
• A phased implementation is recommended;
• The costs of changes to a LAN are highly dependent on the flexibility and capacity
developed in the initial design;
• The Agency has technological alternatives to LANs for some applications;
1-21
-------
Volume I-LAN Design & Planning
Training for the LAN Administrator is required for a successful implementation,
and all users will require some orientation to the new system;
Your organization is responsible for almost all the costs of installing and main-
taining the LAN; and
Your LAN TSR with documentation must be approved by NDPD before order-
ing components.
NOTES:
1. Archer, Rowland. The Practical Guide to Local Ana Networks, p.17. Osborne / Mc-
Graw-Hill Berkeley, California, 1986.
1-22
-------
CHAPTER 2 - PLANNING GUIDELINES
Contents
PLANNING OVERVIEW 2-3
2.1 NEEDS ANALYSIS AND ALTERNATIVES EVALUATION (STEP 1) ... 2-7
2.2.1 Inventory of Installed Systems
2.13 LAN Feasibility
2.1 J Estimated LAN Life-Cycle Costs
2.1.4 Summary of Needs Analysis
22 NETWORK SYSTEM DESIGN (STEP 2) 2-19
2.2.1 Network Design Considerations
2.2.2 Applications Plan
223 Resource Plan
22.4 Summary of 'Applications and Resource Planning
23 SITE PREPARATION (STEP3) 2-30
23.1 Cabling Design
233 Electrical Power Requirements
233 Telecommunications Access Requirements
23.4 Space Requirements
2.3.5 Implementation Schedule
23.6 Summary of Site Preparation
2.4 TRAINING (STEP 4) 2-33
25 OPERATIONS PLAN (STEP 5) 2-35
25.1 Installation and Initial Evaluation
2.5.2 Standard Operating Procedures
2,6 SUPPORT PLAN (STEP 6) 2-38
2.6.1 Planning Support
2,62 Installation Support
2.63 Training Support
2.6.4 Operations Support
2.63 Support Planning Summary
2.7 NETWORK ADMINISTRATION PLANNING (STEP 7) 2-41
27.1 Role of the LAN Administrator
2.73 Security
2.8 SUMMARY 2-42
2-1
-------
Volume t-LAN Design & Planning
NOTES 2-43
PLANNING CHECKLISTS
COST ANALYSIS WORKSHEETS
2-2
-------
Planning Guidelines
Planning Overview
The nature of office work has changed drastically over the past five years. Tasks
which were previously done manually, or not at all because of their tediousness or difficul-
ty, have been converted to computerized methods. This transformation is due primarily
to the personal computer, which, along with office automation software, has increased
productivity significantly. However, when two or more people work together on the same
project, they must be able to communicate and share their information. In the past, this
was done with memos and other paper documents. For an office, the installation of a local
area network (LAN) can be a logical step in managing a continuing proliferation of per-
sonal computers, and it may be the most productive, cost- effective means currently avail-
able to achieve the required data snaring
Unfortunately, networking is the most complex area of the personal computer world
— it means a break with the "personal" realm and moving into "interpersonal computing."
In order to effectively and expeditiously implement a LAN, the requirements and the costs
must be well understood and documented. Proper planning is essential if you are to have
the approval and budget commitment from your management Even if your needs are ob-
vious to you, a written plan will usually reveal details which otherwise you might overlook.
• LANTSR
A LAN TSR must be submitted to and approved by NDPD before a network can be
installed. Supporting documentation which must accompany the TSR must, at a minimum,
identify (1) the LAN Administrator, (2) the facility wiring to be utilized, and (3) the con-
figuration of the LAN. The purpose of this chapter is to assist you in determining if a LAN
is the most suitable solution to your data communications needs, and also to provide you
the step-by-step details of planning and designing the LAN for your workgroup, including
preparing a LAN TSR. Also included in this chapter are design considerations which are
particularly applicable for the Agency's connectivity environment as it presently exists.
Other chapters address the topics of installation, operation, and management in great
detail However, because you must "plan your work" before you can "work your plan," these
topics are also summarized here.
• LAN Administrator
In the Administration portion of this chapter (2.7) the duties and responsibilities of
the LAN Administrator are mentioned briefly, and Chapter 4, Administration Guidelines,
covers them in more detail Administration follows the other steps because of its
chronological position in the implementation of a LAN. However, a LAN Administrator
needs to be assigned before the Needs Analysis and other preliminary planning are begun
so that she/he may participate fully in the planning and decision-malting process. There-
fore, it may be desirable to review section 2.7 and Chapter 4 before proceeding with the
primary planning activities.
• IAN Planning Steps
We cannot stress too highly that the LAN's ultimate success, as well as the total costs
of implementing and upgrading it, are highly dependent on the flexibility and capacity
developed in the initial design. The following LAN planning steps are adapted from an ar-
2-3
-------
Volume I-LAN Design & Planning
tide in Government Computer News.1 Figure 2.1 illustrates these elements, which should
be included in your TSR submitted for NDPD approval The remainder of this chapter is
designed to walk you through these planning steps:
Step 1. Conduct a Needs Analysis and Alternatives Evaluation. Define your data
sharing requirements and connectivity goals. Based on your current ADP environment,
evaluate the alternative solutions which the Agency computing resources provide. If a
LAN is demonstrated as the most productive and cost-effective solution, then proceed with
the remaining steps. Otherwise, perform planning for the most appropriate technology.
Step 2. Design the network, paying particular attention to see that hardware and
software conform to the Agency standards and that compatibility and system integrity will
be maintained in future system enhancements. A good design will also ensure that the sys-
tem will meet both present and anticipated needs. Elements of the design include the ap-
plications programs which will be running, the hardware resources which will be available,
and the site layout of the users who will be connected. Each of these should be addressed
by the LAN TSR and its supporting documentation.
Step 3. Prepare the site and plan the initial installation process, taking into account
physical layout, network specifications, power, space, and cabling issues as well as order-
ing and installation schedule. During a large installation, particular attention should be
paid to several points:
- Space for storage and staging of components must be allocated.
- Commitment to the project plan from all involved management Switching
equipment around to meet shifting priorities can result in software, hardware,
and documentation problems that are very difficult and costly to unscramble.
- Site surveys and site preparation should be driven to completion as specified
by the plan. This ensures timeliness, avoids aggravating the user community,
and maximizes the training investment.
- The quality of the network's standards should not be violated under any cir-
cumstances. The plan should include comprehensive testing of cable instal-
lation, functional validation, workmanship quality, and adherence to
specifications.
Step 4. Develop a training plan. With the installation schedule in place, it should
not be difficult to produce administrator, technical support, and user training plans close-
ly matched to the installation of the system by department. Synchronization of training is
essential to get fi»H value from training
Step 5. Plan a phased implementation of the network, and prepare an operations
plan. A properly functioning installation requires personnel with proper training and ex-
perience to bring it on-line smoothly and successfully. It requires planning that is careful-
ly coordinated with the department management, the vendors, and the support personnel
at NCC and/or SMA. This step is explained in detail in Volume n, Appendix F, Tmtalla-
tion Guidelines. Routine procedures required for the daily operations of the network are
discussed in detail in Volume n, Appendix G, LAN Operations.
Step 6. Prepare a support plan. This should be a joint effort between the LAN Ad-
ministrator, the users, and NDPD, and is essential to sustaining a reliable, efficient net-
2-4
-------
Planning Guidelines
Needs Analysis
System Design
Procurement
Installation
Training
Operations
Administration
Support
Figure 2.1 Local Area Network Planning Steps
work. The purchase of standard maintenance and software services should be mandatory
for all large networks.
Step 7. Be prepared to provide network administration and services which will be
required, particularly for large, complex networks. Regular tuning and maintenance
provide optimum performance as the user community and the workload expand. System
expansion, enhancement, and connection to higher level mini or mainframe systems also
must be specified and properly documented. As PC networks grow more complex, net-
work services will become ever more critical to trouble-free and efficient operation. They
should be planned today.
• Summary
MBAs and programmers learn the art of "top-down" design. When planning a LAN
installation, this means starting with a high-level description of the tasks to be accomplished
with the LAN. This description wfll make it easier to break the planning, acquisition, in-
stallation, and operation of the LAN into manageable modules which can be tackled in-
dividually. The details of each component can be solved without concern for the other
modules when the interfaces between them are well defined and understood. Apply the
principle of "successive refinement" to break each component of the LAN implementation
down into successively smaller (and more manageable) sections.
When the planning has been completed from the top down, the implementation can
begin from the bottom up - starting with small modules that can be easily tested. As the
2-5
-------
Volume I-LAN Design A Planning
operation of each is verified, add the next component Consider a phased installation with
a small system first Learn its ins and outs, then order and install the rest of the system for
the operational phase-in. This gives you experience and lets you plan and order the
majority of your system much more intelligently.
A set of planning checklists is included at the end of this chapter, and the sections
below include instructions for completing them. This way you can establish the hardware,
software, and cabling requirements for your particular installation. You should include
those requirements as part of your LAN TSR. The technical specifications of the LAN
must be approved by NDPD before you can proceed with purchasing your LAN com*
ponents and installing them. For review, the ideal LAN TSR will consist of the following:
(1) Cover memo addressed to Director, NDPD. (US EPAMD-34, Research Triangle
Park, NC 27711.) Contents include:
- Name and qualifications of LAN Administrator;
- Brief justification for the LAN (or a reference to your PC Acquisition and
Management Plan which includes a LAN);
- Size of LAN requested (number of workstations and servers); and
- Proposed implementation schedule.
- Total estimated life-cycle cost
(2) Summary of Needs Analysis. Contents include:
- Statement of objectives (L\N Planning Checklist-3, or LPC-3);
_ Examination of alternatives; and
- Justification of needs by cost effectiveness, increased productivity, etc.
(3) Completed Planning Checklists. Contents include:
- Initial Planning Checklist (LPC-1);
- Workstation Inventory (LPC-2);
_ Applications Plan (LPCs-4 & 5);
- Resource Plan (LPCs-6 & 7);
- Site Plan (LPC-8);
- Preliininary Cabling Plan (LPC-9);
- Telecommunications Access Plan (LPC-10);
- Implementation Schedule (LPC-11);
- Training Plan (LPC-12);
- Support Plan (LPC-13); and
. Administration Plan (LPCs-14& 15).
This TSR and its supporting documentation should be mailed to:
System Resource Information Group
USEPAMD-24A
Research Triangle Park, NC 27711
Attention: GJScruggs
It should be noted that much of the material contained in this chapter has been
adapted from the excellent book, The Practical Guide to Local Area Networks, by Rowland
Archer.
2-6
-------
Planning Guidelines
2.1 NEEDS ANALYSIS AND ALTERNATIVES EVALUATION
(STEP 1)
As stated earlier, installation of a LAN requires NDPD approval NDPD approval
will be requested via the existing TSR process. This section will assist you in the prepara-
tion of the requirements statement and an evaluation of other Agency alternatives. Deter-
mining the most cost- effective solution for your distributed data processing needs can be
complex. The analysis process involves performing separate studies of (a) application re-
quirements, (b) available technical alternatives, and (c) cost alternatives. It is not the in-
tent of this guide to provide a tutorial on preparing requirements analyses. It has been
written with the assumption that you have done some preliminary analysis of your data
sharing and communications needs, and that the study indicates a LAN may be an ap-
propriate, cost-effective solution. An excellent source of assistance in this needs analysis
is the document EPA System Design and Development Guidance, OERM 87-Q2A, available
from the Office of Information Resources Management
Establishing what work the network will accomplish, that is, what tasks will be per-
formed by and through the network is the first step in the planning process. Determining
what resources will be shared and what workgroup applications will be implemented must
be known before a properly-designed network can be put in place. By completing the first
three IAN Planning Checklists, you will have a better picture of your connectivity and
communications needs, both for the present and future, and a brief statement of those
goals.
We recommend that you review the checklists at the end of this chapter at this time,
and that you make copies of them to use for your working notes during the planning and
design of your LAN.
2.1.1 Inventory of Installed Systems
There are two approaches to determining your workgroup's data communications
requirements and the appropriateness of a LAN to meet those needs. The first is called
application-driven because you begin with a particular data- sharing application, such as
the Superfund CERCLIS project, a procurement tracking system, or perhaps a local data
analysis system. Terminal locations and cabling are then designed based on staff members*
needs for access to the application.
The second approach is called geographic because you begin by inventorying your
group's staff members, their ADP systems, and their individual requirements for com-
munications, data sharing, and applications. A cost-effective solution can be developed
based on this information. The planning checklists in this chapter are sequenced based on
this approach. However, if you have application-driven requirements you can use these
worksheets as guides and tailor them to meet your specific needs. All of the checklists are
available in WordStar and/or Lotus 1-2-3 formats from the Information Centers or NCC
User Support
• Workstation Inventory
Begin by identifying and listing the people in your workgroup and their communica-
tions and applications needs using the Workstation Inventory. LAN Planning Checklist-1
2-7
-------
Volume t-LAN Design & Planning
(LPC-1), at the end of this chapter. Figure 22 demonstrates how this checklist was com-
pleted for the NDPD LAN, and an explanation of its contents follows.
The Room and Staff Member columns are self-explanatory. Note that the NDPD
worksheet lists all staff members, including those with no immediate attachment needs.
You may have users who will require access to the network from off-site locations. We
recommend that you list these people here and indicate "Remote" for their room number.
Configuration refers to the type of system that each user has: the manufacturer and
model of personal computer, monitor type, amount of memory, etc. Notice that the NDPD
list includes several standard configurations (eg., Epson, Telex) and the notation "Spec,"
which means that person has a unique configuration.
A copy of the Workstation Configuration Information checklist (LPC-2) should be
completed for each different type and configuration of personal computer or terminal
which you have. Figure 23 illustrates the information sheet completed for the Agency-
standard Epson Equity m+ personal computer available through the contract with
Federal Data Corporation. Volume n, Appendix I, contains a copy of the complete LAN
TSR for the NDPD Token-Ring IAN implementation, and it includes descriptions for
each configuration in the division.
You may wish to defer filling out the configuration sheets completely until later.
Knowing the precise configuration of each workstation on the network is important for the
IAN Administrator primarily for trouble- shooting. For example, a user who has recent-
ly attached to the LAN may call the LAN Administrator complaining that a Lotus
worksheet which had always loaded successfully before would no longer load. The ad-
ministrator could look at the configuration sheet and determine that the user's PC had only
512Kb of memory, and that the additional memory requirement for the new LAN software
was taking up memory which 1-2-3 had used before. Problems like this can be solved much
more quickly if the administrator has the information readily available.
Install Date can be used to plan the phased attachment of PCs to the LAN, or to in-
dicate when the staff members will have their computers in place if they are not presently
installed, as the NDPD inventory shows.
The Ring/MAU and Lobe Length columns must be completed at a later phase of plan-
ning. The MAU is a Multistation Access Unit, a wiring concentrator to which the individual
PCs are attached with lengths of cable called lobes. The Applications Needs columns allow
the planner to assess the connectivity and applications requirements for the group. The
column headings are:
WP- Word Processing
SS — Integrated Spreadsheet
DBMS — Data Base Management System
EMAIL- Access to the Agency Electronic Man System
ASYNC — Access to other host systems via asynchronous communications
3090— SNA communications with the NDPD mainframe
PRIME — Access to a Prime minicomputer
VAX - Access to a DEC VAX minicomputer
FOCUS- PC and/or host FOCUS applications
2-8
-------
Planning Guidelines
In-
stall
MOB ttsH Msbsr Mto
1st floor CosBUtsr MSB
fils «on>*r 1 BT
•tow ttanassn 17
Brian Austin (7
T. Trscy BOM
BstMeri Control
BCf fC B2 BOM
BCf K IS BOM
BCf fC M BOM
CXI 3270 CstSMy *C BOM
Bsv*ll ACS K M
PA Offleosi
AMI Tod Bsrrls BOM
AS02 Muroon Johnson BOM
ASOS Oarr.lt Iduir future
ASM Mn fulford BOM
ASOS Joan slvins M
AS07 •IllloVlem BOM
AS09 «h«rry llrk futur*
AS10 BMrrlo JoBssan M
AS12 Boeky rttrlck BOM
ASU las CltBBsr BOM
ASU Conforane* loos futuro
AS1Bt tartar* Dugotr BOM
A3186 Joan Hurrsy BOM
AS19 Jorry lloyaskor MOM
ASM Joan susln futurs
AS21 Too tlrk BOM
AS22> Cotty rottor BOM
AS22b John Casgln futur*
ASZS Mn Mortsy BOM
ASM Mm SMroy BOM
AS25 Imlo MStsen BOM
AS26 Wsdt Isrrls BOM
AS27 Bab tamy MM
AJ29 Mm Clatan MM
ASU Mora* Isroroot MM
ASS1 HSU Bhoekslford BOM
ASS2 irues »ls1e*i futur*
ASM Mlekoy Cllns BOM
ASSSs Csrolyn CfcSBMos (S»OM
ASSSb Csrolyn Cnssblss (b)futurs
A3S6 Mi Clsrk BOM
A3S7 MftZauBntr BOM
AMI JIB Obsnschstn BOM
ASU BBBUMls MM
ASU MB Mtkls MM
ASM Allns Mlsff MM
AMI MMTBsrlt* Mrton BOM
unity* OfftBss
AS6I K! Conors* BOM
AS49S «. Bucsnsr B»
AV^jOk • ,^SB*BBBB\ BBKBBf
•UOW P* 4^BT»B»» SB
AS71 •. MUlnston MM
AST4* I. iuclMnsn BOM
A3746 C. MM** MM
AS7I B. teriOTS ••
ASTso •. tasssrslll BOM
Ian-
Fl|.
BN-1
IV- 1
•on
•on
f
r
T
•ton
I
Ipsan
T-V2
pton
»an
ll*>
!••»
• tu
• 1*1
•lu
T
XT
n
AT
Ipsan
TtptC
psan
XT
XT
n
XT
IpMn
«*an
XT-IB»
paan
»T-»
ATtpse
XT
XT
Epson
XT
327*
n
AT
IT
SH
Ipsan
Ipsan
SC"
IAU l«ngth
S4
2*
22
27
•*
SS
SS
SB
37
i n
1 39
25
29
11
23
20
23
10 20
10 J*
10 22
10 19
IB
IS
24
••
Si
Si
35
25
26
24
32
29
22
22
20
26
40
SB
SI
u
4B
S*
11 48
12 17
11 IT
11 22
11 29
11 SI
12 Si
12 Si
11 20
Applies!
0
BIB
K X B
B B
B B
[ B
I
1
B B
B
B
I
1
B B
B X X
X X
X X
XXX
XXX
X
X
X X
XXX
X
XXX
B
'B B
B
x
B
B B B
B B B
B
B
B
B B
B B
B B
B
B
B
B
B B
Ions nsodit
A sasui ' f
113 • 0
1
B
B
1 •»
B
*
B
B
B
B
B
B B
B
B B
X B B
X B
X B
B
1
X B B
X B
[ B
X B
X B
X
B BBS
B B B
B B
B B
B B
B B
,
1
B
B
B
B
1
If 0
1 1 T
......
(BB
1 B
•
B B
B B
B ' --.•.'..
BBB
B
B
BBB
B B
B B
.
.
1" "
Figure i2 Workstation Inventory (LPC-1) for NDPD TRN
2-0
-------
Volume I-LAN Design & Planning
AT 101 CWfiaJUTIOI UfOMTIOI OtCMIZATIOlI .
LM HAWI* acocuiT - > B»ni IP-1~ & "7
MtttrvUnfls
__ •* Honodirwi _ KSMUH n/X Hodit »> _l
__ WA (H/I Mdil H/40/V) __ C»t«r
^
__ Ifc OB (LotiM/lnttl/Mlcratef t
» Cinmted (idrtrMirt abm* I'lQDOO')
•. X" _ _
krri Oltk(«)i Cs «•<«• 3O »
•t *!«• _ »
Mrtftlmt
tonvulU *f«nt __ 10*10 _ »•»
torlct CIS-ZUC) _/_
*f Porni tarUt CIS-ZUC) _ fmlUl frlmtr
l f
I S0TtHBT9 PVCBBV' WftCIW
-------
Planning Guidelines
SAS - PC and/or host SAS applications
NC — Natural Connection access to Adabase applications
The remaining three columns may be completed for your special needs, as Presen-
tation Graphics and Project Management have been listed for the NDPD LAN.
• Implementation Objectives
With an accurate inventory of your workgroup's personal computers and applications
requirements in hand, you can transfer this data to the Implementation Objectives
worksheet (LPC-3). This collated information will form the basis for selecting the most
suitable and cost-effective alternative for meeting your data communications, data shar-
ing, and resource access requirements. The following sections discuss how to transfer the
information from the Workstation Inventory and to answer the questions completely.
Figure 2.4 is the Implementation Objectives checklist completed for the NDPD LAN.
1. What is the objective you wish to accomplish with the installation of the LAN?
Without a clearly defined objective, the LAN installation may prove to be an expen-
sive and time-consuming exercise whose net result will be user frustration and dissatisfac-
tion. The user requirements and objectives for your particular group should come from
work experience or from interviews with other staff members about your group's current
operation and im mediate and future requirements.
2. What quantities of personal computer; and terminals do you have in place and
planned?
Transfer the information from LPC-1 to the appropriate blanks. For example, the
NDPD inventory shows a total of thirty- five PC/AT-compatible systems (AT, Epson, and
Telex) installed or planned. Twenty one of those are presently in place or on order.
Present plans include installing eight more next year and six sometime in the future. These
summary counts, and those for the other equipment, are reflected on this form.
3. What forms of information sharing/distribution do yon require? Indicate number of
users requiring access to each resource.
Information for this question is also condensed from the inventory data. The num-
bers of users requiring connections to the various hosts should be placed in the Total
column, and the numbers of simultaneous users must be estimated based on your
workgroup's usage patterns and requirements. For each user, you should consider whether
his or her access will be (1) casual — infrequent job submittal or data transfer; (2) regular
— dairy job submittals and/or numerous file transfers, or (3) heavy — daily data entry, fre-
quent data transfers to/from the host Each type of user places different demands on the
system. For example, all EPA staff members within NDPD require access to E- Mail, but
they certainly will not access it all the time, or at the same times during the day. Based on
typical usage patterns, we have estimated that we will have a need for no more than fifteen
simultaneous users.
The number of users requiring access to the other system resources and data types
will be based on the objectives for the LAN listed in question 1, and the individual applica-
tions requirements on the inventory. Again consider what type of access the various users
2-11
-------
•» IM tufom tmaum • Vt
!* "I* ••
1MtU*
y - ^n nt 'f-*-"*.' *?**
8V£
* * * yrJ-Ti^yL— ^i^^/UVLx A»^
1. ••§
iw^«> to »••• i
• WHIM
ion
-flL
—t
M wvi*
i. ••<
IHbll
Mxur
Uc*4 •ylll-w*UI
af
-*• =
3E
It*
• ^\
/g
1
fttm
-^ •_
=1 :E
M
-------
Planning Guidelines
will require — casual, regular, or heavy—for each resource. When estimating the need for
local multi-user data bases and spreadsheets, consider how data such as budgets, inven-
tories, schedules, and purchase requests are handled presently. LAN connectivity may im-
prove the way this data is maintained and distributed within your workgroup.
4. What PC applications software do you need to share?
As with the previous questions, collate the information from the Workstation Inven-
tory applications needs into the Total column. Then you must estimate what the man'mnm
simultaneous demand is likely to be. For example, of the sixty-one planned connections
to the NDPD LAN, thirty-five users have anticipated needs for Lotus 1-2-3; twenty five
presently and ten more within the next three years. A reasonable estimate of the maxi-
mum simultaneous use of 1-2-3 is fifteen, and this is the number of licenses we should ac-
quire, rather than the total of thirty five. You should note that such shared usage may only
be taken advantage of if the particular vendor's software license agreement allows it, in
conformance with Section 5(a) of OERM Policy Directive 88-02 (Appendix A).
5. What alternatives have yon evaluated?
This chapter does not pretend to be an exhaustive reference for the preparation of
requirements studies and alternatives evaluations. Other resources are available within
the Agency to perform these tasks. Any justification for the LAN will require a discussion
of the alternatives considered and their various costs and benefits.
2.1.2 LAN Feasibility
Your responses to the Implementation Objectives checklist can be the basis for your
justification for the installation of a LAN, or they may indicate to you that a LAN is not the
optimum solution for your immediate and near- future data communications needs. The
following points need to be taken into consideration as you interpret the results of the
checklist
L What Is the objective you wish to accomplish with the installation of this IAN?
As stated earlier in this chapter, without a clearly understood and stated objective
for the LAN, the net result will be user frustration and management consternation. The
LAN is not a panacea for all communications objectives. Perhaps one important com-
ponent of this goals statement should be what the LAN is not expected to achieve, or a dis-
tinction between near- term and long-range objectives. It is important to know your
priorities. A dearly stated objective will allow you to continue to achieve the goals you
hoped to achieve with the installation of the LAN. If the original reason for installing the
network becomes obscured, your management may pronounce the LAN ineffective,
regardless of system performance.
2. What quantities of personal computers and terminals do yon have In place and
planned?
The decision of whether or not a LAN will be the most cost-effective electronic com-
munications media is based on what hardware you presently have and anticipate installing.
as well as how many people you anticipate giving communications access to the various
Agency resources, and bow much data they will regularly move to and from these resour-
ces.
2-13
-------
Volume f-LAM Design & Planning
PCs. Do you have a PC Plan in place? Installation of a LAN is particularly ap-
propriate when you already have an established base of personal computers within your
organization and you wish to connect them. This manual is written for PC/MS- DOS per-
sonal computers. It should be noted here that the Columbias, although they are MS-DOS
machines, cannot be connected to a token-ring network because of compatibility problems.
Macintoshes. The Apple Macintoshes (available through the new Desktop Publish-
ing Systems Contract) can be linked most effectively using the Appletalk network com-
ponents available through the same contract, when they are the predominant personal
computer within your group. The guides for that installation will be prepared in the fu-
ture. We anticipate that the necessary hardware and software for connecting the Macin-
toshes on the token-ring LAN will be available in the near future.
Lexitrons. Are they meeting your current word-processing needs? How much data
are you transferring through E-mail from/to a PC? Are writers still preparing manuscripts
or dictation tapes for transcription which therefore involve little electronic data transfer?
How long will the Lexitrons meet your needs? Will they break down before you outgrow
them? How does the yearly maintenance cost for these systems affect their cost/benefit
ratio? If the Lexitrons are meeting all of your current needs, the upkeep costs are not
prohibitive, and they are the only systems you have in place, then you have no immediate
need for a LAN.
Other. The Apple IIs found in some labs are not likely candidates for additional net-
working today. These computers can only be attached to a few proprietary LANs which
are not generally supported within the Agency. They must continue to be used in a stand-
alone fashion. Similarly, other computers which are not compatible with one of the
predominant systems are not well-suited for connection to a LAN.
NDPD 3090/LMF. Interconnection of all its computing resources is an ultimate goal
for the Agency. Much of this will be accomplished through micro-to-mainframe links to
the Regional LMFs and the NDPD 3090 mainframes. However, this will be achieved
sooner for those applications which are being developed on the mainframe or for nation-
al distribution. You may have a requirement for only one or two people to access the
mainframe today or in the immediate future. Do you have a requirement to utilize the
ADCR or the new Integrated Financial Management System? Do you have FOCUS, SAS,
or AD ABASE applications which utilize a national database? Depending on your access
and traffic data flow requirements, a token-ring LAN directly connected to a 372x front
end processor can be the most appropriate mechanism for connection. This can be ac-
complished without requiring the installation or maintenance of other LAN services (e.g,
local file or print servers). An in-depth appraisal of this communication link is beyond the
scope of this document, but is available through the normal TSR process.
Primes/VAXes. Do you have extensive shared database requirements? Or do you
have the applications which have been developed within the Agency, e.g^ the Small
Procurement Automated Tracking System (SPATS), PCMD Automated Procurement
Documentation System (APDS)? If so, the multi-user minicomputer system can be easier
to set up than a LAN. For certain applications which require frequent access to large
amounts of data, they can prove faster than networked PCs, but only when the total num-
ber of users is below a certain limit If the ultimate number of users is relatively small (less
2-14
-------
Plannlna Guidelines
than 30 for a Prime), then minicomputers can be the solution of choice. Additional ter-
minals typically cost less than LAN workstations - cost of terminal, cabling, and user setup
versus cost of a LAN console (SMA contract price $1300), LAN adapter card, cabling,
software, and user setup. However, bear in mind that each workstation on a LAN is a
separate processor which allows individual work to be accomplished without degrading the
responsiveness of the system for other users. Also, if the LAN goes down, users can still
accomplish tasks using the stand-alone PCs. Each minicomputer has certain fixed limits
beyond which response time becomes quite unacceptable.
With these factors in mind, determine if your present and planned environment is
predominantly AT-compatible PCfc.
• If so, then the Agency-standard Token-ring Network may be the most cost-effec-
tive solution to your data and resource sharing requirements.
• If not, another network may be more appropriate — Appletalk for a Macintosh
environment or Ethernet and DECnet for VAX connectivity.
• If you presently have a Prime installed and no PCs, more terminals and/or a CPU
or disk upgrade may be more appropriate than a LAN. Performance criteria
should also impact this decision.
• If you are operating in a Laboratory environment and communication with the
VAX is a major requirement, a DECNET/Ethernet connection may satisfy your
communications needs.
• If you presently have only Lexitrons and they are meeting your needs, then the
need for a LAN may be far enough away to delay this planning process.
3. What forms of information sharing/distribution do yon require?
• Connectivity: If you have only one or two staff members with PCs who require
access to a host, then 3270 cards from the FDC contract are probably the most
cost-effective solution. The token-ring LAN can support a large number of casual
or regular host users via the SNA Gateway. Connections which have become
generally available only recently allow the token-ring to replace coax and SDLC
connections to the IBM 3720/25 front end processors and the new IBM 3174
duster controllers, and these connections are suitable even for heavy users of the
mainframe. If you anticipate the need for a large number of-users to access the
mainframe hosts in the future and do not already have a significant investment in
terminal equipment and coax cabling systems, then the token-ring alternative
should be evaluated closely. It is a critical link in the EPA connectivity strategy.
• If your principal need is for connections to a Prime minicomputer, then the token-
ring LAN does not presently provide the connections you require.
• Pilot LAN installations within the Agency have demonstrated the utility that a
LAN can provide when sharing a laser printer or a large hard disk. Document
development times will continue to shrink as even more sophisticated software
is developed which allows for multi-user access, review, and annotation. Sharing
output devices such as printers and plotters is most effective when users are lo-
cated within close proximity to one another.
2-15
-------
Volume t-LAN Design A Planning
• The Superfund pilot in Region 4 has demonstrated the efficacy of the LAN with
the CERCLIS application. If you have a need for a local multi-user data base, or
are associated with a national program which is doing multi- user data base
development, then the LAN can be an integral element in your data processing
and communications system. ^ •
• Other multi-user applications such as project planning and workgroup schedul-
ing are being enhanced and made available for LANs. Certain groups may wish
to take advantage of these advances; they see the LAN and the software as a tech-
nological solution to a perennial office problem.
• A pool of modems which are shared via an asynchronous communications
gateway on the LAN can reduce the number of modems (and associated phone
lines) required by the group. This alternative can be particularly effective when
the primary need is for access to E-mail - an activity which will have a large num-
ber of casual users.
• If your only resource or data sharing need is for a printer or plotter, and you have
an anticipated growth over the next three years for 10 or fewer PCs, then a less-
expensive alternative such as an intelligent printer sharing device is a suitable al-
ternative to a LAN.
4. What PC applications software do you need to share?
• Almost all PC applications are presently accomplished with single-user versions
of the software, so the first step here is to evaluate how much data - documents,
data bases, spreadsheets, etc. — are being shared for review, document prepara-
tion, etc. The more sharing that is demonstrated, then the more a LAN and LAN
versions of the software can contribute to the productivity of the organization.
• As LAN and multi-user versions of the standard Agency software packages be-
come available, they will offer some distinct advantages over multiple copies of
single-user versions, not the least of which is cost savings for the workgroup.
Upgrading to new versions of software has proven to be quite a time-consuming
task for the PC Site Coordinators. Maintaining a single copy of a LAN version
will reduce the tedium associated with distributing updates to the group.
5. What alternatives have yon evaluated?
The costs and benefits of each alternative appropriate to your workgroup's require-
ments should be considered before the final decision to install a LAN is made.
2.1.3 Estimated LAN Life-Cycle Costs
In Chapter 1 we identified seven categories under which costs could be identified
(Hardware, Design & Planning, Maintenance, Software, Management and Security, Train-
ing, and Support). Although the actual costs which you will encounter are very site-specific;
we present here estimates for "typical" LANs with 10,25, and 70 workstations attached.
You may tailor the structure of these systems to fit your group's particular needs.
2-16
-------
Planning Guidelines
The following explanations and assumptions are applicable for each of the three con-
figurations:
• Detailed worksheets for each of the configurations are included following the
LAN Planning Checklists at the end of this chapter. A1-2-3 template is also in-
cluded with the other worksheets described in Chapter 3 and Appendices B and
C
• The time required of the LAN Administrator for each of the configurations match
the upper limits of the estimates in Table 1.1. The dollar amounts are based on
thesalaryofaGS-11.
• While one office may have resident expertise available to accomplish some func-
tions, such as system design or support, while another group must contract with
outside resources for these servies, the real costs, whether in FTEs or cash, are
similar. We use the hourly fees from the SMA contract for our estimates.
• The PCs which will serve as workstations are already in place. This includes their
single-user software packages, and the software prices reflect this installed base.
One dBase in Administrator can be installed on the server, and then each addi-
tional single-user program disk can be used to update the "concurrent users"
counter, so that no additional purchases are required. Lotus offers a similar
upgrade for its LAN version, $250 for a 5-user license. These conversion paths
can reduce the initial costs involved in establishing server-based applications
software.
• No custom applications are considered. In your situation this could, however rep-
resent the largest percentage of your total costs, depending on the application.
However, this cost would be incurred regardless of computer platform. Alterna-
tive cost analysis for this is outside the scope of these guidelines.
• In-wall wiring requirements vary considerably from building to building. The
prices included here are, at best, "guestimates," and you must conduct a more ac-
curate assessment for your particular site before you budget any funds. Here we
have assumed costs for the media and installation to be $125 per foot. Teflon-
jacketed Type 1 and Type 2 wire (required in many places to conform to fire
codes) can run more than $1.00 per foot exclusive of installation.
• These are single-ring LANs which connect offices in close enough proximity that
no repeaters are required. No costs for bridges between rings are included.
• The values used for some training represent the cost for a single student out of a
class of 12 to 16. The Users courses, which generally will be conducted at your
site, are scheduled together and in conjunction with other services to minimfao.
the costs incurred by the SMA personnel
• We have assumed an installation time of 3 hours for each PC to be attached to
the LAN. Our experience indicates that it will probably really take a bit more
than that, all things considered (e.g^ a little impromptu training may occur be-
tween the technician and the owner of the PC).
• For each configuration, we have broken the cost estimates down between the in-
itial purchase and installation and anticipated on-going annual costs.
2-17
-------
Volume f-LAN Design & Planning
1. ID-Workstation IAN
This is an "intra-office" configuration; it uses no in-wall wiring, but rather the 30- and
75-foot flexible cables which are available on the SMA contract
When the LAN is fully operational, the LAN Administrator will devote less than 10%
of his/her time to the various management requirements for this small LAN.
anninp & Installation!
Hardware 17,221
Software 2,733
Training 2^47
Services 11,028
Total $33,529
Per Node $3353
Annual Support $9,404
Per Node Cost $940
2. 25-Workstation LAN
The 25- and 70-workstation configurations are assumed to be too geographically dis-
perse to be accomodated by the flexible cables as was done with the 10-node system. These
setups require that fixed cable be installed "in the wall."
Both of these LANs provide additional services to their users (SNA and
Asynchronous gateways), and consequently, the per-node costs do not come down as much
as one might expect compared with the 10-node LAN. We have also included additional
printers with these which were not included in the 10-node system.
When the LAN is fully operational, the LAN Administrator will devote between 20%
and 35% of his/her time to the various tasks.
Initial Planning & Installation:
Hardware 41,748
Software 9,059
Services 14,840
Training 5,651
Total $7L298
Per Node $2,852
Annual Support $22,688
Per Node $908
3. 70-WorksUtionLAN
When the LAN is fully operational, the LAN Administrator will devote between 30%
and 45% of his/her time to the management of this large system. The 70-node LAN shows
2-18
-------
Planning Guidelines
some economies of scale compared with the 25-node configuration. The assumptions here
are the same as for the other two examples.
Initial Planning & Installation:
Hardware 89.749
Software 12,985
Services 30,447
Training 7,109
Total
Per Node
Annual Support
Per Node
$140,290
$2,004
$36,193
$517
The goal of this section is twofold. First, these figures and the worksheets at the end
of this chapter should assist you considerably in assessing the real costs of installing and
operating a LAN. Although the costs here may seem high to you, they must be evaluated
in comparison with other alternatives for accomplishing the same goals. Bear in mind that
this puts considerable computational capacity on each user's desk and at the same time
provides him/her with a high-speed communications link to additional resources. Second;
we wanted to demonstrate that there are significant monetary and personnel costs involved
with creating a LAN. No one should install a LAN of any size unless they have require-
ments which this technology can satisfy.
2.1.4 Summary of Needs Analysis
At this point you will know whether or not a LAN is justified as a cost- effective solu-
tion to your data sharing and communications needs. If a local area network is an ap-
propriate solution, then you may proceed with the detailed planning as explained in the
remainder of this chapter.
If you have not already done so, now is the time to select a LAN Administrator so
that she or he may be involved in all phases of the LAN implementation and also receive
the required training in a timely manner. Now is also an appropriate time to assess the
level of technical expertise available within your workgroup. If your staff and other local
resources do not possess the required experience, acquire planning support through the
Agency LAN contract with SMA.
2.2 NETWORK SYSTEM DESIGN (STEP 2)
It is the aim of this step to help you actually design your network. By "network sys-
tem design" we mean planning what the system will do, and for whom. We Distinguish this
from network topology planning, which deals with the actual wiring and network adapter
cards and their communications protocols, and which is covered in section 3 of this chap-
ter and Appendix E, Site Preparation, in Volume LL The following sections are devoted to
taking you through the design process, which involves developing two plans: (1) an Ap-
plications Plan, and (2) a Resource Plan. Before you begin these plans, you must have
2-19
-------
Volume I-LAN Design & Planning
dear-cut network design goals established. Once these have been established, you can
develop your plans, which become part of your LAN TSR.
2.2.1 Network Design Considerations
Once your primary objectives have been clarified and articulated, it is possible to
design the network to meet the established user needs. Elements of the system design in-
clude (1) what applications will be maintained, (2) who will be connected (and when), (3)
what resources will be available and shared, (4) system expansion plans, and (5) budget-
ing. During all planning, a most important criteria is maintaining the ability to grow
without disrupting services. This means that software and hardware compatibility and sys-
tem integrity must be maintained, and can best be accomplished by conforming to the
policies and standards which OERM and NDPD have developed.
Defining the "local area" which is to be connected can be approached from three dis-
tinct directions: a local geographic area, a shared application, or a workgroup such as a
branch or division. The latter two groups can be dispersed throughout several floors in the
same building, or even several buildings, but still need to have common access to files or
other resources. Indeed, one of the major strengths of the LAN is its ability to provide
rapid digital communications between people at dispersed geographic locations.
Ascertaining the applications available and who is to be connected to the LAN and their
geographical locations are the first steps in designing the LAN.
These geographic locations impact what hardware and cabling must be used to out-
fit the system. For instance, workgroup members located in different buildings must use
amplifiers, or "repeaters" to span the inter-building distances. If a public thoroughfare (i.e.,
a street or road) is crossed, easements must be acquired, or the pubb'c communications
system utilized. Within Waterside Mall, for example, it may be more cost-effective to con-
nect to the building's backbone network to link associates on remote floors, rather than
running individual cables.
It is anticipated that LANs will generally provide attachment for branches or for
workgroups which share an application. Connections between diverse groups will be a
secondary consideration, but one which will certainly be implemented as LAN applications
mature.
2.2.2 Applications Plan
What are the end users going to do with the system? Over the life of the LAN, the
user applications software will be the most dynamic area and will require the most direct
management Therefore you should also dedicate significant energy to planning what ap-
plications will be available, and to whom. In comparison, network topology (the cabling
and type of network adapters) is a decision which is made once and then is lived with for
several years. Adhering to Agency standards and recommendations simplifies this
decision. Likewise, the recommended Novell Netware operating system will be a stable
platform for all network operations. Applications, on the other hand, will change and grow
over the life of the network because new applications will become commercially available,
and in-house sophistication and consequent demands will grow.
t
Although providing applications may seem straightforward, there are numerous
aspects to the movement from single-user PCs to LAN applications which must be con-
2-20
-------
Planning Guidelines
sidered, otherwise lost productivity will result Just as there are a number of design con-
siderations for the total network system, there are several general design considerations
when planning the applications mix for the network. These are summarized in Table 2.1,
which has been adapted from Archer.
What software applications will be available on your LAN? This is determined by
the information sharing requirements stated on your Implementation Objectives checklist
(LPC-3). Your connectivity, resource sharing, and data sharing requirements dictate some
of the applications which will be installed For example, connections to a Regional LMF
or the NDPD 3090 will require communications gateway and workstation software; shar-
ing a laser printer will require configuring the network operating system print spooler
software; and a local multi-user data base will require dBase m Plus and its Lan Pack multi-
user access software for the server and workstations. These are the lands of applications
considerations which must be taken into account as you develop your Applications Plan.
The decision to install LAN versions of the PC applications which you have listed in
response to Question 4 on LPC-3 is influenced by two factors. First, when a number of
users infrequently require access to a particular application for short periods of time, it will
be cost-effective to acquire a single network copy of the program and limit access to a single
simultaneous user (with appropriate network utility functions) in accordance with GSA
guidelines and vendor licensing agreements. Should demand for the package increase, ad-
ditional copies can be acquired and the access limit increased. More and more vendors
are licensing their software for use in this manner, and they are also providing the documen-
tation separately from the program.
Second, changing to a network version of your standard word processing software,
for example, will generally be more cost- effective than continuing to upgrade numerous
single-user versions of the same software. This is true for two reasons: (1) the LAN ver-
sion will cost less than some break-even number of stand-alone packages; and (2) future
upgrades of the LAN software will save time and facilitate maintenance.
To assist you in developing your Applications Plan, there are two worksheets which
you need to complete, LPC-4 and LPC-S. Be as thorough as possible as you fill out these
forms, for it is only by getting to this level of detail in a comprehensive way that you can
come up with an adequate plan. The remainder of this subsection instructs you in the com-
pletion of these forms.
• Applications Planning Checklist (LPC-4)
First, look at the Applications Checklist (LPC-4). You will need to make an entry
for each task which the LAN is to perform. In the three columns provide (1) a brief job
description, (2) the package chosen to perform the task, and (3) the people who will re-
quire access to the task. Figure 25 is a copy of this checklist completed for the NDPD
LAN. If the package is not known (or perhaps presently unavailable), then consultations
with the NDPD or SMA support staff may be necessary.
If the list of users for a particular application is extensive, consider naming the groups
to which the users will belong. This is a feature of the Novell Netware operating system
which is described in detail in Volume n, Appendix F, Installation Guidelines. As an ex-
ample, note that the first entry on LPC-4 in Figure 2JS is RFP preparation, and that the
2-2t
-------
Volume t-LAN Design & Planning
Business - the work to be done, and how to do it:
- Problems to solve
- Improvements sought
- Conversion from existing system
- Financial resources to purchase system
Personnel — who will be using and managing the network:
- User computer sophistication
- User need and ability to modify applications
— In-house or outside custom programming availability
- Network management responsibility
Software - the applications that are available:
- Applicability to problems at hand
- User interface suitability
- Integration with other applications
- Conformance to Agency standards and recommendations
- Custom programming requirement
- Ability and need to modify source code
Table 2.1 LAN Applications Design Considerations
group which needs access to this application is AMPB, the people who write the technical
specifications for ADP RFPs.
• Applications Requirements Worksheet (LPC-5)
The specific applications which you require will each have an impact on your LAN
Resource Plan, which involves LPC-6 and LPC-7. To determine what hardware resources
(workstation configurations and number and configurations of the servers) you need, you
should complete a copy of the Applications Requirements Worksheet (LPC-5) for each
software package to be installed. The first page of this checklist provides space to docu-
ment the requirements for the workstations which will utilize the package. The entries
should be self- explanatory, and many of the parameters can be obtained from the reference
manuals accompanying the software. However, NDPD or SMA technical support may be
necessary for some applications, particularly national data bases or communications pack-
ages. The various entries on the worksheet are discussed below, and Figure 2.6 provides
a completed maniple.
Any time the Program Version for an installed application is upgraded, this
worksheet should also be updated to note any changes in resource requirements (e.g, in-
creased workstation memory, server disk space requirements).
The Workstation Requirements entries describe what components each user's per-
sonal computer must have in order to execute the program. Microcomputer entry states
whether the program is for the PC or Macintosh LAN. Some network versions of programs
2-22
-------
Planning Guidelines
twins
i LM fumim Maun. 4 Mm /0-2~-87
i Kainrai MCBUI Mm tma**>
4.0
cff/^tf / ^^xig^^ f yf fp
)r
-------
Volume I-LAN Design A Planning
require DOS Version 3.1 or higher in order to function properly; others may work with
DOS 2.0 or higher. When upgrades to the operating system become available, minor
incompatibilities may surface, so it is important to list the highest DOS version with which
the package has been tested successfully at the time of installation.
The Display & Adapter entries indicate which displays are suitable for use with the
application. Xerox Ventura Publisher, for example, works best with the EGA adapter but
performs acceptably with the CGA, Likewise, the Memory entries indicate what configura-
tion of RAM is needed for operation and for optimal performance of the package. For ex-
ample, Lotus 1-2-3 Version 2.01 can take advantage of EMS expanded memory, so that
would be marked "acceptable." If you knew that your organization created large spread-
sheets, you might choose to indicate "required" or "recommended" in order to meet that
need. Future applications written for OS/2 will require extended memory, so this slot will
be used more and more as time passes.
In each of the Disk Storage Floppy Disk spaces, indicate whether the listed device is
supported, and under the Hard Disk(s) show the recommended size of the hard disks. The
Recommended CONFIG.SYS parameters indicate the DOS configuration required for the
package to operate optimally. Ensure that these values are those recommended for LAN
operations. Under Printers Supported and Other Required/Supported peripherals list
the appropriate device manufacturers and models.
The second page of the worksheet provides spaces for recording the demands made
on the server(s) by the application — the Server Requirements. Few applications require
a Dedicated Server. However, those such as PC Focus or the various communications
gateways do have this requirement and they should be planned for accordingly. Most ap-
plications will actually run on the workstations and will have no Random access memory
requirements on the server.
The Disk storage entries indicate how much server disk space will be needed. The
amount required by the Program Files can usually be found in each package's documen-
tation. A rough estimate is 360Kb times the number of disks which come with the program.
The amount of space required Per user will be a function of the number and size of the
files which are created. Estimates should be made based on your and your users' experien-
ces with currently installed applications.
The Number of files stored and used will impact the server configuration and per-
formance. NDPD and SMA technical support can assist you with these numbers if they
are not provided with the software package's documentation. As an example, dBase UJ
Plus could have fifteen or more files open simultaneously if there were multiple related
data files open, each with one or more index files. WordStar uses program overlay files to
perform many of its functions, and these are read and loaded as required. The 1-2-3 help
file would be accessed on an as-needed basis, and each access would require a file
open/close and data transmission across the network.
Complete the Printers entries with information appropriate for your job descrip-
tions. Typically, a laser printer will be attached to a server for daily text and graphics out-
put The Forms for the laser printers could also reference the fonts which wfll be available.
Special needs of your group may require a daisy wheel printer loaded with multi-part forms
or letterhead, or perhaps a plotter. The Demand entry will be a function of your
2-24
-------
o>
am -VI
HBUMh
Mill lO-l-tTL-
M um tumim onain • M
JlL
Mia »v
-------
Volume I-LAN Design & Planning
workgroup's production. If you have a large data base from which regular reports are
created, you must estimate the demands accordingly to ensure that you have adequate out-
put capacity. Each Novell file server can support up to five printers; therefore it may be
cost-effective to install more than one printer initially if the demand is present
The Other Shared Peripherals spaces allow you to annotate your needs for the
devices which each application requires.
• Applications Plan Summary
Your Applications Plan translates your functional requirements, as stated on your
Implementation Objectives wnrMiMt (LPC-3), to actual software requirements. The two
checklists allow you to define the packages you wfll need, how many people will require
access to each, and what demands each will place on the system hardware. With this in-
formation in hand, planning for user access and accurate resource planning can begin.
2.2.3 Resource Plan
With the people to be served by the network and the functions which will be avail-
able to them established, you can plan the hardware resources which will be required. The
geographic layout of the attached workstations and their respective applications require-
ments, as well as the topology of the LAN, determine cabling and server placement Two
checklists will aid you in this planning step. They are:
• Server Configuration (LPC-6)
• Workstation List (LPC-7)
The various hardware devices which are shared by the users of the LAN comprise
the "system resources." For most of EPA's LANs this will mean the file servers and their
bard disks, the printer servers, the communications gateways, and any other special shared
devices such as CD-ROM drives. The quantity and types of required system resources are
determined by three factors: 1) the applications running on the LAN; 2) the number of
workstations attached to the LAN; and 3) the usage, or demand, which the users will place
on the various servers. One factor to consider when planning the locations of your file ser-
vers is that shared printers are attached to the servers. Therefore the servers should be
placed where they are most convenient for the heaviest printer users, or where it is con-
venient for someone to monitor the printers to assure that they are functioning properly
(Len have the correct forms and toner or ribbons).
A Server configuration rheeVlfct (LPC-6) should be completed for each server that
wfll be installed on your network. Indeed, completing the Application entries for your first
server wfll allow you to determine if additional hard disks or servers are needed for your
applications and user loads in order to provide adequate storage space and performance.
The Disk Drive Volume Names are similar to the DOS Volume labels with which you
should be familiar Appendix F, Installation Guidelines, in Volume n discusses naming
conventions in detail For each attached printer, indicate its network access name, the I/O
port (LPT1:, LPT2:, COM1:, etc.), the type of printer, and any comments about available
forms and/or fonts. Figure 2,7 provides an example of this checklist completed for the
NDPDLAN.
2-26
-------
Planning Guidelines
Network performance, and consequently the number of servers, amount of memory,
etc, are based on the applications to be installed and the impact each has on the network.
The information for the Application entries should come from the Application Require-
ments Worksheets (LPC-5) which you have prepared for your LAN. Again, the Per User
Disk Space requirements will depend strongly on your particular tasks. The Loading entry
(H/M/L = Heavy / Moderate / Light) depends on the program and the use. The mix of
server-based multi-user applications with shared data and single- user applications mere-
ly resident on the server with both local and server disk storage determines the loading on
the network and the amount of server disk space required.
One of the strengths of the LAN compared with minicomputers and other types of
host/terminal systems is that the actual processing is distributed among the workstations
(each of which is a computer and has its own CPU), rather than being performed on the
single central processor. Performance and response time then are affected only by data
transfers across the network, and not delays associated with computations.
. Evaluation of loading, then, is measured by the amount of data which a particular ap-
plication moves back and forth across the network. Lotus 1-2-3, for instance, will lightly
load the network because the only movement of data occurs during the File Retrieve/Save
and Print commands. The program and spreadsheet in use are contained totally in the
workstation's memory. dBase HI Plus, on the other hand, because it can work with data
bases much larger than available memory, can perform intense amounts of data transfer,
particularly during functions such as INDEXing a large data base, where two (or more)
files are being read from and written to simultaneously.
These types of applications and their relative loadings impact the number of users
you want to assign to each server
Application
Server Loading
Server-based, multi-user
Mainframe file transfer
Single-user, workstation-based,
but sharing data
Shared access applications
Project management
E-mail
Casual Mainframe access
Graphics
Workstation-based, single-user
(storage only)
Heavy
Moderate/heavy
Moderate
Light
Light
A very rough estimate of the number of users which a network server available
through the Agency LAN contract (IBM PS/2 Model 80's) can support is as follows:
Light Use:
Moderate Use:
Heavy Use:
18-36 users;
12-18 users;
6-12 users.
2-27
-------
Volume I-LAN Design & Planning
nu/rtirr nrvti OWISUUTIOI
»* IM mmims ocoaisT • *
t<«,
M*g/S Offiet.
~t'6?
ttzirwi
»v»iuau ro«
^ .•. j » lM**tc
tf^'e*Tie»
I
2
4
S
y
I
t
10.!
OIK met • or —«im»— towiic
»og>«n m ugi tBoi—ns—&£,—uaaa
IMk
« u**~
IK-*
Figure 2.7 Server Conflguratlon (LPC€) for NDPD LAN
2-28
-------
Planning Guidelines
If you find that you require more of a particular resource than you can support on a
single server (e.g., disk space, estimated printer capacity), evaluate the allocation of ap-
plications to multiple servers. In the view of many writers on the subject, the best approach
is to establish a single-server LAN with the primary application installed in a pilot mode.
Operational data gathered from your workgroup's experiences will indicate both the need
for additional servers and a good feel for the loading that your applications are going to
impose as additional users are added. NDPD staff and SMA technical support personnel
can also assist with this critical phase of the planning process.
Complete the Server Configuration checklist by listing the groups of users who will
access the server disks and printers. As Figure 2.7 illustrates, these are the same groups
which were defined earlier for the applications (see Figure 15, LPG4)
The Workstation TJst (LPC-7) provides a cross-tabular reference to the Workstation
Inventory (LPC-1). Indeed, you may wish to combine the two into a single Lotus 1*2-3
spreadsheet for your own planning and LAN documentation purposes. This sheet trans-
lates the applications requirements from the inventory to network group memberships and
applications access rights.
Each person must have a unique Station ID and Network Login ID, which can be as-
signed at this time. NDPD will supply guidelines for creating these IDs so that they can be
unique throughout the Agency. Group Membership and Applications Access are assigned
to the appropriate groups and applications from the Server Configuration checklist based
on the user's functional and access requirements. Finally, Allocated Disk Space is how
much disk space is reserved for each user's personal files on the server. This will be a func-
tion of the local storage capacity at the users' PCs as well as their need for shared access,
amount of activity, etc
2.2.4 Summary of Applications and Resource Planning
This completes a difficult portion of planning a local area network implementation.
With the desired applications defined and allocated and the required resources deter-
mined, much of what remains to be done is the "nuts and bolts" pan of the planning - figur-
ing out where to run the cables and how to manage the operation of the LAN once it is in
place.
The Site Design Summary (LPC-8) provides space for summarin'ng the three major
aspects of the LAN:
• Site Plan — the locations of users and workstations
• Resource Plan — the number and locations of the servers
• Applications Plan — the number and locations of the applications software
The Site Plan summary information should be collated from the Workstation Inven-
tory (LPC-1) prepared earlier. The number and locations of the servers, the Resource
Plan, are dependent not only on the geographic locations of the users, but also on the ap-
plications which will be installed. These entries are brought forward from the Server Con-
figuration checklists prepared in this section. The Applications Plan entries summarize
the applications planning data. Indicate on which server each application will be available
and how many stand-alone copies will be installed on individual's PC workstations.
2-29
-------
Volume I-LAN Design 8, Planning
2.3 SITE PREPARATION (STEP 3)
Once you have designed the LAN from the point of view of applications, users, and
resources, the site preparation phase can begin, followed by initial installation of the LAN
components. There are five principal steps involved with this planning:
PaMing Design
Electrical Power Requirements
Telecommunications Access Requirements
Space Requirements
Ordering and Installation Schedule
This section provides only a brief overview of the cabling design and electrical ser-
vice evaluation. The essential details of these two topics are contained in Appendix E, Site
Preparation, in Volume H Note that throughout these guidelines the terms "cabling" and
"wiring" are used synonymously to refer to the wires which connect the PCs into a network.
2.3.1 Cabling Design
This section outlines the required planning of cabling for the token-ring network and
wfll allow you to prepare preliminary plans and to communicate more effectively with
consultants. For LANs which will connect more than a single suite of offices, we recom-
mend that you utilize the planning and support services available through the Agency's
LAN contract with SMA.
• Pre-Installation Considerations
All wiring which is done for the installation of LANs within the Agency must con-
form to national electrical and fire codes and local building codes, as well as comply with
numerous federal standards. When planning the wiring there are three factors which must
be allowed for
_ Utilize existing wiring where feasible;
- Document ALL wiring plans and installations; and
- Plan for ultimate Agency-wide connectivity.
When installing a token-ring LAN, the computers must be connected together with
two twisted pairs of wires (for a total of four wires). This can be done either through the
use of existing cables or with new wire. NDPD has stated its recommendation that all new
wire be IBM Type 2. Type 2 cable carries the four wires necessary for the LAN within a
heavy shield. It also carries four additional pairs of wires wrapped around the outside
shield. This cable accommodates both voice and data communications with a single instal-
lation.
To accomplish this phase of the LAN planning, you wfll need the following materials:
(1) cable Schedules (for pre-installed cabling) or building plans showing conduits and
raceways; (2) floor plans for each area to be linked which indicate the location of wiring
closets, cable troughs (if any), and work areas; and (3) cabling design guidance materials
as described in Appendix E.
2-30
-------
Planning Guidelines
An outline of the required planning steps is:
_ Commit the planning team to documenting all steps in the cabling system
planning process and labeling all components of the LAN cabling system
daring initial installation and testing.
- Utilize the floor plans and other appropriate planning tools to design the ca-
bling system, which includes (1) the offices to attach to the network; (2) fu-
ture connections to the network; (3) wiring centers (located to minimi?* ring
length); and (4) conduits, raceways, etc for routing the wire.
- Accurately document the cabling system for your LAN following the proce-
dures described in Appendix E. This will be your Wiring Plan.
_ Determine and procure the required components for the ring. Where it is
demonstrated to be feasible, existing wire should be used. If telephone
twisted-pair wiring is considered, the following factors must be kept in mind:
(1) Ownership of and access to the telephone wiring may be a problem,
depending on who owns and manages the building. The telephone wiring may
be poorly documented. (2) The unshielded wire is more susceptible to electri-
cal interference and resultant performance degradation. (3) Fewer worksta-
tions (a maximum of 72) can be attached to a ring, and allowable distances
are about half that of the recommended Type 2 cable.
• Cabling Installation
Contracting for the installation of the cabling or the separation and punch- down of
the data pairs of the telephone media is beyond the scope of this guide. You should util-
ize the services of electrical or communications contractors who are familiar with the type
of installation you will perform. You should work closely with your building manager
during this step.
• Cabling System Testing and Verification
The wiring, for both existing and new installations, must be tested according to
guidelines described in Appendix E before attaching any PCs to the network. A qualified
telephony consultant should assist in performing the site evaluation. IBM will perform the
service on a fee basis, and personnel are also available under the terms of the Agency's
LAN procurement contract For consultation on recommended tests, contact NDPD
Telecommunications (FTS 629-4506).
• Cabling Summary
A Preliminary PaMing Plan* checklist (LPC-9) provides space for you to record your
initial cabling planning notes. This information will assist the designers when detailed
planning and evaluation are performed.
2.3.2 Electrical Power Requirements
Prior to the installation of the file server and workstations, a survey of the AC power
sources is necessary. This survey will determine if the power available to the computers is
properly conditioned for computer usage and LAN connections. A building plan indicat-
ing the path and sources of all power outlets should be available from the building manager
2-31
-------
Volume t-LAN Design & Planning
at your site. If possible, enlisting the aid of a building engineer that is familiar with the AC
power system should prove valuable in determining current or potential problems with
your LAN which can be traced to poor-quality electrical service.
Poor AC power quality can cause these problems:
• Data loss — due to power failure or brownouts
• Ffle server data corruption — if power failure occurs during a disk write process
• Equipment failure and damage — due to power surges
• Degraded system performance—due to excessive communications retries caused
by electrical interference
Some causes of electrical problems:
• Improper equipment grounding
• Poorly defined building ground — "floating ground" (this causes intermittent
failures, and is difficult to trace)
• Electrical noise sources (e.g., fluorescent lights, copying machines, electric
motors)
• Power surges (lightning, heavy machinery start/stop)
• Excessive use of extension cords — they can be unplugged, are susceptible to in-
terference
A comprehensive power distribution study is required to properly plan for the in-
creasing requirements for electrical service. The scope of the power distribution study
should include telecommunications, computer, and other sensitive hardware environ-
ments. It Should include, at a minimum,;
• Load requirements
• Analysis of the existing power distribution
• A power monitoring and quality analysis The results of such a power distribution
study should provide recommendations for correcting existing or potential
problems. Recommendations that may result from the power distribution in-
clude:
Installation of new circuits to meet load requirements
Computer-grade specification circuit upgrades may be indicated.
A modified load distribution plan may alleviate current or potential problems by
redistributing the load requirements for any one circuit
Installation of Surge Protector/Noise Filters
Installation of Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) on the file servers and criti-
cal workstations
2.3.3 Telecommunications Access Requirements
If your LAN will provide shared communications ports, these must be planned,
budgeted for, and acquired. The Telecommunications Configuration wnrVOwt (LPC-10)
provides space for documenting the hardware and software which will provide these func-
tions. Shared asynchronous modems require telephone service for the server. The
modems can be acquired through existing Agency contracts. Asynchronous communica-
2-32
-------
Planning Guidelines
tions may also be available through a dataswitch if your facility has one. The SNA gateway
will require connection to the appropriate controller or modem. This connection should
be identified and requested in the TSR.
2.3.4 Space Requirements
This is a simple consideration and consequently one which is often overlooked.
There are three primary space requirements for accommodating the implementation of a
local area network:
• During the installation of your local area network the various components may
arrive more quickly than they can be installed. Or a large number of workstations
may arrive simultaneously, with only a single person available to install and test
them. Based on the size of the installation and the ordering schedule, space must
be set aside for storage and staging of this LAN equipment prior to and during
installation.
• Each file/print server and communications gateway must be placed somewhere
permanently. While it doesn't matter a great deal where a file server is physical-
ly located, the printer must be convenient to its users.
• The wiring centers must be located so as to minimi^ the length of the ring and
to provide ready access for trouble-shooting and repair and expansion. This will
usually be in a wiring closet, although it can be in an office or common area for
small networks.
2.3.5 Implementation Schedule
Chapter 3, Purchase Guidelines, contains the details for ordering LAN components
from the Agency's contracts. You should refer to it for preparing your Purchase Requests
for both components and planning assistance.
Table 22 is a recommended sequence for the various phases of a LAN implementa-
tion, with approximate time requirements. Using the Implementation Schedule (LPC-11)
and these times, you should develop and record the schedule for your LAN.
2.3.6 Summary of Site Preparation
Upon completion of this phase of planning, you will have determined the physical,
fixed parts of the LAN — the cabling, electrical power, telecommunications connections,
and space. You also will have in place an approximate schedule for beginning the im-
plementation of your LAN.
2.4 TRAINING (STEP 4)
With the Site Preparation planning and schedule complete, the next step is to develop
a training plan for the LAN Administrator, technical support personnel, and users which
is closely matched to the installation of the network. Synchronization of training is essen-
tial to get full value from training classes. The SMA contract provides the Agency with a
2-33
-------
Volume t-LAN Design & Planning
EVENT/PHASE TIME REQUIRED
Planning 4-8 weeks
Submit Plan for Approval
NDPD/OERM Approval 3-4 weeks
Submit PR for components
Procurement Process/shipping 8-10 weeks
Wiring installation 1-2 weeks
Wiring testing 2-5 days
Power testing 1-5 days
Component installation 2-5 days
Operational phase-in 1-3 months
Table 2.2 LAN Implementation Sequence
source for training in support of the implementation of LANs. Seven classes are offered,
and a detailed description of their contents is included in Appendix G3:
1) LAN Administrator Course
2) NDPD & Local Support Personnel
3) Basic LAN User
4) Advanced LAN User
5) Executive Management Overview
6) LAN Application Developers
7) National Program Managers
Each organization installing a LAN is responsible for scheduling and coordinating
its own training. Classes may utilize EPA space or be conducted by SMA at an off-site
location using their equipment Numerous courses will also be offered at RTF and at the
WIC in Washington. When planning training, bear in mind that it is most effective when
it follows closely the installation of the LAN. The possible exceptions are training for the
LAN Administrator and his or her managers, whose duties begin long before the LAN is
installed. However, if server installation services are purchased from SMA, a day of on-
site training with the system for the LAN Administrator and his/her associate is provided
as part of the services. This training will include a hands-on walk-through of network and
server operations, management responsibilities, demonstrations of spooler setup and hard
disk backup operations, user and group list management, the menu and command line
utilities, and other functions which the LAN administrator may be expected to perform.
This one-on-one work should reinforce the information learned during the LAN
Administrator's course.
The Initial Training Plan (LPC-12) provides spaces for you to record your training
requirements. Although it is designed for the SMA courses, you should be able to adapt
it for classes obtained from other sources.
2-34
-------
Planning Guidelines
2.5 OPERATIONS PLAN (STEP 5)
The implementation of a LAN includes several phases and facets, all of which we dis-
cuss in this manual Planning precedes all others. Installation, following procurement, en-
compasses attaching the servers and workstations to the cables, testing the system, and
loading and testing software. Once the installation process is complete, routine procedures
can be put in place for operating the LAN on a normal, production basis. In this section
you will develop your plans for this phase of your LAN implementation.
2.5.1 Installation and Initial Evaluation
Volume n. Appendix F, Installation Guideline^ covers the mechanics of installing a
Novell network server on the token-ring network in detail Here we consider planning the
installation. Just as planning is done "top- down," from the general LAN objectives to the
specifics of the components required to achieve the goal, installation should be performed
"bottom-up." Stan with small modules that can be easily tested, and use recent or dummy
data for trials and performance evaluations. As the operation of each is verified, add the
next component A few days operating a server with two workstations will provide you with
experience that can be gained in no other way, and it will allow you to deal with the pitfalls
common to startup without also having to deal with confused and disgruntled users.
This phased installation which starts with a small core system lets you plan and order
the majority of your system much more intelligently. Learn its operation and peculiarities,
then install the rest of the system for the operational phase- in. Without a phased instal-
lation, unless you are quite skillful or very lucky, you risk considerable loss of time because
of the following:
• Users' time wasted running in suboptimal configuration
• Your time spent reconfiguring servers and workstations
• Users' time wasted while you reconfigure the network
• Users' frustration and disappointment
• Management dissatisfaction with observed results
Notice that these problems aren't unique to LANs — they will occur any time there
is a change in operations or methodology.
Archer3 provides essential items for evaluation of the LAN during the phase-in
period which is adapted here as Figure 2.8. This list is also useful for continual evaluation
of network service and performance. Performance and evaluation mean not only doing
benchmarks and buying the fastest disk drives available, but also tuning into comments
from the LAN users such as "Boy, it seems like it takes FOREVER for that indexing to get
done!" or "Every time I go to get a printout from the printer, I have to add paper." or "I wish
I could _ on the network." Comments such as these suggest that the services offered should
be improved, either with additional resources—a new server could provide better response
for disk-intensive operations such as data base indexing; more service—an individual with
specific responsibility for keeping the printer ready during the day; or perhaps better train-
ing - especially when the "I wish I could -." can be done.
The installation process continues by defining the resource lists, naming the various
hardware devices (according to recommended conventions), and establishing security
2-35
-------
Volume I-LAN Design & Planning
levels. User lists must be created which (1) define the user names and network IDs,
(2) provide initial passwords, (3) establish server disk space allocations, and (4) determine
user access rights. You have already begun this process in Step 2, Network System Design,
but you will no doubt make changes as you become more familiar with the system.
The final step in the installation process is installing and configuring the software.
For all applications this entail; distributing the manuals providing any necessary user train-
ing, and establishing technical support access for the users. Other actions depend on the
nature of the program. Multi-user applications will require installing not only the program,
but also the data sets, allocating disk space, setting up user access, and probably more
detailed training for the users. Shared server-resident software must be added to the menu
system if one is used and usage counters set up. Workstation-based software will need to
reconfigured to access the new network disks.
2.5.2 Standard Operating Procedures
These procedures are discussed in detail in Volume n, Appendix G, LAN Opera-
tions. For planning purposes, it is important to understand what types of activities are re-
quired on a daily or regular basis in order to sustain the effective operation of the LAN.
• File Server Maintenance
- Backup/archive/delete
- Allocate Space
- Assign New users
- Test Periodically
• Print Server Maintenance
_ Manage Production control - sequence large jobs/access
- Load paper/forms/fonts
- Conduct preventive maintenance
- Inventory supplies regularly
• Communications Gateways Maintenance
- Configure for optimal operation
- Conduct host-side problem determination
. Install new users
• Security verification
- Maintain data confidentiality
- Maintain data integrity
- Maintain system reliability
• Application administration
• Software upgrades
- Operating system
- Server-based applications
- Workstation applications
- EPA-custom applications
• Problem Determination and Resolution
- File Server
- Printer/server
2-36
-------
Planning Guidelines
Disk storage
• Performance
- responsiveness (delay from request to action)
_ transfer speed acceptable? (time to load and save files - compared to
local hard and floppy disks)
- consistency (variation in performance due to user/applications loading)
• File placement
- Convenience (ease of locating and accessing)
- Usability (able to access from all applications)
_ Volumes (correct things on public and private volumes)
Print service
• Performance
- Usability (print from all applications)
- Spooling (time workstation is tied up during printing)
• Job management
_ Sharing (distribution of printers to users)
- Separating (distinguishing different users' printouts)
- Forms (need to change print forms often?)
Systems software
• Operating environment
- Understanding (quality of training)
- Ease of use (ease of doing necessary tasks)
_ Functionality (can do all necessary tasks)
- Reliability (as compared to single-user PC)
• Security
- Functionality (keeps unwanted users out)
- Convenience (not cumbersome to authorized users)
Applications software
• Personal programs
- Usability (can use programs on network as desired)
_ Licensing (do users understand licensing issues?)
• Multi-user network applications
_ Sharing (any problems with concurrent data access?)
_ Functionality (does intended job)
Figure 2.8 LAN Installation Performance Considerations
2-37
-------
Volume t-LAN Design & Planning
- Communications gateways
- Workstations
- Software
- Cabling
2.6 SUPPORT PLAN (STEP 6)
Preparing a Support Plan should be one of the early considerations when beginning
the planning for the network. All phases of the LAN's planning installation, and opera-
tions will require some level of support The LAN Administrator and his or her managers
should assess the skills and experience available locally, as well as the time available for
local staff to devote to the project, and they should, in consultation with NDPD and SMA,
outline who will provide the various required levels of expertise.
2.6.1 Planning Support
So far, this chapter has outlined much of what must be included in planning a suc-
cessful LAN installation. As you can see from what's been written, proper planning does
require a certain level of expertise, and neither LAN Administrators nor their managers
are required or expected to possess such expertise. For this reason, NDPD has made avail-
able via the Desktop Publishing / LAN contract with SMA consulting services on an as-
needed basis for planning both initial installations and system expansion. It is in your best
interests to utilize these services.
Descriptions of the two planning services available from SMA are as follows:
(1) Original Local Area Network planning and design:
- Analysis of Requirements
- IAN Feasibility Study
- Assessments of existing facilities (including but not limited to wiring, personal
computers, etcetera)
- Development of Agency standard LAN plans
- Configuration assessments — define requirements and what new components
needed
- Prepare materials lists of physical components, including costs and planned
usage
- Conduct briefings of findings and recommendations -•
(2) Evaluation of Existing IAN:
_ Analyze and assess operation of existing LAN
_ Nominal and peak load situations
_ Recommendations for change, as needed
- addition of servers or disk drives
- reconfiguration of IAN resources
- addition of communications gateways
2.6.2 Installation Support
A variety of LAN installation services are available from SMA through the LAN con-
tract Again, the descriptions of the installation services provide the LAN planner with an
2-38
-------
Planning Guidelines
excellent overview of the actual "nuts and bolts" steps required to actually place the LAN
in service. The six available installation services, which are explained in greater detail else-
where in this guide (Appendix C4), are as follows:
(1) Intra-office cabling system:
- Install MAUs and interconnecting cabling, component housing
- Performed within confines of single office or suite
(2) Large installation:
_ Installation of MAUs in distribution racks
- MAU connections with patch cables
(3) Network file/print server.
- Install and configure network operating system
- Create Supervisor profile
. Initialize user and group lists, access rights
. Install applications and structure hard disk
- Attach and configure printer and spooler
- Attach server to network cabling system
- Provide one day of on-site training for LAN Administrator and his/her assis-
tant - covers all management aspects of job
(4) Network bridge:
- Attach network bridge processor and network interface cards to the rings to
be connected
- Configure system addressing and routing
- Verify system operation across bridge
- Assist network administrator in reconfiguring for access to inter-ring resour-
ces
- Provide training for network administrator in configuration and operation of
the bridge
(5) Network communications gateway:
- Plan for and install the gateway server on the network
- Install communications adapters in the gateway PCs
_ Install and configure software
- Verify system, including EPA host access
- Assist the network administrator in reconfiguring user profiles for access to
the gateway and installation of workstation programs
- Provide training for the network administrator in the configuration and opera-
tion of the gateway.
(6) Network console or workstation:
- Install network interface card in PC and connect to the network
- Test operation of the computer as a workstation
- Install and configure network access program
- Add user profiles to server
2-39
-------
Volume I-LAN Design & Planning
2.6.3 Training Support
Four groups of staff have been discussed in this chapter (1) the LAN Administrator,
(2) technical support personnel, (3) operations support personnel, and (4) LAN users.
Through the contract with SMA, NDPD has training available which is tailored to each of
these groups. (See list in section 2.4 and details in Appendix C3 in this Volume.) However,
on-going support which should be anticipated includes in-service training in addition to
this formal classroom work. This guidance may take one of several forms, such as one-on-
one assistance for new users or for those with particular problems or needs, users'
memoranda or newsletters, users' group meetings (scheduled or ad hoc), and seminars.
Seminar leaders should include the LAN Administrator, technically adept users, NDPD
personnel, or SMA Senior LAN Analysts, each as appropriate for the topic of discussion.
2.6.4 Operations Support
Although normal daily operations will require little support activity, other than keep-
ing the printer properly outfitted and performing scheduled backups of the file server,
problems will arise which are beyond the capabilities of the local staff to handle. In most
of these cases the LAN Administrator and his/her staff can consult with NDPD user ser-
vices. For those situations which require additional expertise or on-site field-engineering
assistance, support from SMA and Novell is also available in two forms. It is highly recom-
mended that these services be acquired. The services are:
(1) Anticipated and active problem analysis and resolution, including diagnostics
and network evaluation for:
- Problem determination and resolution
- "Hot spot" correction
_ Cabling problems
- Workload increase planning
- Management briefings on planning & performance
(2) Prepaid Telephone Network Support for the network operating system:
- Assistance with day-to-day operations
- User questions
- System configuration
- Maintenance
— Utilization
- Performance optimization
- Problem determination
- Host data base access
- Operating suggestions
- System patches
- Bug fixes
- Known problem work-arounds
2.6.5 Support Planning Summary
Each phase of the implementation of the LAN has unique skill and expertise require-
ments, and the LAN Administrator must see that the support is available. He or she v.iH
provide the first level of assistance to the users on the LAN. NDPD has provided several
2-40
-------
Planning Guidelines
sources of support for the LAN Administrator. The primary sources are NCC User Sup-
port and the SMA, through the LAN Contract The SMA services should be acquired
through blanket purchase agreements so that they will be readily available when needed.
Use the Support Planning (Theclclist (LPC-13) to list these requirements.
2.7 NETWORK ADMINISTRATION PLANNING (STEP 7)
At this point, we ask that you keep a couple of things in mind as you consider the ad-
ministrative requirements for operating the LAN. First, the major hurdles are planning
and installation. If these are done with care and with the proper amount of forethought,
routine operations will be smooth and will require a small portion of the LAN
Administrator's time. Second, the complexity of the project is proportional to the size of
the installation and depends heavily on what functions are being provided. A ten-worksta-
tion LAN which provides only printer and file sharing is much less demanding than a
bridged inter- departmental LAN with one or more multi-user data base systems in opera-
tion. Use will grow smoothly if planned adequately. Chapter 4, Administration
Guidelines, complements this discussion of these planning activities: (1) the LAN Ad-
ministrator's role and responsibilities, and (2) LAN security and local policies.
2.7.1 Role of the LAN Administrator
Although a planning consultant may be responsible for the "nuts and bolts" aspects
of a network system's planning and design, it is the LAN Administrator who has primary
responsibility for the ultimate success of the installation. For this reason, it is essential that
he or she be intimately involved with each step of the design, implementation, and opera-
tional phases of the network's life cycle, as well as have an exceptional understanding of
the system's operation to all but the most technical of levels. Use the Administration
Checklist (LPC-14) to plan your administration.
The administrator of a workgroup's networks will be responsible for:
Working with NDPD and SMA consultants
Installing the LAN
Managing the dairy operations of the LAN
Managing Backup and Recovery
Providing user education and assistance
Establishing local procedures
Performing preliminary problem resolution
Providing feedback to NDPD with regard to network performance, user require-
ments, connectivity issues
2.7.2 Security
Security means protecting your system and data. This protection means providing
ready access to data which is correct and whole to those who have a legitimate need for it,
while denying access to all others. Chapter 4, Administration Guidelines, discusses the
means to achieve this goal: through physical measures such as locked rooms and remov-
able data cartridges, through utilizing the features of the operating system, and through es-
2-41
-------
Volume t-LAN Design A Planning
tablishing and adhering to administrative procedures which enhance the probability of suc-
cess,
Security must not be taken lightly. OIRM has established policies regarding the
storage and availability of data which must be adhered to strictly. At the end of this chap-
ter is a checklist (UPC-15) to assist you with general security planning. You should com-
plete it and include it as part of your LAN TSR.
2.8 SUMMARY
Proper planning is the key to the successful implementation of a local area network
for your office. We have attempted to provide you with an adequate level of detail so that
you could begin the task, without overwhelming you with minutae. As your experience
with the technology grows, so will your understanding of its abilities and requirements.
To reiterate the key steps in planning a LAN, and their importance:
• Needs Analysis. In order for the LAN to be viewed as successful by your users
and your management, its functions must be well understood and well docu-
mented. And a LAN must be the appropriate solution for those needs.
• System Design. Unless the actual hardware, cabling, and software requirements
are properly evaluated and planned, the system will prove unsatisfactory. This
will result from either poor functionality, so no one will use it; poor performance,
so everyone will complain about it; or poor service and availability due to
problems, so that your days will be long and unproductive as you deal with the
problems.
• Site Preparation. Without proper planning here, the installation and testing
phase will extend over months rather than days, as unexpected details pop up or
hard-to-trace problems emerge.
• Training. Everyone, from your managers to clerical staff who are daily users of
the LAN, must have an understanding of the system which is appropriate for their
level
• Operations. A LAN is a "system" which in many respects is more like a minicom-
puter than a PC Because it supports a group of people who depend on it without
fully understanding its operation, specific tasks must be assigned and executed on
a regular basis to ensure that those people's requirements are satisfied.
• Support As with all complex systems, a LAN will break down at times. By plan-
ning for these occurences and lining up the necessary resources in advance, their
impacts on your users <***" be minimized.
• Administration. Planning a LAN is not a one-shot proposition. The question,
"How can my users* needs best be met?" must be asked regularly. Performance
and functionality must also be assessed regularly to ensure that those needs are
being met The continuing goal: providing your users with an office automation
environment which man'miy^; their productivity.
2-42
-------
Planning Guidelines
NOTES
1. Tunmore, Russell B, "Automation Opportunity Brings Planning Problems," Government
Computer News, April 10,1987. p. 45.
2. Archer, Rowland The Practical Guide to Local Area Networks, p.57. Osborne / Mc-
Graw-Hill, Berkeley, California, 1986.
3. op. tiL,p.55.
2-43
-------
Volume I-LAN Design & Planning
2-44
-------
Planning Checklists
Cost Analysis Worksheets
2-45
-------
WORKSTATION INVENTORY
EPA UN PLANNING CHECKLIST
ORGANIZATION:
BATE:
STAFF
CONFIG-
URATION
IN-
STALL RING/
DATE NAU
LOU
LENGTH
APPLICATIONS NEEDS:
V
0
•
t N
E
N
A
1
A
S
Y
•
3
0
9
P
R
I
N
V
A
r
o
c
u
S
A
•
tPC-1
-------
EPA LAN PLANNING OCOCUST • 2
CONFIGURATION / USER NAME: _
•
MTE:
11
DOS Version f:
Video Adapter(s):
- NCGAdSN PS/2 Model 30)
_ CCA Color/graphics __ VGA (PS/2 Model 50/60/80)
^^m ESA Enhanced graphics ^^_ Others ^
•erculea
256Kb
(MM):
«WKb 912Kb
Mb ENS (LotuB/Inttl/NtcroSoft
Mb Extended (eddreued ebov* K'10000')
Nonitor(s)t
Color
Ertarced
Hulttftmc
Olherj
Of«k ttorege:
Floppy disks: 5.25"/360Kb 5.25-/1.2* 3.5-/720tt> 3.5-/1,
A:
I:
Nerd Dfsk(s): C: drive Mb
0: drive Mb
Addttfoml drlveU):
Mmoulll drfvn: 10*10 20*20
Other (specify):
of Ports: Serlel (IS-232C)
Psrellel Printer
Peripheral
Nsnufecturer
Modil
Cepecity/Speed/Etc.
Tape
Printer
Ubrkstitlon toftwr*
P^llther
Wtrsion
Integrated
Data las
Aaync. Caa&rlcatlona
-------
IMPLEMENTATION OBJECTIVES ORGANIZATION:
EPA UN PLANNING CHECKLIST - S/1 DATEt
1. What Is the objective you wish to accomplish with the Installation of this LAN?
2. Vhet quantities of personal eeaputers and tersHnels do you heve in plie* m* plvrad?
m mx\ n U/IN s rts
PC/XT
n^Mtlbl*
(not LAN-efl^»t«W«)
Iteclnto* Plui/SE/ll
LaUrara
Otfitr
ISM/Ttlct 3278/79 ttralntts
Prfat Terminals
VT 100/200 DEC VAX Ttrvfrwtt
S. Uhat fenH of inferaitfon tharino/diBtrlbutlon do you require? Indicate nufcer of uaars requiring access to each resourc
- IMMEDIATE FUTURE NO
TOTAL SIMULTANEOUS
Connectivity
E-Mail
Other Aiync Hosts
•DPO Mainf raw
Regional LNF
Prlae
Laboratory VAX
Other LANs
Resource sharing
Laser printer
Plotter
a^^^M - - * - - -
•KM reference
Other high-cost
Data sharing
Oooaant preparation
Local suitI-user data base
Local aultl-user
Local scheduling/project
aatlonal application oat
LPC-3/1
-------
INPLtMtltA
EPA Utt PUtNNlMC OCOCLIST • 3/2
4. What PC application* aoftMara do you ne«d to ahara7
BUOEI OF USEtS
TOTAL SINULTANECUS
Word Procaeslng
Spraaothaat
Data iasa Nana0aaant flystaa
Braphfcs Praparatlon
Projact NanagaBant
FOCUS
US
•attral Comctfon
What altamativaa hava you avaluatadT
Mo lavadiata Naad TES MO,
Prfa» Offica autoaatlon TES MO
VAX tarmlnale TES NO
3270 terminals for Mfnfraae TES NO
LPC-3/Z
-------
APPLICATIONS ORGANIZATION:
B>A LAN PLANNING OCQCL1ST • 4
KSCtlPTlOH PACKAGE USHS (GROUPS)
LPC-4
-------
APPLICATIONS IEOU1REICVTS UQRKSHEET
EPA LAN PUNNING CtCaCLICT • S/1
OJtGANIZATION:
DATE:
Veralon:
arfcttitton
tfbl*
Apple Naelntoah SE/I1
AmptabU
AcnptabU
5. 25 -/360Kb
S.SVI.UMb
5. 25 "/360Kb
Dick steragi: (Indlut* l«quir«d^ttcaHvide4/Acc«ptAlt M
•pptlcablc for Mdi)
rioppy df sk A: 5.25-/1.»b _
J.5-/720Kb _
floppy dftk •: 3.S-/1.2W) _
3.5«/720Kb _
tard Oftk(s):
C: dr<¥« _ to
0: drl¥» _ Mb
Additional drlwO):
•emoulli drtvw: 10*10
Ottwr (tpKffy):
20*20
CCMFIG.STS
FILES
WFFEI8
DEVICE
Printer* departed: (Manufacturer and Modal fa aa
late for your ayatea)
Other reoplred/eifportad parlpherala:
LPC-5/1
-------
APPLICATIONS tEQUIIEICNTS WORKSHEET
EPA LAN PLANNING CHECKLIST • 5/2
ProgrM NMB: Version:
Dedicated Server: teoplred tn leaainliil No
Shared aMory: Kb
Unshared Henry: Kb
01 *k ttercgts
0Mr«d rMd-onlys _^__ Kb
•hand rud/tirltc: -^_ Kb
Uralwrvd rood-onlyi ,^___ Kb
rMd/wrlt«t _ Kb
•uter of fil« UMd:
Proflr«i and configuration fll«:
Flit* per UMt appllectlon:
Printtn:
TYPE RKMS DEMAND (X of Opacity)
PI
P2
PS
P4
PS
Otter •hired ptrlpntralt:
Plotttr:
Other*:
LPC-5/2
-------
FILE/FBIIfT SCRVEI CONFIGURATION ORGANIZATION:
EPA LAN PLANNING CHECKLIST • 6 DATE I
Strvw Not:
tecationi
Installation Oatt:
Dl« DH1VE VOLtfg NA*£
ex.
0:.
H1NTCT NANg PORT TYPE AVAILABLE FORMS
DISK SPACE * OP —P«INTE«— LOADING
APPLICATION PtOCTAM PE* USE» USERS TYPE ECAP. (H/M/L)
1.
2.
3.
4. •
5.
6.
7. ;
a.
9.
10.
«OUP NAIg FUNCTIONS / ACCESS tlCHTS
1.
2.
s. ;
4.
5.
6.
7.
6.
9.
10.
LPC-6
-------
OKBMIIZATigN:
EPA LAN PLANNING CHECKLIST - 7 DATE:
SERVER: ______^_______
LOCATION:
STA- NETWORK ALLOCATED
EMAIL TION LOGIN • GROUP MEMBERSHIP* - DISK — APPLICATIONS ACCESS*
STAFF NENBEI ROOM PHONE ID ID ID 1234567890 SPACE 123456789
from LPC-6 S«rvtr Ceof
-------
SITE DESIGN SUWARY ORCANIIAT10N:
EPA LAN PLANNING CHECKLIST - 8 DATE:
ORGANIZATION AND LAYOUT Of THE LAN:
.SITE PLAN: LOCATION Of USERS AMD WORKSTATIONS
QUANTITY
•EXT U/IN
TODAY TEAK 3 TO.
TMs fleer and tring
TMs fleer, otter Mings
1 fleer seeiis
1 fleer btloM
Otttcr fleers, Mings
Other buildings
t«
RESOURCE PLAN: • AND LOCATION OF SERVERS
LOCATION DISK ATTACKED INSTALL
FILE/PRINT SERVERS CAPACITY PtlNTER(S) DATE
1
2
3
COMMUNICATIONS SERVERS « PORTS
SNA Cttcusy
Aiync. C«t«w*y ^___^_^_^^_^_^ _^_^_________
»adow PC 1
ShadoN PC 2
APPLICATIONS PLAN: f AND LOCATION OF APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE:
LAN VERSION « INDIVIDUAL
APPLICATION ON SERVER: PC COPIES:
LPC-6
-------
EPA LAN PLANNING CICCKLIST • 9 DATE:
Building Manaoar Contact:
Electrical Contractor Contact:
TELEPHONE WIRE
•pair Talapnona Pair* AvallablaT Tea
Omar:
Oocunantatlon Source:
itation Accuracy?
Acceptability Tatting Performed:
Iwulu?
Cloaat Accaw?
FLCOR PLANS
Sourca:
Availability:
laquirad Laad-tiav:
Accuracy of wiring/conduit information:
CABLING AND MUS
•otantial MAU locatlona tdantifiad:
Estiaata of total cabla langth to bt run:
LPC-9
-------
TELECOMUUCATIONS CONFIGURATION
EPA LAN PLANNING CHECKLIST • 10
ORGANIZATION:
DATE:
ASTMCHHONOUS
HOOCH NETMDBK NINE
MODEL
•AUD TELEPHONE •
OATASWITCN fORTS
LINEf
214
LPC-10
-------
suitou.t CRGANIIATICN:
EPA LAN PLANNING CHECKLIST - 11 MTE:
- SCHEDULED DATES - ACTUIU DATE
KSIS CO»LETIOI or co»LETiai
Plan for Approval
•PD/OIM
Sitelt Pt for
Prnriraant Proccw/thfppfng
Wiring tmtslictlan
U
-------
TRAINING PLAN
EPA LAN PLANNING OCOaiH - 12
ORGANIZATION:
DATE:
SCHEDULED pare LOCATION
IMNAGDCNT OVERVIEW
UN AMINirriATOR
BUPPOJtT KRSONNEL
•ASIC USERS
ADVANCED USERS
eONTINUINC EDUCATION
APPLICATION DEVELOPERS
LPC-12
-------
EPA LAN PLANNING DC OUST • IS
DATE:
ACTIVITY
MANAGEMENT
EESPOMSIBUITT
WORT
SOURCE
COST/
TIKE
ln»t«llatien
Problt* «otvina
LPC-13
-------
ADMINISTRATION ORGANIZATION:
EPA LAN PLANNING CHECKLIST - U DATE:
LAM ASSISTANT LAN SERVER
ADMINISTRATOR ADMINISTRATOR OPERATOR
NAME
POSITION
TRAINING
LAN DUTIES -
XOF T1NC
REPORTS TO:
SECURITY
Scmftfvt Data
RAOCUP 5CHEPUIE
SERVER OATS TINE RESPONSIBLE PERSON
LPC-U
-------
SECURITY
B»A LAM PLAMNIHC CtCCXLlST - IS
ORGANIZATION:
DATE:
RUIPKNT/
DATA
SECURITY
KEOU1BEMEMT
WHO (GROUP)
HAS ACCESS
SECURITY MEASURES
PHYSICAL TFCMMirAL ADMIMISTRATIVf
LPC-15
-------
COST ESTIMATE! 10 STATION LAN
COST ESTIMATE: 10 STATION LAN
ANNUAL LAM SUPPORT COSTS
0
ITEM
UN HARDWARE
Adapter Cards
Adapter Cables I Filter*
Multistation Access Unit
Mw Component Housing
MMI Interconnect Cable*
Server/TONB Disk, 2 MS Ran
Cables - 30 ft.
Cabin • 75 ft.
Unlnttrruptlblt yomf tup.
UN HARDWARE MTOTAL
UN SOFTWARE
mm • | AtjaVjaMatf^ftfA tt*ftg>e.aftMMA
tfOVOIl JUIVvVsbVU MflsW
LAN Lotus 1*2-1 (5-user upgrads)
WordPerfect (Baa* ft 4 Nodes)
Various T«eh Manual*
SOFTWARE MTOTAL
UN SERVICES
Systea Design (SNA)
Inatallatlon A evaluation
Trawl i Subsistence (SNA)
Administrator • Deslgn/lnat
Alao Could Be Expressed to 2 Mont
SERVICES SUSTOTAL
TRAININ8
Administrator Court* (1)
Travtl « Subsistence (SNA)
Reg. Administrators US
Mile Irtar Coum
US (SNA)
Advanced UMT CouTM
US (SNA)
Training • Nm Applications
TRAINING SUSTOTAL
TOTAL INITIAL INVESTMENT
COST PER MDE
usnt
10
10
2
2
2
1
«
4
1
1
1
1
1
14
SO
1
1
In of
Unit
Met
Ml .30
44.98
559.34
80.85
25.13
7.910.14
40.09
83.03
405.00
1.433.29
250.00
702.44
147.00
73
42.00
1,000.00
7.000.00
an ME
232.00
100.00
500.00
407.43
250.00
'407.13
250.00
400.00
Extended
Price
4.413.00
449.80
1.118.72
141.70
50.24
7.910.14
360.54
332.12
405.00
1.433.29
250.00
702.44
147.00
1.148.00
1.860.00
1,000.00
7.000.00
232.00
100.00
500.00
407.43
250.00
407.13
250.00
400.00
TOTALS
S17.221
S2.733
S11.028
S2.547
S33.529
S3.353
Ousi
ITEM
Ons Ite Repair Services
(15X of Hardware)
Training: 1 Administrator
Administrators US
Basic User Course
SNA US
Advanced User
SNA US
Personel: (10X GS-11)
User Support Services 2!
TOTAL ANNUAL SUPPORT COSTS
ANNUAL COST PER NODE
SOME OTHER OPTIONAL LAN FEATURES
SNA Server Software
SNA Server (CXI)
ACS Server (CXI) 1
ACS Server Software 1
TOTAL COST OF OTHER LAN OPTIONS
ANNUAL CM-SITE REPAIR COSTS FOR OPTIOI
it Unit
Prlca
2,50.15
232.00
500.00
407.43
250.00
81.50
50.00
2.600.00
i 100.00
1 2.051.72
1 2,200.00
1 2,200.00
1 1,045.19
IAL FEATURES
E
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
ONLTl
•tended
Prlca
,583.15
232.00
500.00
407.43
250.00
81.50
50.00
,800.00
.500.00
.051.72
,200.00
,200.00
,045.19
TOTALS
S9.404
S940
87.517
•1,128
SOME PC OPTIONS (NO APPLICATION SOFTWARE)
IF A LAN SITE DOES NOT RAVI PC* OR USER PRINTERS
PS 2 Model 30
Surge Suppressors
Laser Printer
Printer Fonts
Printer Font
10
10
2
2
1
1.257.47
30.00
2.419.49
177.5S
143.12
12.574.70
300.00
9.238.98
355.04
143.12
TOTAL PC OPTIONS COSTS
S18.412
-------
OUT ESTINATti 25 STATION Ui
ITEM
HARDWARE
Adapter Cards
Adapter Cable* 1 Ml tart
Multistation Access Unit
Nau Interconnect Cables
Server/TDMb 2MB RAN
115Mb additional Hard Disk OH'
lutr Printer
In-Mail cabling
Distribution Rack
Distribution Panel
Unlntcrruptlbla Pouer Supply
SNA Server (CXI)
ACS Server (CXI)
LAN HARDWARE SUBTOTAL
SOFTWARE
Novell NatMart
SNA Server W
ACS Sarvar SW
LAM Lotua 1-2*3
WordPerfect laaa
WordPerfect (Par Node)
LAN Trail
law! LAM NeVMQOF
Varloua Tacli Manual a
SOFTWARE SUBTOTAL
SERVICES
Syate* talon (SNA)
Installation ft Evaluation
Travel ft Subsistence (SNA)
Administrator - Dealgn/lnst
Also Could M Expressed In FTE
SERVICES SUBTOTAL
TRAINING
Administrator Course (1)
Travel ft Subsistence (SNA)
Reg. Administrators TftS
Basic User Course
US (SMA)
Advanced User Course
TAS (SNA)
Training on LAN Versions
TRAINING SUBTOTAL
TOTAL INITIAL LAN INVESTMENT
COST PER NODE
Quant
29
29
4
4
1
M 1
1
1000
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
20
1
1
1
SO
75
1
0.29 1
Tlwof
2
2
2
S
2
2
1
J
Unit
Price
641.30
46.98
559.36
25.13
7,910.14
2,919.16
2619
1.25
721.65
194.07
405.00
2,995.00
2.995.00
1.633.29
2.051.72
1.065.19
250.00
250.18
75.38
324.47
1,579.76
147.00
73
62.00
1,000.00
28.000.00
3 ana.
232.00
100.00
500.00
407.63
250.00
407.13
250.00
400.00
Extended
Price
16.032.50
1.174.50
2,237.44
100.52
7.910.14
2.919.16
2.619.00
1,250.00
721.65
388.14
405.00
2.995.00
2.995.00
1,633.29
2,051.72
1,065.19
500.00
250.18
1,507.60
324.47
1.579.76
147.00
2,190.00
4,650.00
1,000.00
7,000.00
464.00
200.00
1.000.00
1.222.69
500.00
814.26
250.00
1,200.00
TOTALS
S41.748
S9.059
S14.840
S5.651
•••••••n
S71.298
S2.852
COST ESTINATEt 25 STATION IM
Quant Unit Extended
ITEM
ANNUAL LAN SUPPORT COSTS
Onslta Repair Services
15X of Hardware
Training: 1 Administrator
Administrators TftS
Basic User Course
SMA TftS
Advanced User
SNA TtS
Personnel: (35X CS-11)
Price Price
TOTALS
4,433.90 6.433.90
232.00 232.00
300.00 500.00
407.63 407.63
250.00 250.00
815.27 815.27
250.00 250.00
9,800.00 9,800.
User Support Services 40 100.00 4.000.
ANNUAL SUPPORT SUBTOTAL
COST PER NODE
SOME PC OPTIONS (WITN NO APPLICATIONS
SOFTWARE)
PC PS 2 Model 30 30 1,257.47 42,968.
Surge Suppressor* 30 30.00 900.
Laser Printer 4 2,619.49 10,477.
Printer Fonts 4 177.53 710.
Printer Font 2 143.12 286.
00
00
10
00
96
12
24
S22.6B8
S908
TOTAL
$55,342
-------
COST ESTIMATE! 70 STATION UN
ITEM
HARDWARE
Adapter Cards
Adapter Cables • Filter*
Multistation Access Unit
Mau Interconnect Cable*
Server/1 15NN, 8MN RAM
Server/TONN Disk. 2MN UN
INM PS 2 Nerd Disk Drive
In-well cabling
Distribution Rack
Distribution Panel
Uninterruptible PoMT
SNA Server (CXI)
ACS Server (CXI)
HARDWARE SUNTOTAL
SOFTWARE
Novell NetMsr*
SNA Server SW
ACS Server SW
UN Lotus 1-2-3
WordPerfect Saee
WordPerfect (Per Nod*)
UN Trail
IBM UN Manager
Various Tech Manuals
SOFTWARE SUBTOTAL
SERVICES
System Design (SNA)
Installation A Evaluation
Travel ft Subsistence (SNA)
Administrator • Deslgn/lmt
Also Could Be Expressed In FTE
SERVICES SUBTOTAL
TRAINING
Administrator Course (1)
Travel ft Subsistence (SNA)
Reg. Administrators TftS
Basic User Course
US (SNA)
Advanced User Court*
US (SNA)
Training on UN Version*
TRAINING SUBTOTAL
TOTAL INITIiU. UN INVESTMENT
COST PER NOUE
Quant
70
70
10
10
1
1
2
2000
2
S
2
1
2
1
1
2
9
1
48
1
1
1
60
200
2
0.41
TIM)
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
9
Unit
Price
641.30
46.98
559.36
25.13
10,844.60
7.910.14
2,919.16
1.25
721.65
194.07
405.00
1.932.00
1.932.00
1.633.29
2.051.72
1.065.19
250.00
250.18
75.38
324.47
1,579.76
147.00
73.00
62.00
1.000.00
28,000.00
•OS.
232.00
100.00
500.00
407.63
250.00
407.13
250.00
400.00
Extended
Price
44.891.00
3.288.60
5.593.60
251.30
10.844.60
7.910.14
5,838.32
2.500.00
1.443.30
562.21
810.00
1.932.00
3.864.00
1.633.29
2.051.72
2.130.38
1.250.00
250.18
3.618.24
324.47
1,579.76
147.00
4,380.00
12,400.00
2.000.00
11.666.67
464.00
200.00
1.000.00
1.630.52
500.00
814.26
500.00
2,000.00
TOTALS
•89,749
S12.985
S30.447
•7,109
S140.290
S2.004
COST ESTIMATE! 70 STATION LAI
ITEM
ANNUAL UN SUPPORT COST
Omit* Repair Service*
(151 of Hardware)
Training: 1 Administrator
Administrators US
RM!C User Course
SNA US
Advanced User
SNA US
Personnel: (MX CS-11)
User Support Services
SUPPORT SUBTOTAL
COST PER NODE
Quant
1
I
2
2
1
1
1
0.43
60
unit
Price
13.W8.00
232.00
500.00
407.63
250.00
815.27
250.00
28,000.00
100.00
Extended
Price
13,998.00
464.00
1.000.00
815.26
250.00
815.27
250.00
12,600.00
6,000.00
TOTALS
S36.193
S517
SOME PC OPTIONS (WITH NO APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE)
PC PS 2 Model 50
Surge Suppressor*
laser Printer
Printer Fonts
Printer Font
70
70
7
0
3
1,257.47
30.00
2.619.49
177.53
143.12
100,258.90
2,100.00
18,336.43
1,065.18
429.36
OPTIONAL PC SUBTOTAL
S122.190
-------
CHAPTER 3 - PURCHASE GUIDELINES
Contents
3.1 INTRODUCTION 3-3
3.1.1 Purpose
3.13. Overview
3.13 Available Resources
3.13.1 Indefinite Quantity Contracts
3.13.2 Advantages of Ordering through NDPI>established Contracts
3.133 Information Sources
32 POLICIES AND STANDARDS 3-7
33 PRE-PURCHASE CONSIDERATIONS 3-8
3.4 ACQUISITION PROCESS 3-8
3.4.1 Cost Analysis for Purchase
3.4.2 Information and Forms Required for Acquisition
3.43 Services Available
3.4.4 Training Available
3.4.5 Maintenance
3.4.6 Additional Hardware and Software
3-1
-------
Volume I- LAN Design A Planning
Notes:
3-2
-------
Purchase Guidelines
3.1 INTRODUCTION
3.1.1 Purpose
This chapter details all of the procurement considerations that are required to pur-
chase either a PC/MS-DOS compatible LAN or an Apple Macintosh Desktop Publishing
(DTP) system from the EPA DTP/LAN contract with Systems Management American
Corporation (SMA). Although the SMA contract is the focus of this purchase guide, other
contracts are described that may be used for components not available through SMA.
In addition, this chapter presents a brief explanation of the different functions and
responsibilities within the Government and EPA concerning acquisition policies and
standards; it outlines tasks that you must consider before purchase; it gives explanations
and, in some cases, examples of the forms and documents necessary in the acquisition
process; and it provides a number of sources available for further information as well as a
comprehensive set of appendices as references.
3.1.2 Overview
This chapter discusses local area networks that are PC/MS- DOS compatible and
Macintosh-compatible Desktop Publishing systems using an Appletalk LAN. The Agen-
cy also supports Ethernet local area networks for DEC systems and for PRIME systems.
However, an in-depth discussion of these areas is not within the scope of this document.
Alternatives other than networking are also available that may be adequate for your
processing needs. Refer to Chapter 2, Planning, for a discussion of alternatives.
A number of appendices are provided to assist you in the purchase process. Because
of the large range of items available from the DTP/LAN contract, these appendices are
broken down into three major groups:
• Appendix B - Macintosh Desktop Publishing systems
Appendix B.I: Desktop Publishing Components
Appendix B.2: DTP_COST.WK1: Spreadsheet For Cost Analysis
Appendix B3: Training Using Desktop Publishing Systems
• Appendix C- PC/MS-DOS Token-Ring Networks
Appendix Cl: LAN Network Components
Appendix C2: LAN_COST.WK1: Spreadsheet For Cost Analysis
Appendix CJ: Training For Local Area Networks
Appendix C4: LAN Services
• Appendix D - "User Modems Available", reprinted from the WTP
June 1987.
Appendices B and C contain lists and brief descriptions of all equipment and software
available through the SMA contract for Desktop Publishing and PC/MS-DOS local area
networks, respectively. These lists also contain a short reminder of relationships between
different components to help you check your installation plan for adequate ordering quan-
tities. They also provide descriptions and listings of two LOTUS 1-2-3 spreadsheets avail-
able to you as an aid in determiningyour cost of purchasing appropriate hardware, softy/are,
services, training, and maintenance. (Contact the nearest Information Center or User Sup-
port for these diskettes.) Note that there is no appendix pertaining to Services in the
3-3
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Planning
Desktop Publishing area. Within this area, there are two computers available (the Macin-
tosh SE and the Macintosh n) plus asso dated peripherals and software. These two com-
puters communicate via the Desktop Publishing Local Area Network between other
Macintoshes and with the Desktop Publishing printers offered through the DTP/LAN con-
tract This configuration is already set up on delivery of either system and therefore re-
quires virtually no knowledge of networking from the purchaser.
However, given a multi-computer network environment or mainframe connectivity
requirements in the Macintosh area, users may purchase services described for the PC/MS-
DOS Local Area Networks. For these network installation and evaluation services, SMA
will negotiate with the user to define and provide, where possible, the requested services.
Otherwise, the user of a Desktop Publishing system should require no support services
other than from regular information sources (Section 3.133), maintenance service con-
tracts (Section 3.4.5), and/or DTP Training (Section 3.4.4).
3.1.3 Available Resources
3.1.3.1 Indefinite Quantity Contracts
The Agency is simplifying procedures for procurement of state-of-the-art equipment
for specific ADP requirements through development of a number of Agency-wide In-
definite Quantity Contracts. These contracts have a large range of hardware, software,
training, and other services available as separately ordered line items, all related to a par-
ticular area of data processing. Although multiple vendors provide these items, com-
patibility issues have already been addressed before contract award and therefore should
not be a concern.
At this time there are several network-related Indefinite Quantity Contracts in place
that are relevant to this Purchase Guide. Although the principal ones are with SMA and
with FDC (for PC/MS-DOS compatible personal computers), requirements for your
environment may also necessitate ordering from the one of the EPA modem contracts or
through GSA Schedule B (for ADP supplies) and/or Schedule C (for other microproces-
sor-related equipment). A brief description of each of these contracts follows:
• Desktop Publishing/Local Area Network (DTP/LAN) Contract with SMA
The EPA Desktop Publishing/Local Area Network contract, EPA 4 68-01-7463, has
been awarded to SMA. It provides equipment, software, services, and training for both
PC/MS-DOS compatible LANs and Macintosh-compatible Desktop Publishing LANs.
In the Desktop Publishing area, users may purchase either of two Macintosh com-
puters and associated peripherals and software. A variety of components are also avail-
able to allow connectivity to PC/MS-DOS processors and networks.
In the PC/MS-DOS area, users may purchase file/print servers, bridges, gateways,
and consoles as well as network operating system software, applications software, and a
range of network-related hardware, such as network interconnect cards and cabling.
Generally, the SMA contract provides "one-stop shopping" for your network requirements.
The ordering process for procurement through the SMA contract is given in Section
3.4 below.
3-4
-------
Purchase Guidelines
• Contract with FDC for PC/MS-DOS Compatible Personal Computers
EPA Contract # 68-01-7330 with Federal Data Corporation (FDC) provides PC/MS-
DOS compatible personal computers and associated hardware and software. This contract
may be used to purchase individual workstations, which then may be added to a local area
network with the purchase of a Network Interconnect Card from the SMA contract It also
provides a source for items such as surge protectors and Hayes modems.
Also, since the CXI gateway and the asynchronous communications servers can only
be installed in computers with the standard AT-compatible bus, the FDC contract can be
used to purchase processors as communications servers for these applications. Existing
PCs may be upgraded for these functions as well
It is important to remember that any personal computers already purchased must be
upgraded to include at least (1) a Network Interface Card (available through SMA), (2)
DOS 3.1 or greater, and (3) 640Kb of memory before they can be installed as a node or
server on a local area network.
To order equipment from the FDC contract, refer to the PC catalog available from
your PC Site Coordinator or from your local Information Center.
• Modem Contracts - See Appendix D
• GSA Schedules for Purchase of Miscellaneous Equipment *
GSA ADP Schedules B and C are set up for purchasing equipment from a wide range
of vendors with prices already negotiated to obtain government discounts. Schedule B
deals with items related to ADP supplies and accessories; Schedule C, with microcomputer
hardware, software, peripherals, and add-ons. These GSA schedules may be used to pur-
chase items not available from either SMA or FDC
Keep in mind that ordering through GSA schedules does not release you from any
Federal procurement regulations concerning competition, sole-sourcing, monetary limits,
or the like.
3.1.3.2 Advantages of Ordering through NDPD-established Contracts
In some cases, ordering through Agency-established contracts may seem to be less
cost-effective than ordering through separate small purchase requests. However, there are
a number of advantages to purchasing under these blanket contracts:
• The equipment, software, and services have already been tested and found ac-
ceptable for the ADP function(s) for which they are offered; they will also meet
all compatibility requirements.
• Sole source or other procurement regulations need not be a concern, nor is a
CBD announcement required, since the awarded contract has already met these
requirements;
• Any surcharge on an item's price includes the vendor's contractual overhead, but
it also includes support and other services that often are not offered with a
separate purchase outside such a contract Some of these are:
3-5
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Pfenning
- Equipment will go through a thorough burn-in and testing period before ship-
ment, mini'miring the possibility of delays and frustrations inherent in receiv-
ing faulty merchandise;
- Hard disks will be formatted, software will be loaded and tested, and the EPA
menu system be installed so that the system is ready to run on delivery;
- Both vendor and Agency documentation which enable you to become produc-
tive with the equipment quickly and easily accompanies all relevant purchased
items;
- Extended maintenance service contracts are provided beyond the regular ven-
dor warranties that are not avail able from regular purchasing sources; and
- By providing a limited set of equipment types and vendors, the Agency is bet-
ter able to provide personnel and expertise to offer user support, including
software upgrades, special documentation, periodic technology upgrade
assessments, and general diagnostic advice and aids.
3.1.3.3 Information Sources
Your regular sources for user support (the Information Centers and User Support
FTS 629-7862) are the main avenues through which you can obtain help in problem diag-
nosis and resolution. However, in addition to these sources, there are two other avenues
available for assistance:
• Architectural Management and Planning Branch (AMPB) and Program Manage-
ment Support Branch (PMSB) of NDPD
In AMPB, contact
Carolyn Chamblee EMAIL: CCHAMBLEE
EPAMD-34 FTS: 629-2553
Research Triangle Park, NC 27711
In PMSB, contact
Ernie Watson EMAIL: E.WATSON
EPAMD-34 FTS: 629-2143
Research Triangle Park, NC 27711
• Systems Management American Corporation (SMA), 80Q/356-7813 or 919/544-
6311 in North Carolina
Assistance from SMA is available as a Contract Line Item in a number of different
areas (refer to Section 3.43 below and Appendix C for Services available). We strongly
recommended that before or as you purchase your first PC/MS-DOS network components,
you include purchase of a minimum number of hours (see Section 3.43 for details) to
provide support in network design, implementation, and/or problem determination and
resolution. If you wait until you require expertise in one of these areas, you will have fur-
ther delays imposed as you go through the procurement process. Although this process
will hopefully be expeditious, a delay of two weeks or more when you need assistance from
a network expert could well have an adverse impact on your users.
-------
Purchase Guidelines
There are no explicit services available for purchase from SMA for support of Macin-
tosh Desktop Publishing systems, other than a basic set of training courses (Section 3.4.4
and Appendix B) and maintenance contracts (Section 3.45). However, if your Desktop
Publishing system requires mainframe connectivity or has multiple processors in its net-
work, you may wish to purchase services and/or training in the PC/MS-DOS local area net-
work area.
3.2 POLICIES AND STANDARDS
This section discusses Agency policies, standards, and recommendations as they
apply to requirements for the purchase of ADP equipment (A copy of the Agency policy
guidelines and standards for microcomputer local area networks is included in Appendix
A of this manual.)
The requirements for a plan for network hardware and software acquisition are
similar to those for stand-alone personal computers. Obviously, if the organization already
has personal computers in use, PC approval and purchase authorization have been given
by OIRM. If no personal computers have been acquired by the organization, it must
develop a PC Acquisition and Management Plan. This is true whether the personal com-
puters are compatible with PC/MS-DOS or with Macintosh.
In addition to this purchase authorization, a LAN TSR with documentation is re-
quired and must be reviewed and approved by NDPD. This approval will provide your
authority to purchase necessary elements of your system from the SMA contract The TSR
should include any connectivity requirements with other Agency computing resources.
PC/MS-DOS compatible personal computers configured as workstations on your
network may still be acquired through the FDC PC contract Upgrades to these for net-
work use and purchasing all other network components (such as network consoles and spe-
cial software supporting networks) should be acquired through the DTP/LAN contract with
SMA.
ADP equipment and software may be purchased from other sources rather than the
Indefinite Quantity Contracts established by EPA However, there are strict guidelines as
to when and how this may be done. The delegation for purchasing is clearly limited in
Paragraph b) in Section 4 of the document entitled "Limitations in the PC delegation" which
states:
"Microcomputer equipment and software are to be obtained from contracts es-
tablished by the Office of Information Resources Management unless the re- ;
quired items are not available from these contracts or the ordering organization
first documents that it is in the interest of the Agency to obtain these products
from another source-."
Agency guidelines are also very specific concerning the use of funds delegated to
SIRMOs for ADP purchases. Intentionally "splitting" purchases of ADP equipment and
software into two or more separate procurement actions in order to escape the dollar ceil-
ings set by an organization's procurement delegation is a violation of Federal procurement
regulations. Any such action can result in OIRM withdrawing that organization's Delega-
3-7
-------
Volume I - LAN Design A Planning
tion of Procurement Authority (DPA) for ADP equipment (Refer to Edward J. Hanky's
memorandum "Abuse of PC Procurement Delegation" of July 1987.) _.
3.3 PRE-PURCHASE CONSIDERATIONS
There are several steps you must take before you are ready or able to acquire the
components for the network. The steps have been covered in detail elsewhere in these
guidelines and are mentioned here primarily as a review.
• Perform Needs Analysis — A Needs Analysis should be conducted to determine
whether or not a LAN is the most cost-effective approach to solving your group's
needs. This analysis should include an appraisal of alternatives to a LAN. This
analysis should demonstrate your group's awareness of its computing needs and
other resource requirements.
• Select a LAN Administrator — Before anything else is done in developing plans
for implementing a local area network, the SIRMO should designate someone to
be the LAN Administrator, someone with a very good grasp of the group's over-
all mission and personal computer technology. Chapter 4 of this manual, Ad-
ministration Guidelines, describes in detail the duties this person is responsible
for and some of the required and desired skills needed to fill the position. As
soon as the LAN Administrator, and his or her backup, are named, they need to
be trained. The training may from local sources or it may be through the SMA
contract, which is directed specifically to EPA's environment and equipment
• Complete a LAN TSR and submit it to NDPD - If the results of your Needs
Analysis indicate that a LAN is the best solution to your computing requirements
and it has been approved by your group's SIRMO, detailed planning for your LAN
should begin. Authorization to purchase system components from the SMA con-
tract will not be granted until you have submitted a TSR, with documentation, to
NDPD. Details of what should be included in the documentation have been
presented in Chapter 2.
In addition to the design plans documentation for your TSR, you also need to include
any plans for connecting to the Agency's data communications network. This includes such
things as 3270 emulation, access to the mainframe through an SNA gateway or
asynchronous gateway, or any other type of network connection to other Agency comput-
ing resources.
3.4 ACQUISITION PROCESS
3.4.1 Cost Analysis for Purchase
Appendices B and C contain printouts of two LOTUS 1-2-3 spreadsheets named
DTP_COST. WK1 and LAN_COST.WK1 which are available on floppy from your PC Site
Coordinator or local Information Center. They are supplied for your use as an aid to cost-
ing your purchases from the SMA contract They are also useful for filling out your Pur-
chase Request (PR) with Contract Line Item Number (CLJN), item description, and cost
information. It is suggested that you be sure to make a backup of this disk before use.
3-8
-------
Purchase Guidelines
3.4.2 Information and Forms Required for Acquisition
The forms and documents required for equipment acquisition are:
• An approved PC Acquisition and Management plan which includes the justifica-
tion for the LAN;
• A LAN TSR with documentation for your network which includes the needs
analysis; procurement and other plans; and the identification of your LAN Ad-
ministrator; and
• Purchase Requests (Form 1900-8) with proper signatures.
The first two have been discussed in the previous sections of the document This sec-
tion discusses the information necessary for completing the 1900-8 Purchase Request form.
Figure 3.1 is a sample completed Purchase Request for a network equipment purchase.
Your Purchase Request (PR) requires the following information:
Blocks 1 through 6 (data on the PR Originator) should be your LAN
Administrator's information.
Block 7 (Recommended Procurement Method) may be left blank.
Blocks 8 through 11 may be left blank since they also refer to your LAN Ad-
ministrator (same as originator).
Block 12 normally has one line of financial data. If multiple accounts are being
used, additional data may be shown in Block 26, after Block 12 (a), (d), (e), and
(f) are completed.
Block 12, row (g) should indicate 31.09 for ADP purchases under $ 1000, and 31.03
for ADP purchases greater or equal to $ 1000.
Block 13 (Suggested Source) is:
Systems Management American Corporation (SMA)
254 Monticello Avenue
Norfolk, Va 23510
Contract #68-01-7463
Block 15 should indicate that the contracting office I£EQI authorized to exceed
the amount shown by 10%.
Block 17, in addition to the required signatures in lines (a), (b),.and (c), should
include the following:
Line (d): Local Property Management Officer
Line (e): Senior Information Resource Management Officer (SIRMO)
Orders will not be processed without these signatures; they will be returned to
the originator. For network acquisitions, your PC Site Coordinator's signature is
not required.
Blocks 18 through 25 are for Procurement Office use only.
Block 26 should be used to list all hardware, software, training, and services to be
purchased. Each of these items must be identified by its Contract Line Item Num-
ber (CLJN), a one line description, and price (See Appendices B and C). A con-
tinuation form (Form 1900-8A) may be provided as an addendum to this block,
3-9
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Planning
US I IWMt*Wn*m*l
&EPA
Procurement
Request/Order
iurt alOiw*njtoi
r«Tr»Tvn P.
M)-34
« I"**'—- *•••»- FT5
2553; 919-541-2553
08/24/87
ASAP
Carolyn P. Chamblee
• »a*~ tFA Snipping & Receiving
17711
RTPt NC 27711
• *•€.«»«
6870200
Cm ol
SBA/SMA DTP/LAN
*•*^f •
BOn.
fii
2553; 919-541-2553
NOTC: k*m 12WI Oecimni Typ* — Canute • "C."
J1U)
it.
• •rtnc'i/Oflic*
Theodore R. Harris. Chief. AMPS
Donald W. Fulford, Director. RDF)
c. Funds h*i«4 in Block 12 and Block \ljitt*,l
• Joan Swain, AO/NDPD
D«t«
0*1*
On*
22.
1 B. Contract Numb*> tffnfj 120. Dtfeoura Tcrmt
ibng OnMr/Ouoa
Di. PmtfaM
* (vmm. IM tton an tit* urmt «icH«d an wrh lion tl aw •
D b.
«ni «*Mud Tha
59126
If. Scncduto
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
50020 Token Ring Adapter Cable
50010 Token Ring Adapter n
50040 Hiltl-station Access Ihit
50070 Cooponent Housing
50160 XB1 PS/2 Hxtel 80 w/70>ffl. etc.
50210 PS/2 MonochroK Monitor
50170 Novell PS/2 Adv. Netwre 286
50290 Novel ACS
50270 POCK SNA Server
50320 HP LaserJet 500
50520 TRN Intro. & Pin. Guide
50530 TRN Installation Guide
50540 TRN Administrator's Guide
50550 TRN Problem Determination Ki
50560 LAN Cabling Sys. Pin. & Inst
39
39
8
2
1
Um
M
26.
657.
564
81.
8,300.
184
1,645.
1,073.
2,066.
4.400
23.
21.
9.
75.
17.
JTT
1.014.
25.623.
4.512.
• 486.
8.300.
. 184.
1.645.
1.073
2.066.
4.400
23.
n.
9.
150.
17.
!•>*
1 MO-S (IU». t-M)
Figure 3.1 Sample Piffchase Request for LAN Components
3-10
-------
Purchase Guidelines
or a printout of components from the Cost Analysis Spreadsheets may be ap-
pended (Appendices B and C).
Some line items are only relevant to network component acquisitions (such as
CLJN's 10620-10710 in the DTP area). @ 1900-8 - If hardware is being ordered
to upgrade an existing personal computer for use in a network (whether it be used
as a workstation, server, bridge, or console), the CPU serial number of that PC
(usually on rear panel) must be identified in Block 26.
Any questions regarding the completion of Form 1900-8 should be directed to the
NDPD Project Officer or your PC Site Coordinator. Completed PRs should be submitted
to PCMD in Washington.
3.4.3 Services Available
A number of consultation services are offered through the SMA contract dealing with
installation and operation of local area networks. Although these services are specifically
identified for PC/MS-DOS LANs, they may be purchased for Desktop Publishing systems
with multiple computers or mainframe connectivity requirements.
These services are offered since it is recognized that installation of some local area
networks will require levels of expertise not readily available within the Agency. A
detailed description of these services is in Appendix C Be sure that before proceeding
with your LAN installation all site preparation tasks (such as internal building wiring) have
been addressed, since they are not provided through any of the ADP-related Agency con-
tracts. The following provides a brief overview of each service area:
• LAN Installation
— Intra-office cabling:
Installation is limited to the laying of Type 6 and Type 8 patch cables and wiring
along with interconnecting of single or multiple MAUs. It does not include any
wire installation in the walls, floors, or ceiling.
— Large network installation:
Installation includes MAUs in distribution racks with appropriate interconnec-
tion using patch cables.
— Network file/print server installation:
This service includes the physical installation of the hardware including individual
and ring tests; installation and configuration of the Network Operating System
(NOS) to include user profiles, mappings, etc.; attachment of the server to the
LAN cabling system and MAU; and one day of on-site training for the LAN Ad-
ministrator and his/her backup.
— Network bridge installation:
This service wfll include attaching the network bridge processor and network in-
terface cards to the rings to be connected, along with all appropriate configura-
tion tasks. It also includes training for the LAN Administrator in the bridge's
configuration and operation.
3-11
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Planning
— Network communications gateway installation:
This service includes planning for and installing the gateway server and/or the
communications card in the server. Software installation and configuration, sys-
tem verification, and training for the LAN Administrator and his/her backup are
included.
— Network console installation:
The Network Interconnect Card (NIC) will be installed with appropriate con-
figuration and testing through the network. Software configuration includes in-
stalling the network shell and establishing appropriate user profiles, among other
tasks. Boot disks for the user will be included.
• Network Evaluation
— Original LAN planning and design:
This includes analysis of requirements, determination that a LAN is a correct
solution, assessments of existing facilities, and development of LAN plans includ-
ing proper planning documents showing floor plans, purchase requests, installa-
tion planning, and training plans.
— Initial evaluation of existing LAN:
This is a service offered to analyze and assess the operation of an existing LAN,
resulting in recommendations for changes such as upgrading hardware or recon-
figuring existing resources.
— Anticipated and active problem analysis and resolution:
The contractor will provide ad hoc and blanket services to support problem deter-
mination and resolution, such as isolation of defective or loose wiring connec-
tions.
SMA offers four levels of expertise to provide this support: Senior LAN Analyst,
LAN Analyst, Senior LAN Field Engineer, and LAN Field Engineer. The LAN Analyst
would be most helpful during the LAN Planning phase; the Senior LAN Field Engineer,
for system design and installation; and the LAN Field Engineer for installations,
troubleshooting, and upgrades. For Network Evaluation tasks, you may contract for the
services of any or all of these levels. For Installation Services, the assistance of one or both
levels of Field Engineer will probably be sufficient These services are contracted for as a
Contract Line Item for a fixed number of hours at the following hourly rates:
Senior LAN Analyst: $ 146.40 per hour
LAN Analyst: $ 72.98 per hour
Senior LAN Field Engineer S 61.73 per hour
LAN Field Engineer: $ 37.04 per hour
We anticipate a wide variance in requirements for consultation services. If you need
assistance in determining what service is needed or the proper labor mix, contact the ven-
dor (SMA) or your EPA Project Officer. For PC/MS-DOS networks, we strongly recom-
3-12
-------
Purchase Guidelines
mend that a minimal number of hours - about 40 - be purchased, through a blanket agree-
ment, along with your initial LAN hardware and software to provide you with immediate
help with planning, problem diagnosis and resolution, and/or installation assistance if and
when you require it As future services are required, a separate Purchase Request form is
recommended to expedite processing these requests without delaying ordering and receipt
of other items being purchased through the SMA contract
• Operating System Support
A further service offered to the user of POMS-DOS compatible systems is a sub-
scription providing access to Novell's telephone support and access to their host computer
facilities for resolving problems. This service is provided through SMA on an annual sub-
scription basis to all EPA offices purchasing a local area network from the SMA contract
as well as for Misting personal computers already configured in local area networks within
the Agency.
3.4.4 Training Available
Courses will be offered on both Desktop Publishing and Local Area Networks
through the SMA contract User memos will identify courses offered centrally, and you
may also order courses as Contract Line Items for your local user community.
Appendices B and C list the classes that are available through this contract Costs
will vary for classes depending on where they are given, class sizes, class duration, and train-
ing equipment required. Training costs cover just the training itself; travel expenses are
set as a separate Contract Line Item, and these costs will obviously vary with a class's loca-
tion and duration.
3.4.5 Maintenance
A standard manufacturer's warranty is carried for every item purchased through the
SMA contract Although the manufacturer's warranty covers maintenance for carry-in or
ship-in, SMA offers the option of on-site maintenance under manufacturer's warranty.
These IN-WARRANTY items must be ordered at the time of equipment purchase. Sixty
days prior to the expiration of the warranty period for each item purchased through this
contract, you will be notified that your warranty is expiring. Information on maintenance
options available for the particular items will be provided. The maintenance extensions
may be purchased as OUT-OF-WARRANTY Contract Line Items. *
On-site maintenance is available at all sites with a four hour response time for Head-
quarters, Regional Offices, and Research Triangle Park, NC Six hour response is required
for all other sites. Carry-in maintenance will be provided all sites where on-call and emer-
gency per call maintenance is provided. Ship-in maintenance is available for all sites.
3.4.6 Additional Hardware and Software
The following list gives examples of some of the equipment and supplies not carried
under either the SMA contract, the FDC PC contract, or the modem contracts.
Use of GSA Schedules 8 and C may be used for general ADP supplies (such as 3JS
inch diskettes or paper) and for microprocessor-oriented purchases (such as data connec-
3-13
-------
Volume I - LAN Design A Planning
tors). Refer to Section 3.13.2 for information on purchasing from these GSA schedules.
The cost of these should all fall easily under small purchase requests. .
EXAMPLES OF SMALL-PURCHASE ITEMS FOR LANS:
Type 1 and Type 2 cabling • Data-quality Power Cords
Type 3 cabling - Voice-quality Copy Paper
Data Connectors (without accompanying cables) Labels
Tape cartridges for backups Toner
3.5 inch Diskettes Colored Ribbons
3-14
-------
CHAPTER 4 - ADMINISTRATION GUIDELINES
Contents
4.1 PURPOSE AND OVERVIEW 4-3
4.1.1 Perspective
4.1.2 Role of LAN Administrator
4.13 LAN Administrator Stalls
4.1.4 Duties of LAN Administrator
42 ATTENDING LAN ADMINISTRATOR TRAINING 4-5
43 PLANNING AND PROCUREMENT 4-6
43.1 Planning
43.2 Procurement
4.4 SITE PREPARATION 4-7
4.5 INSTALLATION AND TESTING 4-7
4.5.1 Dangers of Poor Design and Installation
4.5.2 Fun-Tune Job
4.53 Installation and Testing Tasks
4.6 LOCAL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES 4-8
4.6.1 Training
4.6.2 Security
4.63 Backup and Restore
4.7 DAILY OPERATIONS 4-12
4.8 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS 4-12
4.9 REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 4-13
4.10 CHANGECONTROL 4-14
4J1 EXPANSION PLANNING 4-15
4.12 SUMMARY 4-15
4-1
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Planning
Notes:
4-2
-------
Administration Guidelines
4.1 PURPOSE AND OVERVIEW
4.1.1 Perspective
So far, these guidelines have been organized along the lines of a network's life cycle:
Design and Planning; Purchasing; Installation and Testing; and Operations. Each chapter
has focused on one specific phase of the cycle. It is the purpose of this chapter to describe
in detail the responsibilities of the LAN Administrator across all phases of LAN implemen-
tation. And it will be written from your perspective as the LAN Administrator.
This chapter begins with a brief review of your duties during the early stages of LAN
implementation (planning, procurement, and installation.) After these points are covered,
we will discuss your day-to-day responsibilities in detail First of all, we will talk about who
the LAN Administrator is and what his/her general duties are.
4.1.2 Role of LAN Administrator
As the LAN Administrator, you will be the focal point of your group's LAN, both for
your users and for contact with NDPD and OIRM. As such, the success of the LAN will
depend in large part on bow well you perform your duties. It will be the responsibility of
the SIRMO (Senior Information Resource Management Officer) to designate the LAN
Administrator, and, as mentioned earlier, the sooner in the LAN's life cycle the LAN Ad-
ministrator can be assigned, the better. While it might appear that the ideal candidate for
LAN Administrator is the PC Site Coordinator, this is not necessarily true. A different
level of technical expertise is required to plan, install, and run a LAN. Also, the time re-
quirements can differ significantly. A single person simply may not have time to do both
jobs right. (Estimates of time requirements were covered in Chapter 2.) Further, in those
cases where the person does have both the technical expertise and the time to do both jobs,
it is not likely that they could do anything else.
The LAN Administrator is responsible for taking the lead in all phases of LAN im-
plementation, and when the network reaches operational status, the LAN Administrator
assumes responsibility for maintaining the network on a day-to- day basis. For most of the
smaller networks, you should be able to handle these on-going tasks without much, if any,
outside help. On the other hand, for the larger, more complex, networks, you are very like-
ly to need access to a network expert, and such assistance is available through the LAN
contract For such larger networks, the LAN Administrator may delegate certain tasks to
others in the group who have more technical expertise in the matter. For example, as the
LAN Administrator you are responsible for optimizing server performance and configur-
ing new resources such as disk drives, but you may delegate this function to someone in
the group who has delved more deeply into the technical details of the procedures. No
matter how many of the tasks you may delegate, you will always be the main point of con-
tact in all matters pertaining to the network.
4.1.3 LAN Administrator Skills
Ideally, the LAN Administrator will have the following skills:
• An understanding of the workgroup's mission and active participation in the
work;
4-3
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Planning
• Management expertise, with participation in the group's planning and budgeting
activities;
• In-depth knowledge of PC software, with particular emphasis on DOS and its
major functions, installation, and debugging of software products;
• Knowledge of PC hardware, installation of hardware cards, hard disks, and
printers;
• If host connections are anticipated, knowledge of common PC to mainframe con-
nections and how they work.
These technical skills are highly desirable in a LAN Administrator, but they are not
absolute requirements. However, if the LAN Administrator does not have these skills, he
or she must have a person with these qualifications readily available for support.
Required characteristics of the LAN Administrator include at least the following:
• Thrives on identifying and resolving problems;
• Has a strong technical background such that he/she can learn about new hardware
and software products and can implement these products in the LAN environ-
ment;
• Has the time to deal with user problems, regardless of the size of the LAN.
• Is organized and methodical when approaching changes to the system to avoid ad
hoc fixes that eventually compound other problems.
4.1.4 Duties of LAN Administrator
The LAN Administrator fc the focal point for the implementation of the LAN. As
such, the administrator of a workgroup's LAN will be responsible for:
• Working with NDPD and SMA consultants to design and install hardware and
software for a new installation or to upgrade and expand an existing system, in-
cluding bridges and other connections between other rings and networks of dif-
ferent types.
• Serving as the initial point of contact for users in resolving problems with the
LAN.
• Assigning addresses, names, and identifiers used in the network labeling in con-
formance with Agency standards in order to maintain uniqueness throughout the
Agency.
• Managing the dairy operations of the network, which includes:
- Determining from observation and user feedback that the network is ac-
complishing the tasks it was intended to do;
- Making adjustments to the physical layout of the LAN and to the use of ap-
plications to achieve optimal performance;
- Identifying and resolving problems which slow or interrupt work; and
. Logging all problems and their repairs or solutions in order to provide feed-
back and information for the Agency support resources.
• Backup and Recovery management (for equipment, software, and data):
_ Determine necessity for spare devices to replace defective units;
-------
Administration Guidelines
- Establish a backup plan for each device and program, showing which can be
stopped temporarily and which can be moved to other devices while repairs
are completed.
• Providing user education and assistance on the use and operation of the LAN
hardware and application programs.
• Configuring and upgrading the software.
• Creating a local problem resolution procedure, and providing feedback to
NDPD.
• Performing initial or preliminary problem resolution, and calling for additional
assistance, if required.
• Providing information to the site and Agency LAN coordinators about the
workgroup's particular LAN requirements, and assisting with the evaluation of
network applications software, both commercial and internally- developed.
• Participating in the resolution of connectivity problems among the Agency's
various distributed network of computer resources.
• Activity and performance monitoring — with LAN utility programs such as
LANtrail and the LAN Manager, monitors traffic and access activity on the net-
work to determine the need for system reconfiguration or expansion and to audit
security measures.
• Agency-wide connectivity monitoring - provides feedback to NDPD with regard
to his or her LAN's communications requirements with the rest of the Agency's
distributed processing resources.
These duties require a wide range of skills, encompassing the following areas: ad-
ministrative, clerical, managerial, technical, and analytical. Your duties have not been
broken out into these functional areas, however, instead, we have tried to list them in a
more chronological order in keeping with the various phases involved in implementing a
LAN. Seen in this perspective, your duties will include the following major tasks:
• Attending a LAN Administrator training course.
• Conducting planning, procurement, site preparation, and installation for the
LAN.
• Establishing local policies and procedures.
• Maintaining daily operations.
• Performing evaluations.
• Reporting.
• Controlling change.
• Planning expansion.
4.2 ATTENDING LAN ADMINISTRATOR TRAINING
It is imperative that you attend one of the training sessions designed specifically for
LAN Administrators, and it is preferable that your backup also attend. Details on what
these sessions consist of and what they cost are provided in Volume I, Appendix C In
order to find out when such training is available, contact User Support (FTS 629-7862).
4-5
-------
Volume I • LAN Design & Planning
4.3 PLANNING AND PROCUREMENT
4.3.1 Planning
The many aspects of planning for a local area network have been covered in detail
in Chapter 2. It is your responsibility as the LAN Administrator to see that all of these
planning steps are executed properly and then to put the checklists, worksheets, diagrams,
floor plans, etc. into order and submit them to your SIRMO who will forward them to
NDPD for approval The following documents comprise the bulk of the supporting docu-
ments for the LAN TSR, For review, the ideal LAN TSR will consist of the following:
(1) Cover memo addressed to Director, NDPD. Contents include:
- Name and qualifications of LAN Administrator;
- Brief justification for the LAN (or a reference to your PC Acquisition and
Management Plan which includes a LAN);
- Size of LAN requested; @BULLET-3 - Proposed implementation
schedule; and
- Total estimated life-cycle cost
(2) Summary of Needs Analysis. Contents include:
- Statement of objectives (LPC-3);
_ Examination of alternatives; and
- Justification of needs by cost effectiveness, increased productivity, etc
(3) Completed Planning Checklists. Contents include:
- Initial Planning Checklist (LPC-1);
- Workstation Inventory (LPC-2);
- Applications Plan (LPCs-4 & 5); :
- Resource Plan (LPCs-6 & 7);
- Site Plan (LPC-8);
- Preliminary Cabling Plan (LPC-9);
- Telecommunications Access Plan (LPC-10);
- Implementation Schedule (LPC-11);
- Training Plan (LPC-12);
- Support Plan (LPC-13); and
_ Administration Plan (LPCs-14 & 15).
4.3.2 Procurement
Chapter 3 of this manual provides the step-by-step details you need to know in order
to buy all the necessary components, including consulting support, for a LAN. Again, as
LAN Administrator, you are responsible for seeing that all of the needed parts and acces-
sories are ordered and delivered. You may want to order some of the support services of-
fered through the SMA contract to help you as you plan, order, and install your LAN. We
also recommend that you order at least forty hours of consulting services for use once the
network is operational.
In addition to the directions provided in Chapter 3, there are Lotus 1-2-3 worksheets
available which have all of the data necessary for completing a PR properly. These are
4-6
-------
Administration Guidelines
available on floppy disks which can be obtained by calling User Support (FTS 629-7862).
Also, an example of a properly completed PR is displayed in Chapter 3.
4.4 SITE PREPARATION
Any problems found in this area may impact the viability of the LAN design. Build-
ing codes and local facility management restrictions may vary, so guidelines for site
preparation can only be generalized. Therefore, it must be left to your local group to work
with your particular establishment to install necessary wiring and reserve appropriate space
for preliminary staging as well as installation of LAN components.
The Planning Guidelines (Chapter 2) and Site Preparation Guide (Volume IL Ap-
pendix E) discuss the various tasks and considerations which you must address in this ef-
fort, including wiring design, cabling test and verification, electrical power distribution,
assessing requirements for surge protectors, and telecommunications access considera-
tions. Remember that all site preparations must be completed and tested, that is — all in-
tbe- wall-wiring (both network cabling and electrical) must be in place, before the LAN
can be installed.
4.5 INSTALLATION AND TESTING
4.5.1 Dangers of Poor Design and Installation
Successful installation comes from planning that has been coordinated carefully with
your department management, the vendor(s) involved, and any support contractors (such
as your local facility management group). Although you may or may not be directly in-
volved with the LAN installation, success of this operation is your direct responsibility.
Tasks involved in installation and testing will be successful or not depending on the
care applied during the LAN planning and design phase. Failures in design and installa-
tion planning can lead to a host of problems including:
• Failure to purchase critical components;
• Miscalculations in properly considering cable length restrictions;
• Having to pay a contractor, such as SMA, for time and travel when they come to
a site to install the network and find that they are unable to work because the in-
wall wiring or telecommunications links have not been completed;
• Excessive retries on the LAN due to defective wiring, which in turn lead to very
slow response times for the users;
• Telecommunications problems due to inadequate cable shielding;
• Overloads on servers due to unanticipated user traffic over the network; and
• Lack of data security due to improper planning and implementation of user
privileges.
At a minimum, these can create performance nightmares; at their worst, they will
make the network inoperative. Therefore, the LAN Installation Guidelines in Volume IL
Appendix F, needs to be studied carefully during design and planning.
4-7
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Planning
As the newly installed network is tested, documentation developed during the design
phase for use in regular network operations needs to be referenced and used to validate
its accuracy and completeness.
4.5.2 Full-Time Job
During this installation and testing phase, it is expected that you, as LAN Ad-
ministrator, will be required to devote full-time to the task. It is also anticipated that a
number of other staff will be required to help with the many highly technical aspects which
must be considered to install a local area network properly. The Agency recognizes that
considerable assistance may be required of its ADP staff resources to successfully com-
plete this effort
4.5.3 Installation and Testing Tasks
The Installation Guidelines (Volume D, Appendix F) is a detailed discussion cover-
ing the requirements of this phase. It describes installation of hardware, system and ap-
plications software, configuration techniques necessary to ensure proper network
performance, data integrity, and security. Perhaps this phase more than any other em-
phasizes the differences between microprocessors in a stand-alone environment and those
in a "small mainframe" environment created through networking. Installation involves the
following major areas, described in detail in Volume n, Appendix F, Installation
Guidelines:
• Hardware: installing workstations, file servers, print servers, network interface
cards and cables, and multi-station access units (MAU's);
• System Software: installing the Novell NetWare Advanced 286 operating system
for the file server;
• User configuration: creating user login scripts; testing file server access from
multiple workstations after setting user access rights;
• Applications Software: loading and configuring typical applications on the net-
work file server with examples and testing procedures;
• Communications Server(s): (if applicable) installing and configuring the Novell
Asynchronous Communications Server and the PCOX 3270 Gateway server,
• Tape Backup System: installing the tape backup system hardware and software,
then performing a backup of the completely installed network server hard disk.
4.6 LOCAL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
As LAN Administrator, you will be responsible for establishing local policies and
procedures, consistent with LAN standards and the guidelines in this manual YOU will be
expected to develop policies and procedures for such topics as training, security, main-
tenance, and backup/restore. You will interact directly with your management, and as a
primary contact with NDPD, your input will be vital to the continued refinement of the
guidelines promulgated by OIRM and NDPD.
4.6.1 Training
Part of network management and good network operations involves providing train-
ing for the network community of users. Particularly as the network size and scope of avafl-
4-e
-------
Administration Guidelines
able applications expands, user training in efficient and effective use of the network be-
comes more and more valuable. There are a number of training courses available from
SMA as purchased items. (See Appendices 8 and C) As experience in LANs increases
in the Agency, NDPD will develop and offer more courses in the subject.
4.6.2 Security
Keeping your LAN's assets, including its data, protected from theft, damage, and un-
authorized use requires strict security measures. The security planning for your LAN
should provide a balance—it must protect the data from unauthorized access and loss while
not being cumbersome for legitimate users. Eighty percent of America's corporations
reported losses from computer theft, and insiders commit the majority of computer security
violations. In the Agency's operating environment, most losses will be due to negligence
rather than from criminal activities if minimal security measures are implemented. Thus
it is important to recognize the potential for problems, to control and accept the risks taken,
and to implement a security strategy.
There is one area of security that you must be particularly sensitive to, and that is
classified information. Federal laws mandate safeguarding sensitive data, and OERM has
stated that any data which is considered to be under the protection of the "right to privacy"
laws must not be put on a network without written approval from OIRM. Be very careful
how you handle such information.
Also of planning concern for LAN security is the role of the LAN Administrator.
With the present Novell network operating system, you have access to all information on
the network, including everyone's passwords. (With the next release, the passwords will
be encrypted and unavailable to the administrator.) Because of this access, the LAN Ad-
ministrator can expect to be closely monitored by security staff. The LAN Administrator's
backup must share his/her knowledge and access rights, and therefore represents a dupli-
cate risk factor.
For purposes of discussion, security measures can be divided into three broad areas:
(1) Physical, (2) Technical, and (3) Administrative.
• Physical
These measures can provide for data confidentiality (meaning data is accessible
only to those with proper authorization)and for keeping data free from harm.
Restricting physical access to the server and media containing sensitive data can
be accomplished by placing them in a locked room. Diskless workstations
prevent unauthorized copying of data to floppy diskettes. Network reliability is
enhanced by the use of uninterruptible power supplies for the servers and power
conditioning equipment for the workstations. Backups of critical data should be
stored off-site in order to protect against catastrophe.
• Technical
Tliese mechanisms can help assure data confidentiality and integrity by limiting
access, preventing unauthorized access, and detecting attempts to gain access to
the data. Techniques include both hardware and software solutions such as dial-
back modems, passwords, data encryption algorithms, and user access logs. For
-------
Volume I • LAN Design & Planning
those systems which require an exceptional level of reliability, fault tolerant
equipment and operating systems should be considered. Novell Advanced Net-
ware offers various levels of fault tolerance at prices commensurate with the level
of protection provided.
« Administrative
Procedures enhance the efficacy of the physical and technical measures which are
in force. Some administrative procedures to consider are:
_ A simple way to prevent corruption of shared program files and data which is
"only read" is to mark them as shareable and read-only.
- Records of access authorizations are essential and should be renewed peri-
odically tO maintain CUITency.
. Sign in/out sheets for locked spaces (or magnetic card reader records) en-
hance the effectiveness of physical locks.
- Data security can be enhanced by standard operating procedures, training,
regular advertising, written authorizations, and segregating sensitive data.
- Establishing effective backup intervals can ensure that the risk of data loss is
minimized.
What steps you choose to take regarding security of your system are up to you and
your SIRMO. Some (or all) of the following might be appropriate for your LAN implemen-
tation.
• Obtain OIRM concurrence for all sensitive data to be available or stored on the
network;
• Qassify users and data
- to what should access be denied?
- to whom should access to what be granted?
• Appoint a database administrator who controls users, access, and rights of
databases;
• Consider involving mainframe systems and database personnel when developing
security measures;
• Mainframe data being up/downloaded is a special case and requires specific at-
tention;
• Keep sensitive data segregated (different disks and/or subdirectories) and off-
line;
• Protect data moving across the network that has potential interest to industrial
•pies;
Plan and control system and media access;
Restrict and control hardcopy cutout;
Restrict physical access to the file server;
Use built-in protection of network software;
Passwords:
- Determine which applications (or which data files within applications) re-
quire password protection;
4-10
-------
Administration Guideline*
- Establish authorized user lists for each sensitive application or data set;
- Require (and enforce) password changing;
- Establish a method for recovering or changing passwords that are lost, forgot-
ten, or expired;
• Publish your security program
- advertise for good habits
- deter the criminal element
• employ security specialists;
• Install network monitoring, reporting, and security packages:
- Are there attempts at unauthorized use of the network?
- Are software licenses being abided by?
- Who is using the applications?
- Who is accessing sensitive data on the LAN?
- Who is downloading sensitive data to the IAN?
• Random security checking (usage and access);
• Educate the user - security, encryption, etc;
• For LANs with particularly sensitive data:
- Require dial-back modems for remote access;
- Use encryption/decryption of identifications, passwords; combine this with
data compression for all sensitive data;
- Encrypt all up/downloads with the mainframe host;
4.6.3 Backup and Restore
Because the network operation is a multi-user environment, the ability to backup and
restore data becomes critical rather than optional Guidelines for the LAN need to be es-
tablished by the LAN Administrator to permit restoration of data to whatever extent is felt
necessary for that particular environment.
It is recommended that at least heavily-modified data be backed up on a daily basis
and stored on enough different tapes or floppies to permit recovery over a one or two week
time span. More static data, such as applications and systems software, should be backed
up regularly, but it need not be as often. Perhaps a weekly backup would be appropriate.
However, before substantial system changes or enhancements are made, a full backup is
recommended.
You also need to establish a policy on when you will restore a file from a backup.
You must make it clear to the users that it is their responsibility to keep track of the files
they are using. If you are not successful at making them responsible, you will find yourself
spending most of your time trying to find files for them; and this is not your only job.
File servers purchased from SMA come equipped with hardware and software for
tape backup and restoration. This software permits restoring data either by file or by res-
toring the entire software image as it was backed up. Details are given in the LAN Instal-
lation and Testing Guide (Volume n).
4-11
-------
Volume I • LAN Design 6 Planning
4.7 DAILY OPERATIONS
The following activities are required on a daily or regular basis, and you will need to
develop a schedule, and possibly assign responsibilities, for performing these tasks. In
order to sustain an effective network, these kinds of tasks must be done regularly.
• File server maintenance
- Backup/archive/deletion
- Space allocation
- Assign new users
- Periodic testing
• Print server maintenance
- Production control (sequence large jobs by controlling access)
— Loading paper/loading forms/changing fonts
- Preventive maintenance
- Inventory of supplies (paper, toner, etc.)
• Communications gateways maintenance
_ Configuring for optimal operation
- Host-side problem determination
_ Installing new users
• Security verification
- data confidentiality
- data integrity
- system reliability
• Application administration
_ coordinating data base use
- monitoring read-only files
• Software upgrades
- operating system
- server-based applications
- workstation applications
- EPA custom applications
• Problem determination and resolution
- file server
- printer/server
_ communications gateways
— workstations
— software
_ cabling
4.8 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS
Performance monitoring has been mentioned a number of times previously. There
are two software tools available through Purchase Requests to SMA to assist in this tune-
4-12
-------
Administration Guidelines
tion (LANTrafl and PC LAN Manager) and others will be offered by the Agency as they
are developed or become available.
Monitoring is suggested in the following areas:
• Space utilization on the File Server
A number of space utilization situations on the file server can affect network per-
formance, some critically. Space should be checked regularly for fragmentation,
which can degrade response when retrieving or writing data to disk. Both user
private space and shared application space also need to be checked regularly to
prevent all space being used or to recognize over-allocation by a particular user
or application,
The LAN Administrator should provide guidelines and restrictions on the use of
file server disk space. As experience is gained, enforcement methods for control-
ling this disk space may be required.
• Space utilization on the Print Server
If too many jobs are requested for a particular printer to process, the disk space
on a print server may be exhausted by the jobs waiting for service. If space utiliza-
tion monitoring shows that this situation is developing, the LAN Administrator
needs to consider either restricting use of the primer to particular applications
or users, or providing a second print server to handle other printers on the net-
work, relieving print spool space requirements.
Local guidelines are appropriate as well as documentation for the user on the
most effective ways of invoking and using printer resources.
• Caching size, use, and modification
A cache is a portion of the server's memory reserved to handle input/output re-
quests without writing to hard disk. When data can be retrieved from cache in-
stead of a request to disk, network performance can be significantly enhanced.
The size of the cache is set during initial setup of the network. Through monitor-
ing its use and effectiveness, the LAN Administrator can determine how or if to
re-configure it to be most effective for the particular network environment Par-
ticularly after modifications to the network, monitoring should be done to deter-
mine if a re-configuration should be considered.
4.9 REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
User guidance documents describing your local LAN configuration and management
approach have already been described for a number of situations. Documentation on your
network changes and current configuration have also been mentioned.
In addition to these, you may want to create and maintain an inventory reporting
mechanism for both network components and perhaps supplies required for your network
(such as printer paper, toner cartridges, and the like).
4-13
-------
Volume I- LAN Design A Planning
As your network grows, there may be the requirement for accounting type informa-
tion as welL However, if this can be avoided, it will make life for everyone much simpler.
4.10 CHANGE CONTROL
Change control concepts are another aspect of networks and tnainfram».« with which
the user on a standalone PC has had little need to investigate.
The main tenets of change control which, if followed, will help ensure good reliability
within any multi-user environment are:
• Don't change two things at the same time:
Even when you feel confident that a change is trivial, by rhangitig two things at
once you have made any diagnosis of problems that might (and usually do) occur
magnify in complexity. Once a change is installed and normal operation has
resumed for at least a day, a second change is reasonable. Obviously, the more
complex a change, the longer you should wait to check its validity before im-
plementing more changes.
• Notify users of the changes well before the fact:
Whether or not you feel the change directly affects the users on a network, notify
them of the fact that changes will be made. If the user notes system performance
changes affecting them, their assistance can provide good input on interpreting
the affect of that change on the system. Problem resolution is often expedited as
welL
• Test changes before implementation:
For many network changes, the test may simply be to install the change and see
if the network reacts negatively. However, if the change is major, such as a com-
pletely new version of system software, it is recommended that you install the
change while the network is unavailable to the user community and give it a series
of tests to be sure it does not produce catastrophic results. Something of this
major an impact may even cause data corruption if it has serious problems, such
as incompatibility with other system software.
• Have backout procedures before installing changes:
The first time you install a disaster and then find you have no way of retreating
to your previous system status, you will understand the importance of this seem-
ingly simple warning. Backing up your system to floppy or tape is sufficient as*
suming that all of your installation procedures are also available on external
media; but be sure h is done.
• Document all updates:
An changes should be logged with descriptions of the components involved and
of the results. Time-stamps are a must Furthermore, h is important that the
LAN Administrator keep a current configuration chart of the network. This is
not only a good management tool but will be required when major updates to the
4-14
-------
Administration Guidelines
network are required that result in approval being requested for a modified LAN
TSR. The current configuration will be essential to that process.
•
4.11 EXPANSION PLANNING
As your group learns to live with the LAN, it is entirely feasible that additional users
will want to get connected. They may or may not already have their own PCs or worksta-
tions, but in any event at some point you will need to add additional servers and possibly
printers or plotters. If you have planned your network properly and followed the stand-
aids, this should not be a problem.
Other expansion possibilities include adding additional network rings to your present
ring and adding communications gateways to gain access to Agency-wide connectivity. As-
suming you have configured your network according to these guidelines and standards, ex-
panding the network should be no problem.
While not expansion in the strictest sense, one contingency you need to be prepared
for is moves. People do get moved about from office to office occasionally, and if you are
not prepared this can play havoc with your network. As has been discussed in Chapter 2,
it is possible to run "lobes" to these new locations.
One of your more interesting duties as LAN Administrator will be to monitor the
performance of the network, and as the amount of traffic on the network increases, you
will want to project the additional needs of your network. You will also want to stay abreast
of LAN technology so that you will be able to suggest the most efficient and cost-effective
method for expanding the network.
4.12 SUMMARY
What this chapter has attempted to do has been to show you what your basic respon-
sibilities are as LAN Administrator. It is a big job, and it can be an exciting one. What we
have dealt with have been the more technical aspects of the position. What can make the
job even more interesting is your interaction with the people you bring on the network.
As you undertake implementation of a LAN, remember that there is a lot of help out
there; the NDPD staff, SMA contractors, and User Support all want to make your job as
easy as possible for you. They want you to have a network that functions smoothly and ef-
ficiently. Make use of their knowledge and experience.
4-15
-------
APPENDIX A • DRAFT O1RM LAN POLICY
OIRH POLICY DIRECTIVE 88-02
LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (LANS) OF PERSONAL COMPUTERS
PURPOSE. This policy establishes the principles that govern
the acquisition, Installation and management of Local Area
Networks (LANs) of personal computers. This policy also
defines roles and responsibilities for Implement ing these
principles.
SCOPE AND APPLICABILITY. This policy applies to all EPA
organizations and their employees. It also applies to the
personnel of agents (Including State agencies, contractors
and grantees) of EPA who are Involved In the design, develop*
•tent, acquisition, operation and maintenance of Agency LANs.
3. BACKGROUND.
a. The objectives of this policy Include the following:
(1) Improve the EPA end-user computing environment and
access to Information resources by making personal
computing more effective through networking.
(2) Ensure that new Investments 1n computer technology
adhere to the Agency's existing and planned computer
architectural strategy for connectivity.
(a) Connectivity among LANs 1s crucial because EPA
employees are widely dispersed, yet they have
critical needs to share and/or transmit data.
(b) This requirement for connectivity 1s heightened
by EPA's commitment to a State/EPA data Manage-
ment program.
(c) Since LANs are a long tern investment, they must
satisfy the Agency's future connectivity require-
ments as well as present ones.
(d) EPA Investments 1n LAN technology must satisfy
multiple connectivity conditions, among these:
- Allow the sharing of data across the EPA Hide
Area Network
- 1 -
-------
OIRM POLICY DIRECTIVE 88-02
• Allow the transfer of data across the EPA Wide
Area Network
• Allow access to the Agency's electronic mail
system
- Allow communications between different brands
of computers 1n the same PC family (for example,
IBM PC/AT and the EPSON Equity III*) on the LAN
• Allow communication from the LAN to different
types of computers (Including minis, mainframes,
terminals and PCs).
(3) Provide resource sharing mechanisms to permit the
sharing of printers, gateways, bridges and files.
(4) Foster competition between suppliers of LAN technology
In accordance with the Competition In Contracting Act
of 1984. EPA LAN requirements Include two network
topologies, two multiuser systems and a LAN operating
system that can accommodate this diversity.
(5) Require LAN operating systems that offer sophisticated
security features. EPA maintains many kinds of
sensitive data which LANs must be able to protect.
The Agency can be subject to litigation If certain
business or personal Information Is Inadvertently or .
maliciously disclosed.
A practical consideration to Implementlon of this policy
Is that the Agency must require prospective users to
procure LAN technology from established Agencywlde contracts.
LAN components are too numerous for the Agency to procure
1n a timely manner through piecemeal procurement requests.
Fully Integrated LANs, on the other hand, tend to be too
expensive to qualify for small purchase procedures. Thus
EPA has established an Agency LAN contract to simplify
and to shorten the procurement process.
The overriding requirement for LAN connectivity raises
essential Issues of Agency computer architecture. Thus,
the Director, National Data Processing Division (NDPD)
will review LAN proposals for compliance with LAN Policy
•nd to assist users 1n anticipating the full support
requirements of LAN technology.
- 2 -
-------
Draft OIRM LW Pollcv
OIRH POLICY DIRECTIVE 88-02
4. AUTHORITIES.
i. Public Law 98-369, Title VII (The Competition 1n
Contracting Act of 1984).
b. EPA Information Resources Management (IRM) Policy Manual.
5. POLICY.
a. Any Agency organization may Install a LAN provided that:
(1) the proposed configuration Meets the requirements
Identified 1n the appendix to this document and
(2) a Telecommunication Service Request (TSR) and
associated LAN planning forms, set forth In LAN
Technical Guidelines, are approved by NDPO.
b. All LAN technology and services nust be procured from the
Agencywide contracts when available.
c. NDPO will support connection from a LAN gateway to the
EPA Wide Area Network, providing wiring and modems as
necessary. The Office of Administration and Resources
Management-RTF (OARM-RTP) will support 1n-wall LAN cabling
as necessary In Headquarters, Research Triangle Park and
Cincinnati. The Assistant Regional Administrators (ARAs)
for management will support In-wall wiring for their
areas. All other LAN expenses, including but not limited
to hardware, software, design, training and maintenance
•ust be funded by the organization using a LAN.
d. All Agency LAN users must comply with manufacturer licenses
and proprietary rights. Users are not entitled to share
a proprietary application among LAN workstations If It
was sold for exclusive use on a single computer. The
proprietary rights to software differ from one firm to
the next. Violators of these rights expose themselves to
legal penalty.
e. Sensitive data which are maintained on Agency LANs must
be protected from Improper access, use, alteration or
disclosure.
f. All Agency LANs must conform to building codes.
- 3 -
-------
Volume I' LAN Design & Planning
OIRN POLICY DIRECTIVE 88-02
g. Agency LANs uust adhere to certain protocols of Committee
802 of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
(IEEE). EPA LANs Mill follow the 802.2 Data Link Layer
protocol and either the 802.3 (a bus using CSMA/CD as the
access protocol) or the 802.5 (a ring using token
passing) Physical Layer protocols.
h. Communication between a LAN and EPA aalnframes and logical
mainframes Bust confers to System Network Architecture
(SNA).
1. Every Agency LAN lust have an assigned LAN Administrator.
Selection of an Administrator 1s an Important aspect to
the successful use of LAN technology.
(1) The Administrator must be designated at the onset of
the planning process so that he or she can work with
NDPD and, If needed, with design engineers to develop
an effective LAN configuration.
(2) The LAN Administrator will serve as the point of
contact with NDPO. He or she will be responsible for
overseeing or performing the following tasks: LAN
Installation, user training, ongoing maintenance of
both hardware and software, system backups and network
security management. The LAN Administrator Is respon-
sible for the continuing confonnance to Agency policy
over the life of the LAN. A full description of the
LAN Administrator duties 1s Included In the LAN
Technical Guidelines.
(3) The amount of time required by the role of LAN
Administrator will vary by the complexity of the
network. The design, Installation and Initial opera-
tion phases for a network of any size will require
virtual full-time commitment from the Administrator.
Thereafter, a small network (under 10 stations) nay
account for around 10% of an Administrator's tine,
whereas a large network aay require a full-tine
coenltaent.
J. NDPD will review all LAN TSRs. At a •Inlnun, LAN TSRs
will Include the Identification of the LAN Administrator,
the configuration and the facility wiring. An approved
LAN TSR Is required for each LAN prior to Installation of
the LAN components. Procurement requests auist be approved
by the cognizant Senior IRM Official.
- 4 -
-------
DnflOmMLWPoHa/
01RM POLICY DIREOm 88-02
6. RESPONSIBILITIES.
a. The Office of Information Resources Management (OIRM)
shall:
(1) Develop ind proaulgate policy governing Agency LANs.
(2) Develop and proaulgate guidance on LAN applications
development.
(3) Develop and promulgate guidance on LAN Information
security*
(4) Develop and promulgate EPA requirements governing
applications for personal computers and LANs.
b. The Office trf Administration and Resources Management-RTP
(OARM-RTP) and National Data Processing Division (NDPD)
shall:
(1) Develop guidance and programs to ensure that Agency
LANs are acquired, Installed and managed In accord
with this policy.
(2) Provide guidance and assistance to Assistant Adminis-
trators, Associate Administrators and Regional
Administrators In Implementing the requirements of
this policy.
(3) Provide technical advice and assistance to EPA on
LAN technology.
(4) Develop hardware and software requirements for EPA
LANs that support the objectives of this policy.
(5) Establish and manage EPA LAN acquisition contracts.
(6) Review IAN TSRs to ensure proposed LANs comply with
the requirements of this policy and with LAN Technical
Guidelines,
(7) Provide telecommunications support between LAN
gateways and the EPA Hide Area Network.
(8) Provide 1n-wall wiring as necessary at Headquarters,
Research Triangle Park and Cincinnati.
- 5 -
-------
OIRH POLICY DIRECTIVE 88-02
c. Assistant Administrators, Associate Administrators, the
General Counsel, the Inspector General, Regional Adminis-
trators shall assure that the acquisition. Installation
and management of LANs under their direction are In accord
with this policy.
d. The Senior Information Resources Management Officials
(SIRMOs) shall:
(1) Review justifications and management plans for LAN
technology to be acquired by their organizations.
(2) Review procurement requests for LAN technology
submitted by their organizations.
(3) Designate an Administrator for each LAN 1n their
cognizance.
e. The LAN Administrators shall oversee the completion of,
or perform the following tasks:
(1) Develop the design of their LAN.
(2) Oversee or perform the Installation of their LAN.
(3) Manage or perform dally operation and maintenance of
their LAN.
(4) Serve as polnt-of-contact with NDPD for LAN.
(5) Ensure compliance with guidance on LAN data security.
(6) Ensure users are trained on LAN technology.
7. DEFINITIONS.
a. 'Applications software* are programs that make computer
hardware and operating systems perform a useful function.
Spread-sheet and word-processing applications are two
examples.
b. 'Bridge* Is software and hardware which joins physically
separate network systems Into a single logical network.
Bridges allow users on one network access to the resources
on the other network.
- 6 -
-------
Draft OIRM LAN Policy
01RM POLICY DIRECTIVE : 88-02
c. 'Ethernet* 1s a local area network based on a bus Hiring
topology using carrier sense multiple access with collision
detection for access (CSHA/CD). Also, an IEEE 802.3
standard. Ethernet Is commonly used as the LAN of choice
In the DEC VAX world.
d. 'Gateway' Is a communication* link between a LAN and a
device external to the LAN. A gateway Bay perform both
protocol and bandwidth conversion.
t. 'Local Area Network (LAN)* Is a communications system which
connects a number of personal computers and their peripheral
components over a small geographical area. LAN communica-
tion Is usually subject to some constraints. Depending
on the type of technology, LAN communication nay be Indirect
— through a file server -- and limited to certain functions,
A LAN may offer equipment economies and productivity
gains by permitting the sharing of printers, communication
gateways and files. Its costs Include expenses for design,
Installation, hardware, operating system, applications,
training, nalntenance and personnel.
f. 'Multiuser System* Is used to describe systems that allow
•any users (at separate workstations) to share Its system's
processing power, and perhaps to also share data and
peripherals (printers, disks, etc.). The NetWare Operating
System Is a multiuser system.
g. 'Server* Is a hardware/software device acting as an
Interface between a LAN and a peripheral device. A file
server allows users at other workstations to use the
server's hard disk storage.
h. 'Systems Network Architecture (SNA)* 1s a communications
architecture used 1n the IBM world of computing that 1s
commonly supported by most computer manufacturers. SNA
defines logical structures, formats, protocols and proce-
dures for exchanging Information on a data communications
network.
1. 'Token Ring' 1s a local area network (LAN) based on a
star-shaped ring wiring topology using a controlled token
for access. It Is also the IEEE 802.5 standard. Token
ring networks art IBM's strategic LAN products In this
area.
• 7 -
-------
Volume I • LAN Design & Planning
OIRM POLICY DIRECTIVE 88-02
j. "Topology" Is the physical Ityout of t LAN. Coonon
topologies are bus, ring and star.
k. "Wide Area Network (HAN)* Is a communications system which
connects computers together over a large area (such as
across the nation). A HAN generally has three characte-
ristics which distinguish It from a LAN. A WAN Involves
communication speed degradation, protocol translation and
telephone communication.
-------
Draft OIRM LAN Policy
Appendix to LAN Policy Directive 88-02
EPA STANDARDS FOR LOCAL AREA NETWORKS OF
PERSONAL COMPUTERS
This document defines EPA standards for alcrocomputer Local
Arei Networks (LANs). The first section conttlns general standards
that apply to all EPA LANs. Ensuing sections pertain to specific
workstation types.
1. STANDARDS THAT APPLY TO ALL LANS
a. IBM 3270 Emulation-SNA Gateway: Every LAN mist be able
to employ a SNA gateway so as to permit at • elnlmum:
3278 emulation; Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC);
line speed at 9600 bps or greater; IBM File Transfer
Program to provide file up/download with the «a1nfra»e;
tnd 8 simultaneous sessions to be shared across the
network.
b. Asynchronous Gateways: Every LAN must be able to
employ an asychronous gateway so as to permit at a
minimum: dial-In/out; and remote network access to
up/download files and to share applications.
c. LAN-to-LAN Communications: Every LAN must be able to
employ a bridge that operates at network speed so as
to permit connection of two physically distinct LANs.
With such a bridge, two LANs would appear as a single
logical retwork.
d. Atypical Computer Interface: Every LAN must be able
to employ an Interface so ts to permit connection of
different brands of computers. For example, an Apple
workstation must have a Token Ring card to operate on
a PC/MS DOS Token Ring LAN, whereas a PC/MS DOS station
Bust have a TOPS Interface to operate on an Appletalk
LAN.
2. STANDARDS FOR PC/MS DOS AT-COMPATIBLE WORKSTATIONS
a. Present Equipment: Agency standard PC/AT or compatible
workstations (80x8xfam11y with PC/MS DOS 3.3 or later
and Memory of at least 512kb).
b. LAN Hardware: Token Ring Network with shielded twisted
pair wiring. A detailed 11st of components are available
froa NDPD.
The Token Ring mist Met the Institute of Electrical
and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.5 Token Ring and
802.2 link level protocol standards.
- 1 •
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Planning
OIRM POLICY DIRECTIVE APPENDIX
88-02
It nust also support direct connection to 3174, 3720
and 3725 controllers and support up to SO nodes on each
ring. The ring Bust be connected by either shielded or
twisted pair telephone wire that supports a speed of a
•Inlnim of 4 Hbps.
c. LAN Software: Novell Advanced Netware.
Novell's Advanced Netware provides high performance
file, disk and printer sharing. The files and printers
appear to be local to the user's PC but are centralized
for Information sharing and routine backup. Advanced
Netware Is a full operating system and provides sophis-
ticated security for files.
d. LAN File Server: PC/MS DOS Workstation (640Kb memory
required) with Novell Advanced Netware.
The server Bust have a nlnlmum of 640Kb of memory and
sufficient hard disk storage to meet the needs of users.
A separate copy of Netware 1s required for each system
Identified as a server. The LAN Administrator assigns
access rights to files and disk.
e. LAN Printer Server: PC/MS DOS Workstation (640Kb
memory required) with Novell Advanced Netware.
The file and printer servers are generally the same
system. Multiple printers can be attached to a single
server. Netware gives sophisticated print queue
management.
3. STANDARDS FOR DEC WORKSTATIONS
a. Present Equipment: VTIOO and VT220 terminals or personal
computers with VAX minicomputers as the primary computing
resource.
b. LAN Hardware: VAX minicomputers with Ethernet.
DEC uses IEEE 802.3 Ethernet, which Is a bus network
with a Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Detection (CSMA/CD) type access. It transmits at
lOMbps.
- 2 -
-------
Draft OIRM UN Policy
OIRM POLICY DIRECTIVE APPENDIX
88-02
c. LAN Software: DECnet Network Operating System.
DECnet provides file and printer sharing, electronic
messaging and remote log In. This file sharing does
not permit execution of PC DOS or Macintosh programs
on the VAX, but does allow the storing and retrieval
of files on the VAX. Since the VAX Is a powerful aid-
range computer system, using VAX programs on the VAX
gives this LAN good performance for multiuser applica-
tions. However, PC Information sharing applications
cannot be directly executed on the VAX.
d. LAN File Server: Standard on the VAX.
The VAX has large mass storage. File server software
1s a part of the DECnet operating system. Multi-user
file sharing Is possible. Users can store and retrieve
their PC files on the VAX. Security 1s built Into the
VAX system.
e. LAN Printer Server: Standard on the VAX.
The VAX can support multiple printers. Printer server
software Is a part of DECnet. Sophisticated print
queue management 1s standard. Some PC printer
applications are possible.
4. Standards for Prime Workstations:
a. Present Equipment: PT200 terminals or personal computers
with Prime systems as the primary computing resource.
b. LAN Hardware: Prime systems with Prime Ethernet.
Prime uses the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet, which Is a bus-type
network with CSMA/CD type access. It transmits at
lOHbps.
c. LAN Software: PRIMENET.
PRIMENET offers complete network services, Including
disk and printer sharing, electronic messages, and
remote login. PRIHENET does not execute PC DOS or
Macintosh programs on the Prime, but 1t does permit
storing and retrieval of files from the Prise. Since
- 3 -
-------
Volume I - LAN Design 4 Planning
OIRM POLICY DIRECTIVE APPENDIX
88-02
the Prime Is a powerful eln1computer system, this LAN
offers good performance for multi-user applications
using Prime software on the Prime system. PC Information
sharing applications cannot be directly executed on the
Prime.
d. LAN Flic Server: Standard on the Prime.
The Prime has large mass storage. File server software
1s part of the PRIHOS operating system. Multi-user file
sharing Is possible. Also, security Is built Into the
system. With additional software, PRIHELINK, on both
the PC and the Prime, virtual PC disks are available on
the Prime.
e. LAN Printer Server: Standard on the Prime.
The Prime can support multiple printers. Printer
server software Is part of the PRIMENET operating
system. Sophisticated print queue management Is
possible. Some PC printer applications are possible.
5. STANDARDS FOR MACINTOSH WORKSTATIONS
a. Present Equipment: Macintosh SE or II workstations.
b. LAN Hardware: Appletalk LAN with Farallon PhoneNET
medium. A detailed list of components 1s available
from NDPD.
Macintoshes can be connected via Appletalk LAN over
twisted pair wiring using the Farallon PhoneNET medium.
Macintosh family members all have the hardware to
connect to Appletalk LAN and the Appletalk network
Interface Is provided with the LaserWriter printer.
If you have a Macintosh and a Laser-writer, you have
a one system network.
c. LAN Software: Centraa Systeas Vest's TOPS.
The basic application for Appletalk Is sharing Laser-
writer printers. TOPS Is a simple networking system
that allows simple flit and printer sharing.
- 4 -
-------
OIRM POLICY DIRECTIVE APPENDIX
88-02
d. LAN File Server: Centram Systems West's TOPS File
Spooler.
TOPS File Spooler provides file/disk sharing. The
files shared can be on a dedicated Hac or on several
user's Macs on the LAN. TOPS allows other Macs on the
LAN to share files on the server as 1f they were on the
Mac's local floppy or hard disks.
e. LAN Printer Server: Centra* Systems Vest's Tops Print
Spooler.
Without TOPS, only one terminal it a time can use the
printer. That Is, 1f one user Is printing, that system
1s tied up until the printing Is done and other users
that want to print must also wait. TOPS spools the
print to a single system which acts as the print server
and thus frees the other Macs.
-------
Appendix B.1
MACINTOSH DESKTOP PUBLISHING (DTP) COMPONENTS
The following pages contain a description of all hardware and software items available
through the SMA contract supporting the purchase of Desktop Publishing (DTP) systems.
Each item in the list includes the following information:
• The Contract Line Item Number (OJN)
• A one-line description of the item
• A description of each component bundled as part of that item, with brief relation-
ships between components described, where appropriate.
BM
-------
Volume I - LAN Deslan A Plannntna
DESKTOP PUBLISHING HARDWARE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF DTP SYSTEMS AVAILABLE
The Macintosh family of Microprocessors using the Motorola
68000 family of chips Is available to address the area of
Desktop Publishing (DTP). The Macintosh SE Is offered for
the Standard DTP system (CLIN 30010); the Macintosh II, for
the Professional DTP system (CLIN 30030).
Both systems utilize advanced, state-of-the-art technology
1n the area of human Interface, ease of use, tnd seamless
Integration. They are supplied with a BOUSC-driven
graphics/Icon user Interface that acts to Integrate the
various functions of the system Into a cohesive whole. They
are able to communicate among themselves and with the DTP
printers via the Desktop Publishing Local Area Network
(LAN). Each system and printer available Includes all
hardware and software required to Interface to this LAN.
All cables and connectors required to properly Install the
system are provided, Including the Apple System/Peripheral-8
Cable which connects an RS-232 device (e.g., Hayes SmartModem)
to one of the Macintosh's RS-422 Serial Ports.
The Macintosh operating system Includes all utilities
necessary to Install Itself and other files Into floppy and
hard disks. The Chooser program allows for selecting
devices across the local area network (LAN). The operating
system accesses the AppleTalk Network via PhoneNET adapters
(which plug Into the Macintosh Serial Port) and has access to
all peripherals on the LAN. Both the TOPS and PhoneNET
components are bundled with each DTP system ordered.
TOPS, the provided LAN software, allows for file sharing
among the users and workstations on the LAN, print spooling
to remotely located printers on the LAN and file translation
between different types of workstations, specifically
Macintosh's tnd IBM-PC compatibles. The systems also cone
with a standard comprehensive tutorial to familiarize the
user with system use and selection options.
B1-2
-------
Desktop Publishing Components
10010 APPLE MACINTOSH SE H020: STANDARD DTP SYSTEM
The Macintosh SE computer 1$ an Integrated unit
consisting of a 9-Inch monochrome monitor, one
BOOK 3.5-Inch disk drive, detachable 105-key key-
board, a 20Mb hard disk, one expansion slot, and a
Motorola 68000 tricroprocessor with a 32-bit Internal
architecture and a 16-bit data bus. The footprint
Is not aore than 110 square Inches, excluding the
keyboard.
The system Includes 1Mb of RAM, expandable to 4Mb.
For using graphics, a minimum of 2Mb Is
recommended. The Macintosh SE HD20 has the
following ports:
o 1 Small Computer System Interface, SCSI,
for connection of high speed peripherals such as
hard disk drives.
o 1 External drive Interface, using
a 19-pin connector
o 2 RS-232/RS-422 Serial Ports for
connection to printers, modems, and Local Area
Networks.
o 2 User Input ports for connection of
keyboards, nice, and other user Input devices.
The Macintosh SE comes standard with 2 RS-422/RS-232
serial ports, utilizing min1-DIN-8 connectors. The
Included PhoneNet Plus adapter by Farall on connects
to the serial port. A standard modular telephone
extension cable will Interface the PhoneNET box to
the Agency-provided RJ-11 wiring.
Documentation Includes the Macintosh SE Manual,
the Macintosh Utilities User's Guide and the
Macintosh SE Quick Reference Card.
B1-3
-------
OPTIONAL MONITOR FOR MACINTOSH SE
The Macintosh SE comes with a 9-Inch monitor Integrated In the
unit. However, a larger sonltor can be purchased as a separate
Item.
10100
SuperMac SuperVlew Monitor
The SuperMac SuperVlew Monitor Is • 19-Inch, high
resolution, monochrome video monitor, capable of
displaying a maximum of 1280 X 960 pixel bit-
sapped graphics Images.
10020
MACINTOSH II: PROFESSIONAL DTP SYSTEM
The "Mac II" system unit consists of one
800K 3.5-Inch disk drive, a 40Mb Internal hard
disk, 6 expansion slots and a Motorola 68020
microprocessor which uses a 32-b1t Internal
architecture and a 32-b1t data bus. The 105-key
keyboard Is a detachable unit.
The system Includes 1Mb of RAH, expandable to 8Mb.
For using graphics, a minimum of 2Mb 1s
recommended. The Macintosh II comes with a
Motorola MC68881 Floating Point Math Coprocessor.
It has the following ports:
o 1 Small Computer System Interface, SCSI,
for connection of up to 7 high speed peripherals
such as hard disk drives.
o 2 Blnl-8 serial (RS-232/422) ports, with
the Apple System/Peripheral -8 cable provided to
convert the RS-422 OIN-8 connector to the RS-232
OB-25 connector.
o 2 Apple Desktop bus ports for connection
of keyboards, mice, and other user Input devices.
Documentation Includes the Macintosh II Manual,
the Macintosh II Utilities User's Guide and the
Macintosh 11 Quick Reference Card.
B1-4
-------
Desktop Publishing Components
MONITORS AVAILABLE FOR THE MACINTOSH II DTP SYSTEM
The Macintosh II does not Include • monitor. Therefore, one of
the following monitors should be purchased with every Mac II
acquired.
10110
10120
10130
10140
Apple High-Resolution Monochrome Monitor
The Apple Monochrome Monitor, with the Macintosh II
Video Card and Expansion Kit and the Apple
Universal Monitor Stand, Is a 12-Inch flat screen
display with white phosphor. The monitor supports
a resolution of 640 X 480. The Macintosh 11 Video
Card with the Expansion Kit provides for t display
of 256 different shades of gray.
Apple Color High-Resolution RGB Monitor
The Apple Color Monitor, with the Macintosh II
Video Card and Expansion Kit and the Apple
Universal Monitor stand, Is a l3-1nch screen with a
640 X 480 resolution. The Macintosh II Video Card
with the Expansion Kit provides for the display of
256 different colors.
Super-Mac Graphlx Large Screen Monochrome Monitor
The Super-Mac Graphlx 1s a 19-Inch, high-resolution
•onochrome video nonUor capable of displaying
1365 X 1024 pixel bit-napped graphics Images. The
monitor displays at a resolution of 93 dots per
Inch.
SuperMac Spectrum RGB Color Monitor
The SuperMac Spectrum Is a 19-Inch color aonltor
capable of slaultaneously displaying 256 of a
total of 16.8 Billion colors with a resolution of
768 X 1024 pixels.
B1-5
-------
DESKTOP PUBLISHING SYSTEMS ADDITIONAL ORDERABLE SOFTWARE
The following software Is offered In fornats suitable for use
with both the Macintosh SE and the Macintosh II.
30010
30020
30030
Aldus PageMaker
Key features of PageMaker Include the capabilities
to take graphics Images and text from MacWrUe,
MacPaint, Cricket Draw, Cricket Chart, Design,
More, Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel and
Integrate them Into a document for publication on
the Desktop Publishing Dot Matrix or Laser
Printers.
Apple MacUrlte
Apple MacWrlte Is an easy to use, basic word processor
that Includes the ability to Insert and delete
text at the character, word and paragraph level.
It Is also able to process blocks of text, reading
and writing to external files. Printer support 1s
provided for the Desktop Publishing Dot Matrix and
Laser Printers Including the ability to select
fonts, character sizes, and print features such as
highlighting, boldlng, and underlining within the
document.
Microsoft Word
Microsoft Word Is a full -featured word processing
package Including all the features of Apple
MacWrlte In addition to an Integral spelling checker,
thesaurus, outline processor and text/f lie-merge
capabilities. Microsoft Word 1s available for the
Macintosh SE & II, A file-compatible version Is
available for use with the Agency's Standard Personal
Computer Systems, which operate under the PC/MS-
DOS operating system, such as IBM-PC/XT, IBM-PC/AT,
Compaq, Zenith 2-271/2181/3, and Epson Equity III.
B1-B
-------
Desktop Publishing Components
DESKTOP PUBLISHING SYSTEMS ADDITIONAL ORDERABLE SOFTWARE
(Continued)
30040
30050
30060
30070
Living Videotexes More
More Is in Outline Processor, sinllar In function to
Living Videotexes TMnkTank on the IBM-PC. More can
be used to produce outlines, display different levels
of detail automatically, and has the capability
of producing graphic presentations.
Meta Software's Design
Design Is a Graphics-Oriented Outline Processor
that enables the user to graphically describe and
model complex Ideas and concepts. Design has the
ability to produce presentation graphics and text,
and can do multi-page, hierarchical charts and
diagrams, with successively greater detail.
Apple MacTennlnal
Apple MacTermlnal Is Terminal Emulation package
that Includes the ability to emulate an ASCII
Asynchronous terminal, such as a DEC VT-100 and to
access the Agency's E-Mail system.
Apple MacDraw
Apple MacDraw Is an object-oriented, line-art
graphics package which treats the Individual
elements of graphic compositions as objects. I.e.
a line Is a line between two points; circles,
squares and other polygons are drawn as distinct
shapes, and can be Individually modified. A
picture created 1n an object-oriented environment
Is actually a collection of many smaller pictures,
shapes and objects. Key features of MacDraw
Include the ability to generate two dimensional
line drawings, as well as the ability to copy,
delete, move, replicate, and size Images.
B1-7
-------
Volume I-LAN Design ft Planmlng
DESKTOP PUBLISHING SYSTEMS ADDITIONAL ORDERABLE SOFTWARE
(Continued)
30080
30090
Apple MacPaint
Apple MacPaint Is a bit-nap, or pixel -oriented
graphics package. MacPaint pictures are defined by
the collection of Individual dots, or pixels, required
to produce a particular Image. The total In age Is
just that, an Image, rather than the Individual
components of a MacDraw drawing. Key features of
MacPaint Include the ability to draw pictures with
multiple gray scale Imaging, copy, delete, nove,
size and replicate Images. MacPaint can also be used
to edit and enhance scanned Images.
Cricket Software's CrlcketDraw
CrlcketDraw 1s a full featured, object-oriented
graphics package. CrlcketDraw Includes all the
features of Apple MacDraw, with additional features,
such as the ability to do shading, automatic fades
between gray scales, work with color, and do some
3-dlmenslonal scaling and prospective.
B1-8
-------
Desktop Publishing Components
DESKTOP PUBLISHING SYSTEMS ADDITIONAL ORDERABLE SOFTWARE
(Continued)
30100
30110
Microsoft's Excel
Excel Is an Integrated Spreadsheet package. Key
features of Excel Include the ability to read
existing data and spreadsheet files from the
Agency's standard PCs, and to Integrate that
Information Into documents produced on the desktop
publishing systems. Excel has a 'recorder' node
that can record a key stroke sequence for use
later. Further, 1t can directly read Lotus 1-2-3,
Version 2.0 worksheets and Ashton Tate dBase III
Plus databases. The Graphics output from Excel 1s
compatible with the Desktop Publishing Software.
Cricket Software's CHcketGraph
CrlcketGraph Is a Business Graphics package. Key
features of CrlcketGraph Include the ability to
produce charts and graphs suitable for business
presentations. It Is also able to produce bar,
column, pie, stacked bar, and text charts.
CrlcketGraph supports color when used with a color
ribbon and the Desktop Publishing Dot Matrix
Printer, and with some color plotters.
B1-9
-------
Volume I • LAN Design A Plannnlna
DESKTOP PUBLISHING SYSTEM ADDITIONAL ORDERABLE HARDWARE
10500
10510
10400
10300
10310
Apple 5. 25- Inch Diskette File Transfer System
This diskette drive system provides the hardware
and software to transfer files from MS-DOS 5.25-
Inch, 360Kb format compatible diskettes to the
3.5-Inch ned la used by the Macintosh DTP systems.
The drive comes bundled with the File Transfer
Software required. A diskette drive adapter card
nust be provided If required to connect the 5.25
Inch drive to either of the desktop publishing
systems.
Macintosh SE PC Drive Card
Macintosh II PC Drive Card
Apple Macintosh II Internal 800Kb 3.5-Inch Disk Drive
An additional 3.5-Inch, 800Kb Disk Drive Is
available as a separately orderable Item to be
Installed Internally In the Macintosh II
Professional Workstation.
AST Mac86 Co-processor board for Macintosh SE
This co-processor card, provided with an Apple PC
5.25-Inch Drive and adapter, enables the Macintosh SE
to run PC-DOS/MS-DOS applications as on the
Agency's standard PCs. This card will be shipped
with the current version of DOS.
AST Mac286 Co-processor board for Macintosh II
This co-processor card, provided with an Apple PC
5.25 Drive and adapter, enables the Macintosh II
to run PC-DOS/MS-DOS applications as on the
Agency's standard PCs. This card will be shipped
with the current version of DOS.
Bl-10
-------
Desktop Publishing Components
DESKTOP PUBLISHING SYSTEM ADDITIONAL ORDERABLE HARDWARE
(Continued)
10600
10610
10620
Avatar's Mainframe SE Internal 3270 emulation board
For the Mac SE, 1t provides a 3270 Emulator
Individual Coax Attachment and allows the DTP
system to attach directly to an IBM cluster
controller. It Is coupled with the MacMalnframe
HFT (Host File Transfer Program) which resides on
the host to allow transfer In several different
environments.
MacMalnframe DX external 3270 emulation board
For the Mac II, 1t provides a 3270 Emulator
Individual Coax Attachment and allows the DTP
system to attach directly to an IBM cluster
controller. It Is coupled with the MacMalnframe
HFT (Host File Transfer), which resides on the
host to allow transfer In several different
environments. It requires MacTennlnal to run.
Trldata Netway 1000A 3270 Emulator - Network Gateway
Attachment
This 3270 emulation product provides the gateway
connecting the Desktop Publishing System LAN with
the Agency's 3090 mainframe or the Logical
Mainframes. Up to 17 simultaneous sessions can be
supported. This product emulates an IBM 3274
cluster controller utilizing the SNA protocol for
communications. The Netway 1000A cones with Its
own file transfer desk accessory or can use
MacMalnframe (above) which allows binary and text
files to be transferred to and from the IBM host
while In a 3278 session. It 1s (or will be by arid
1988) compatible with the IBM aalnframe
SEND/RECEIVE file transfer prograa. It 1s coupled
with PhoneNet Plus.
Bi-11
-------
Volume I • LAN Design A Plannnlna
DESKTOP PUBLISHING SYSTEM ADDITIONAL ORDERABLE HARDWARE
(Continued)
10700
Farallon PhoneNET Star Controller Card (with software)
This controller has the capability of connecting
12 Individual LAN branches with up to 3000 feet of
cable Into a Star-Topology LAN. Cable Kits will
be provided to connect the Star Controller to
either standard punch-down blocks or patch panel
telephone closet terminations.
10710
Kinetics Fast Path Model 3 Network Bridge
This product provides logical and physical
connection between two otherwise Independent local
area networks. It provides the software and hardware
required for systems on two physically different
networks to exchange Information as 1f they were
on the same physical network (Appletalk and
Ethernet).
10720
TOPS Network Interface Card -
PC-Compatible Network Interface
This network Interface 1s compatible with the
Agency's Installed base of PCs. TOPS for the PCs
Includes the NIC (Network Interface Card) and TOPS
print spooler for the PC software. It allows for file
sharing and print spooling over the LAN. Data
translation 1s not part of TOPS for the PCs;
however, If there 1s one Macintosh on the Desktop
Publishing LAN, the TOPS for the Macintosh program
can do the file translation on the Macintosh.
Then the PC-compatible TOPS can retrieve the file
already translated Into the proper fomat for use.
PhoneNet Plus Is Included as part of this package.
61-12
-------
Desktop Publishing Components
DESKTOP PUBLISHING SYSTEM PRINTERS
10200
10210
DTP Dot Matrix Printer - Apple Imagewrlter II
this printer, which Includes the Apple Talk option
and PhoneNet Plus, uses readily available ribbons and
standard 9 1/2 x 11 Inch paper. It 1s compatible
with the QuickDraw graphics packages and comes
with necessary Interface cables. It Meets the
following requirements:
• draft print speed of 250 cps
• standard speed of 180 cps
• near letter quality speed of 45 cps
• character spacing of 4.5 to 17 characters/
Inch
• graphics densities of 72 to 160 dots/Inch
• QuickDraw Graphics compatible
• DTP LAN Interface
DTP Laser Printer - Apple LaserWriter
This printer comes with an extra toner cartridge,
letter cassette, and PhoneNet Plus. Its output bin
holds 30 sheets and the Input bin holds 150 sheets.
It meets the following specifications:
o Print 8 pages a minute In text mode, using
standard bond or copier paper;
o Be capable of using 8 1/2 x 11 and 8 1/2 x
14 Inch paper, from 16 to 20 pounds;
o Have an operating noise level of 55 db or
less;
o Provide standard Desktop Publishing LAN
Interface;
o Graphics capability - Full page 300 x 300
dpi;
o PostScript Graphics Language compatible;
o 150-sheet Input bin and 30-sheet output
bin;
o Manual sheet feed Inlet;
o Include all necessary cables, Including
Interface cable to the Desktop Publishing LAN,
o Be compatible with all Desktop Publishing
System software as defined 1n Section C.3.4.;
o Include 4 resident fonts, Minimum;
o Utilize toner cartridges or other easily-
replaced toner Mechanism; and
o fie provided with 2 toner cartridges or
equivalent.
B1-13
-------
Appendix B.2
DTP COST.WKl: SPREADSHEET FOR COST ANALYSIS
IMPORTANT: BEFORE WORKING WITH THE SPREADSHEET, BE SURE TO
MAKE A COPY OF IT.
Hie DTP_COST.WK1 spreadsheet Is set up in the following way:
• It contains an item identified by Contract Line Item Number (GUN) for each
hardware and software item available from SMA for Desktop Publishing (DTP)
systems. Training and maintenance services available from SMA are also included.
• Each line item contains a list of the different elements or components within it.
(See Appendix B.I for descriptions of each of these components.)
• Each line item is identified by one or more range names (of up to 14 characters)
characterizing that item. Components of Desktop Publishing systems begin with
"D-"; general names, beginning with "G-", are defined for such things as dollar to-
tals. Range names for Maintenance are given an "M-" prefix. All range names are
listed at the end of this appendix.
• To scan the alphabetized list of all range names and their respective cell definitions
within LOTUS, GOTO RANGES.
• To print out all items, indicate a print range of "G-FULL-REPT."
NOTE: Remember, to GOTO a range, press function key 5 and enter range name.
Once you have entered the quantities desired for each item (in a copy of the spread-
sheet), you may go through and delete all items with quantities of zero (i.e. none pur-
chased). You can then print out the resulting spreadsheet and attach it to your purchase
request
B2-1
-------
Volume I • LAN Design & Plarmntng
CATEGORIES TOTALS
HARDWARE 0-00
SOFTWARE 0.00
TRAINING 0.00
MAINTENANCE 0.00
TOTAL 0.00
B2-2
-------
Desktop Publishing Cost Spreadsheet
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER
UNIT
QUAN TOTAL
DESKTOP PUBLISHING HARDWARE/SOFTWARE
10010
10100
10020
10110
10120
10130
10140
STANDARD DESKTOP PUBLISHING SYSTEM
System Unit
Macintosh SE «/ 20MB hard disk
Apple Extended keyboard
Apple II Printer • 8' cable
PhoneNet Plus
TOPS for the Macintosh
arge screen Monochrome Monitor
SUPERHAC Monitor/Cable
SUPERMAC Supervlew Video Card
PROFESSIONAL DESKTOP PUBLISHING SYS
System Unit
o Macintosh II w/ 40HB hard disk
o Apple Extended Keyboard
o Apple II printer - 8' Cable
o PhoneNet Plus
o TOPS for the Macintosh
Apple Monochrome Monitor
o Mac II 1/4 Bit Video Card
o Mac II 8 bit Video Expn Kit
o HI-res Monochrome Monitor
o Apple Universal Monitor Stand
Apple H1-Res RGB Color Monitor
o Mac II 1/4 Bit Video Card
o Mac II 8 bit Video Expn Kit
o HI-Res RGB Color Monitor
o Apple Universal Monitor Stand
Large Screen Monochrome Monitor
o SUPERNAC GrapMx Monitor/Cable
o SUPERHAC GrapMx Video Card
Large Screen Color Monitor
o SUPERMAC Spectrum Monitor/Cable
e SUPERMAC Spectnm Video Card
3,065.29
1,435.55
4,487.73
888.64
1,331.11
1,435.55
3,057.91
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B2-3
-------
COST/PER QUAN
CLIN DESCRIPTION UNIT
10500
10510
10400
10300
10310
10600
10610
10620
10700
10710
10720
5.25" Diskette File Transfer Sys.
o Apple 5.25' Drive w/ Apple
File Exchange Software
o PC Drive Card: Either
MAC SE
MAC II
3.5" Disk Drive
o Mac Internal 800K Drive
INTEL 8086 Board for Standard DTP
o MAC86 Co-processor
with MS-DOS 3.2
o Apple PC 5.25' Drive w/ Apple
File Exchange software
INTEL 80286 Board for Prof. DTP
o MAC286 Co-processor
with MS-DOS 3.2
o Apple PC 5.25' Drive w/ Apple
File Exchange software
3270 Emulation: Individual coax
For Standard DTP-compat1ble
o MacMalnframe SE (Internal)
o MacMalnframe HPT (per Bldg)
3270 Emulation: Individual coax
For Professional DTP-compatlble
o MacMalnframe DX (External)
o MacMalnframe HFT (per Bldg)
3270 Emulator: Network Gateway
o Netway 1000A (Includes Box/SW)
o PhoneNet Plus
DTP Lin Star Controller
o PhoneNet Star Controller w/ SU
Network Bridge Fast Path
e Fast Path-3 w/ Thin Ethernet
PC Compatible Network Interface
o PhoneNet Plus
o TOPS Print for the PC
o TOPS for the PC
391.33
239.64
799.00
1,559.38
1,289.53
1,553.92
2,944.56
1,218.14
2,567.38
702.7S
TOTAL
.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B2-4
-------
Desktop Publishing Cost Spreadsheet
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER QUAN TOTAL
UNIT
10200
10210
DTP Dot Matrix Printer
o Inagewrlter 11
0 Apple Talk Option A980311
o PhoneNet Plus
DTP Ltser Printer
o LaserWriter M/ Toner Cartridge
and Letter Cassette
o Extra Toner Cartridge
o PhoneNet Plus
623.00
3,658.36
0.00
0.00
DESKTOP PUBLISHING SYSTEM: SOFTWARE
30010
30020
30030
30040
30050
30060
30070
30080
30090
30100
30110
Aldus Pagemaker
Apple MacWrlte
Microsoft Word
Living Videotexes More
Meta Software's Design
Apple MacTermlnal
Apple MacDraw
Apple MacPaint
Cricket Software's CHketDraw
Microsoft*' Excel
Cricket Software's CrlketGraph
359.43
92.86
260.02
185.73
191.19
92.86
144.21
92.86
244.72
260.02
169.34
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B2-5
-------
Volume I • LAN Design S Plannning
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER
UNIT
QUAN TOTAL
DTP TRAINING
Ptr
Class
f
Classes
4001X
0
1
2
3
4002X
0
1
2
3
4003X
0
1
2
3
DTP LAN Administrator Course
At SHA North Carolina
At EPA On-S1te
At EPA Off -Site
Travel and Subsistence
NOPD and Local Support Personnel
At SKA North Carolina
At EPA On-S1te
At EPA Off -Site
Travel and Subsistence
DTP Systems for the Common People
At SMA North Carolina
At EPA On-S1te
At EPA Off -Site
Travel and Subsistence
2,017.02
815.27
2,978.42
819.38
2,593.86
1,392.11
4,035.96
1,092.50
815.27
407.63
647.98
546.25
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B2-6
-------
Desktop Publishing Cost Spreadsheet
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER
UNIT
QUAN
TOTAL
MAINTENANCE
(Note that prices are MONTHLY cost for the corresponding service.)
2001X
0
1
2
2010X
0
1
2
2002X
0
1
2
2011X
0
1
2
2012X
0
1
2
2013X
0
1
2
Macintosh SE Systea Unit
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
SUPERMAC Monochrome Monitor
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
Macintosh II System Unit
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
Mac II HI -Res Monochrome Monitor
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
Mac II HI -Res RGB Color Monitor
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
SUPERMAC 6RAPHIX Monochrome Monitor
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
28.60
34.30
23.25
14.00
16.75
11.40
39.80
47.75
32.40
7.30
8.80
6.00
11.55
13.85
9.40
14.00
16.75
11.35
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B2-7
-------
Volume I- LAN Design & Plannnlng
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER
UNIT
QUAN TOTAL
MAINTENANCE
(Note that prices tre MONTHLY cost for the corresponding service.)
2014X
0
1
2
2050X
0
1
2
2051X
0
1
2
2040X
0
1
2
2030X
0
1
2
2031X
0
1
2
SUPERMAC SPECTRUM Color Monitor
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
MAC SE/PC 5.25' Diskette File Xfer
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
MAC II/PC 5.25- Diskette File Xfer
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
Mac Internal BOOK 3.5' Drive
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
MAC86 Intel 8086 Co-Processor
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
MAC286 Intel 80286 Co-Processor
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
31.45
37.80
25.60
3.70
4.45
3.00
3.70
4.45
3.00
2.10
2.50
1.70
8.40
10.10
6.80
8.40
10.10
6.80
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-------
Desktop Publishing Cost Sproadshtet
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER
UNIT
QUAN TOTAL
MAINTENANCE
(Note that prices are MONTHLY cost for the corresponding service.)
2060X
0
1
2
2061X
0
1
2
2062X
0
1
2
2070X
0
1
2
2071X
0
1
2
2072X
0
1
2
MacMalnfraoe 3270 Emulation: MAC SE
ON-SITE
In-Wanranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
MacMalnfrane 3270 Eaulatlon: MAC II
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
NetWay 1000A 3270 Emulator: Gateway
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
DTP LAN Star Controller
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
Fast Path -3 Network Bridge
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
PC Compatible Network Interface
ON-SITE
In-Warranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
6.00
7.20
4. SO
8.40
10.10
6.80
23.00
27.55
18.70
4.25
5.10
3.45
17.50
21.00
14.30
0.55
0.65
0.45
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B2-9
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Pbnrmlng
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER
UNIT
QUAN TOTAL
MAINTENANCE
(Note that prices tre MONTHLY cost for the corresponding service.)
2020X
0
1
2
2021X
0
1
2
InageVrlter II Dot Matrix Printer
ON-SITE
In-Varranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Varranty only)
LaserWriter Laser Printer
ON-SITE
In-Varranty
Out of Warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
4.95
5.90
3.90
35.60
42.70
29.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
MO
-------
Desktop Publishing Cost Spreadsheet
RANGE NAMES DEFINED IN SPREADSHEET DTP.COST.VKl
D-3.5-DRIVE
D-3270-MACII
D-3270-SE
D-5.25-DRIVE
D-80286
D-8086
D-CRICKETDRAW
D-CRICKETGRAPH
D-DESIGN
D-ETHERNET
D-EXCEL
D-FASTPATH
D-IMAGEWRITER
D-LASER
D-MAC-SE
D-MAC286
D-MAC86
D-MACDRAW
D-MACII
D-MACI1-3270
D-MACII-MONITOR
0-NACMAINFRAHE
D-MACPAINT
D-MACSE-3270
D-MACSE-MONITOR
D-HACTERMINAL
D-MACWRITE
D-MORE
0-NETVAY-1000A
D-PAGEMAKER
D-PRINTERS
D-SPECTRUM
D-STAR-CNTRL
D-SUPERVIEU
D-TOPS
D-WORO
6-COST-SUMMARY
G-RANGES
G-REPT-FULL
G-REPT-HW
6-REPT-MAINT
G-REPT-SW
6-REPT-TRAIN
G-SUBS-HH
6-SUB$-KAINT
G-SUBS-SW
6-SUBS-TRAIN
6-TOTS
H-DRIVE-5.25
M-DRIVE-800K
M-FASTPATH
M-IMAGEVRITER
M-LASER
H-MAC286
M-HAC86
H-MACII
M-MACII-3270
M-MACII-MONITOR
M-KACSE
M-MACSE-3270
M-MACSE-MONITOR
M-NETWAY-1000A
M-STAR-CNTRL
M-SUPERMAC
M-TOPS
B2-11
-------
Appendix B.3
TRAINING FOR USE OF DESKTOP PUBLISHING SYSTEMS
Course Descriptions
CLIN4001* - DTP LAN Administrator Course
DESCRIPTION: The DTP LAN Administrator Course is designed to provide the train-
ing required to property administrate a DTP LAN within the Agency's guidelines.
This course is required for all DTP LAN Administrators.
CLASS SIZE: The ™aTinnim class size for this course is 10 students. There wQl be no
more than two (2) students per workstation for the hands-on lab portion of this
course.
DURATION: The DTP LAN Administrator Course includes 1.5 days of lecture and
hands-on instruction.
EQUIPMENT: The following equipment is required, at a minimum;
1 Professional Desktop Publishing System
2 Standard Desktop Publishing System
1 Network Printer
1 SNA Gateway
COURSE OUTLINE: The LAN Administrator Course will teach the following skills:
EPA LAN Policy and Standards
Agency position on LANs
Policies covering LANs
Local policies and procedures
DTP LAN Organization
Components of a LAN
Connecting Desktop Publishing Systems to the LAN
Connecting Desktop Publishing Printers to the LAN
Connecting to a PC-DOS/MS-DOS-based workstation
How StarControllers are used
How Network Bridges are used
The function of the SNA Gateway
LAN Utilization
How to share a file on the LAN
How to share a printer on the LAN
Using the SNA Gateway to connect to an Agency mainframe
Using the Asynchronous communications port to use E-Mail
B3-1
-------
Volume I-LAN Design & Plwmlng
Growth issues
How to add a workstation
How to add a printer
Sharing files with other software packages
Problem Determination
What are problems with a IAN
How to determine that a problem exists
Isolating problems to a workstation or printer
Who to call for assistance
Ongoing administration issues.
How to back up file server
How often to back up file server
Control of File Server disk space and print spool
Network management utilities
Network problem determination utilities
CLIN 4002x - NDPD & Local Support Personnel
DESCRIPTION: NDPD & Local Support Personnel Course is designed to provide per-
sonnel responsible for providing support to Desktop Publishing LANs within the
Agency with the training required to properly support a LAN within the Agency's
guidelines. This course will provide an in-depth study of the operation of LANs for
those staff members who will provide technical support to the LAN administrators.
The emphasis will be on problem determination and resolution and the tools and
utilities necessary to perform that task.
CLASS SIZE: The maximum class size for this course is 10 students. There will be
no more than two (2) students per workstation for the hands-on lab portion of this
course.
DURATION: The NDPD & Local Support Course includes 3 days of lecture and hands-
on instruction.
EQUIPMENT: The following equipment is required, at a minimum-
1 Professional Desktop Publishing System
2 Standard Desktop Publishing System
1 Network Printer
1 SNA Gateway
COURSE OUTLINE: The NDPD & Local Support Course wfll teach the following
skills:
Desktop Publishing Technology
Characteristics of Workstations
Characteristics of Printers
Topologies of LANs using DTP hardware
Desktop Publishing Software
B3-2
-------
Desktop Publishing mining
»i
Office Automation Software for Desktop Publishing Systems
Comparison of DTP and PC software systems
Network Operating System Characteristics
Features of Network Operating Systems
Translating data/files from Agency standard PCs
Desktop Publishing IAN.
Common topologies of LANs.
Components of LANs.
How components interact with the LAN.
What problems can occur on LAN.
Isolating the problem to a workstation.
Diagnostic procedures with the LAN.
Diagnostic procedures with the workstation.
Using Desktop Publishing System diagnostics.
SNA Gateway
Configuration issues from Mainframe viewpoint
Configuration issues from LAN viewpoint
How to use the* SNA Gateway
Diagnosing problems with the SNA Gateway
Problem Determination
Who can call for help
What basics should be checked
Diagnosing problems
Who to call for major problems
Problem reports from vendor
CLIN 4003x - DTP Systems for the Common User
DESCRIPTION: The DTP Systems for the Common User Course is designed to provide
personnel responsible for using LANs with the training required to properly use a
DTP system with a LAN within the Agency's guidelines. This course shall be
designed primarily as an on-site orientation session when a new LAN has been in-
stalled.
CLASS STTP- The maximum class size for this course is 20 students.
DURATION: The DTP Systems for the Common User Course takes 1/2 day.
EQUIPMENT: No equipment is required, although if provided on- site, EPA may choose
to have a LAN available for demonstration and 1-on-l review following the lecture
portion of the class.
B34
-------
Volume I • LAN Design & Planrmlna
COURSE OUTLINE: The DTP Systems for the Common User Course will teach the
following skills:
Desktop Publishing Systems
Features of Hardware and Software
Integrated environment; use of mouse & icons
Applications available for the DTP system
Characteristics of a print spooler
Desktop Publishing System LAN
How a LAN changes the environment
Accessing the LAN
How to access files on the LAN, and how to back them up
How to use the print spooler on the LAN
What applications are appropriate and available for a LAN?
EPA policies regarding software usage
Dealing with LAN Problems, and where to seek assistance
LAN Security
B3-4
-------
Appendix C.1
LOCAL AREA NETWORK COMPONENTS
The following pages contain a list of all hardware and software items available through
the SMA contract supporting IBM-compatible Local Area Networking. Each item in the
list includes the following information:
• The Contract Line Item Number (GUN)
• A brief description of the item
• Guidelines on determining the number of units to purchase
C1-1
-------
Volume I • LAN Design & Planrmlng
COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE
NETWORK INTERCONNECT CARDS AND CABLES
11400
11410
11420
IBM Token-Ring Network (TRN) PC Adapter II
Every PC on a network Bust have a network
adapter, or Interconnect, card. Processors
ordered through this contract have separate
Contract Line Item Numbers (CLINs) for their
appropriate network adapter cards or they are
bundled with the computer. However, If an
already-purchased PC, such as a Telex 1280 or
EPSON EQUITY III+, Is added to a network, this
network adapter Bust be ordered as a PC upgrade.
8' PC-to-Data Connector Attachment Cable
One shielded twisted pair cable 1s needed for
every PC on the network that will be connected
through data-quality cable; I.e. Type 1 or Type
2. This cable has a 9-p1n D-connector for the
computer end. It connects the IBM TRN PC Adapter
II to the Standard Vail Data Connector (CLIN
50130).
8' PC-to-Modular Connector Attachment Cable with
Type 3 Media Filter
One unshielded twisted pair cable for every PC
on the network that Is connected through Type 3
(voice-quality) cable rather than data-quality.
This cable has a 9-pin sub-D shell connector for
the computer end. It has a line filter to
eliminate the RF transmissions from the line
•t the connector. It connects with a 4-wire
RJ-11 (telephonic) connector at the vail.
Ci-2
-------
Local Ana Network Components
CABLING AND CONCENTRATOR HARDWARE
11500 IBM 8228 Multistation Access Unit (MAU)
Each MAU has the capacity of connecting 8
PCs, Including all servers, gateways, consoles,
tnd workstations. It Is recommended that not acre
than 7 connections on any one MAU within a network
be allocated. The extra connection should be
reserved for expansion or for use In the event
that one of the other connections becomes
unusable.
Each MAU also has a 'ring-In* and "ring-
out" attachment for connection of additional MAUs
In a network ring, allowing up to 260 PCs In a
single physical token ring. (Unlimited logical
connections are possible by bridging physical
LANs).
11510 Standard 6-foot tall l9-1nch Distribution Rack
For single-MAU networks, a MAU component
housing 1s adequate to protect and mount one
MAU. For multl-MAU networks, a distribution rack
nay be more practical. Each rack can contain up
to 2 distribution panels and 8 MAUs.
11520 Standard Distribution Panel & grounding kit
One to two nay be ordered for each
distribution rack, depending on the number of MAUs
In a cluster. Each panel handles up to 64 data
connectors.
11530 Multistation Access Unit Component Housing
One per MAU for networks with either a single
MAU or with distributed MAUs. This housing
provides protection for the MAU, cable sunagenent
brackets for the attaching cables, and an area for
labeling connections.
Ci-3
-------
Volume I • LAN Design 8, Plannntng
SYSTEM PATCH CABLES
The patch cables connect network products together and to
cabling system components and accessories. They are used
In the network:
o Between distribution panel connectors and NAU
receptacles;
o Between MAUs In the sane network ring In a wiring
closet;
o Between attaching devices and faceplates when
additional length Is needed;
o Between attaching devices and MAUs In component
housings; and
o Between MAUs and repeaters.
11600
11610
11620
11630
8 foot patch cable
30 foot patch cable
75 foot patch cable
150 foot patch cable
11640
11650
11660
11670
4-Meter Type 3 Media Jumper Cables
One for every'Type 3 cable used (CLIN 50060).
The jumper cable has a HAU-compat1ble data connector
on one end and 4-w1re attachment to the telephone
connecting block on the other end.
Standard Vail data connector
One for every PC In the network using data-
quality cabling (Type 1 or Type 2). This Is used
to attach the Network Interconnect Card (CLIN 50010)
to the building cabling system. It has a MAU-
compatlble data connector and a faceplate for
attachment to a wall and outlet box.
Type 3 Media wall data connector
One for every PC In the network using voice-
quality cabling (Type 3), providing an attachaent
point for the RJ-11C connectors (CLIN 50030).
Miring test plug
One or two per site, as required by LAN Adminis-
trator to test transmission through cabling system.
-------
Local Ana Network Components
FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
11030 IBM Personal System/2 (PS/2) Model 80-071
One unit should be purchased for every file
•nd/or print server needed on the network. The
processor Is an Intel 80386 configured with the
I8M Token-Ring Network Adapter/A, Adapter cable,
IBM 6157 Tape Backup System, IBM DOS 3.3, IBM LAN
Support Software, and all necessary system
software, documentation, cabling, and supplies.
For servers, you Bust also order the Novell Network
Operating System below.
11300 Novell Network Operating System Software
(Novell PS/2 Advanced NetWare 286)
Since the Novell system Is licensed by server,
If a server 1s purchased, you must purchase a copy
of this software for that server. Each file/print
server requires a copy of the Novell operating
system. This version will only work on IBM PS/2
Models 50,60, and 80. It will not work with ATs,
Telex 1280, or Epson Equity, although these
systems can be workstations on the LAN.
FILE AND PRINT SERVER MEMORY EXPANSION UNITS
11310 IBM PS/2 80386 Memory Expansion Option
The IBM PS/2 Model 80 comes with 2Mb RAM, but
can address up to 16Mb via a 32-bit data path.
This board provides an extra 2 Mb of memory and Is
able to accommodate a total of 6Mb of RAM with the
addition of memory expansion kits.
11320 IBM PS/2 80386.Memory Expansion Kit
This kit contains 2Mb of RAM which can be
Installed on the memory expansion board above.
11330 IBM PS/2 Hard Disk Drive (115Mb)
This 1s • drive providing 115Mb storage. No
additional expansion slot or software 1s required for
Implementation on the Model 80 or the Model 60.
Ci-5
-------
Volume I' LAN Deslan ft Plannnlna
VIDEO DISPLAY UNITS FOR SERVERS, BRIDGES & CONSOLES
The IBM PS/2 systems use analog Monitors. For each
server, bridge, and console ordered, you must also order
either the monochrome or color monitor shown below.
11100
11110
IBM PS/2 8503 Monochrome Video Display Unit/Adapter
A 12" monitor with 720 X 400 dot resolution In
text and 640 X 480 dot resolution In graphics.
This monitor Is a black and white monitor with
excellent resolution. It can display 64 shades of
the gray scale and Is compatible with most
graphics programs on the market.
IBM PS/2 8513 Color Video Display Unit/Adapter
A 12" monitor with 720 X 400 dot resolution 1n
text, 640 X 480 pixels In graphlcs/16-color mode, and
320 X 200 pixels In 256-color mode. This monitor
can be used with Uttle eyestraln for a full day's
work. Text resolution Is the same as the
monochrome monitor with the added benefit of color.
C1-6
-------
Local Area Network Components
NETWORK BRIDGE
The network bridge Is designed to connect different
physical networks so that they logically appear as • single
network. The processor Is an IBM PS/2 Model 60. To support
the bridge, you Bust order two TRN Adapter/A network
Interconnect cards. If you are not ready for the bridge,
then only one network Interconnect card 1s required.
11010
11020
11700
11710
Network Bridge Processor/Snail Server (NBP)
One for every two networks being bridged. This
processor comes In two configurations, both with
DOS 3.3, LAN Support Software, 1Mb RAM (expandable to
15Mb), on an 80286 10MHz processor:
IBM PS/2 Model 60-041 with 40Mb Hard Disk
IBM PS/2 Model 60-071 with 70Mb Hard Disk
IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter/A and Cable
One for every network being connected; I.e. If
two networks are being bridged, two Interconnect
cards need to be Installed. If the processor 1s not
to be used Immediately to support a bridge, only one
adapter 1s required to attach It to the network.
Novell Advanced NetWare 286 — Bridge Software
This software does not need to be ordered with
the bridge processor; It 1s provided automatically
as part of the server software.
C1-7
-------
Volume I • LAN Peston & Ptarmnlng
SNA COMMUNICATIONS SERVER AND WORKSTATION SOFTWARE
11900
11910
CXI PCOX SNA Communications Server
(Hardware and Software)
The CXI gateway provides the 3270 gateway to
the IBM aulnframes. Each card allows IS concurrent
sessions. This Hern automatically cooes with
software for eight Individual systems^ Each system
can be configured for a 3278 session and a printer
session. NOTE: This card requires • standard
XT/AT-compatlble bus. It will not fit Into a
PS/2 Model 50, 60, or 80.
A number of components lake up this Item:
PCOX-ONE LAN Version (8 copies)
PCOX 3270-FT Utility (8 copies)
PCOX GU-3270 SDLC
PCOX-Remote
Remote 3278/79 Workstation Software
Additional copies of this software can be
purchased to allow more sessions through the CXI
gateway above.
Components Baking up this Item are:
PCOX-ONE LAN Version (1 copy)
PCOX 3270-FT Utility (1 copy)
ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS
11920
Novell Asynchronous Communications Server (ACS)
ACS Is an adapter card which provides four
dial-out, asynchronous lines that are then connected
to modems or the port selector. This board will only
fit In a standard (not PS/2) bus. It requires that
there bt exactly 256Kb RAM memory In the processor.
Ci-8
-------
Local Ana Network Components
CONSOLE
11000 IBM PS/2 Model 30-002
The network console, IBM PS/2 Model 30, Is •
dual floppy PC for use on the LAN. In order to work
on the LAN, a network Interconnect card (CLIN 50570)
and Monitor (CLIN 50210 or 50220) Mist be ordered.
11800 IBM Token-Ring Network (TRN) PC Adapter II
One Adapter card 1s required for tach console
connected to the network. The adapter card Is
supplied with cable and with the IBM LAN Support
Program package.
PRINTERS
11200 Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Series II
Offered as a standard laser printer, provided
with 2 toner cartridges. It has a text resolution
of 300 X 300 dpi, a graphics resolution of up to
300 X 300 dpi, a variety of fonts, and can connect
either through a parallel port or a RS-232C port.
This printer Is designed for smaller networks (or
for Individual use) than the HP LaserJet 500.
11210 Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 500 Plus
This printer Is a high-performance laser.
In addition to the features offered by the LaserJet,
this printer provides 2 Input trays, 250 sheets In
Us output tray (as opposed to 100), job offsetting,
and extended Roman font. It also can be used froa
a parallel port or a RS232C port.
Ci-9
-------
j jme
5 an tnnn ig
PLOTTER
10900
Hewlett-Packard 7550A Plotter
This plotter provides fast A4/A & A3/B size color
graphics. The •»x1eun plotting area Is 10 X 16.1
Inches for 11 X 17 paper, with • pen velocity of 31.5
Inches per second. A resolution of .001 Inch with
repeatability of .004 Inches Is produced.
The HP 7550A connects through two RS-232C ports with
selected baud rates of 75, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600.
Proper cable and pens (8 fiber-tipped and 8
transparency) are Included.
NOTE: Plotters require special handling to
operate over the network.
FONT CARTRIDGES AND DOWNLOADABLE FONTS
The Hewlett-Packard LaserJet comes with Internal
fonts. The following HP Font cartridges compatible with the
two laser printers are offered as optionally orderable
accessories. Purchase as required to support laser printer
applications. A font download utility will be Included with
each set of diskettes offered under the Downloadable fonts.
Fonts
12000
12010
12020
12030
12040
12050
12060
Courier
Prestige Elite
Letter Gothic
Tlaes Roman Proportional
Helvetica
Tlaes Room/Helvetica 6,8,10,12,14,18,24,30
point;
Presentation 9.5,10,12,14,18,24,30 point.
Ci-10
-------
Local Afoa Network Components
LAN APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE
With the exception of IBM OisplayVrlte and Lotus
1-2-3, each of the software Items provided below are
currently LAN-compatible and nay be purchased as one base
unit and multiple user or node versions. Software purchased
Is provided on a 3.5 Inch media. LAN-compatibility provides
that the software operates properly with LAN hardware and
the file/print server(s) and 1t permits the major portions
of the program to be stored on a file server and shared
simultaneously with other network users. Purchase one base
package to be Installed on the network file server chosen to
support the application. Purchase as many node software
packages as required to support the network users of the
application.
31010
31011
31020
31021
Wordstar Professional
Key features of Wordstar Professional are an
Integral spelling checker and thesaurus, •all-
merge capability, support for Indexing and table
of contents, programmable function keys and
keyboard macros, multi-line headers and footers,
editing of ASCII (non-document) files, support for
math functions, background printing, and full
support of all printer features for the printers
offered under this contract.
Basic Server
Node/Workstation
DlsplayWrlte 4
Key features of DlsplayWrlte are an Integral
spelling checker, mall-merge capability, automatic
formatting, and full support of printer features.
The package 1s able to produce a file compatible
with IBM's OCA file format. The package also has
• mainframe version available that Is compatible
v1th the Agency's IBM 3090/200 computer.
Basic Server
Node/Workstation
Ci-ii
-------
Volume I • LAN Design S Ptannnlng
LAN APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE (continued)
31030
31031
31040
31041
31050
31051
HultlMate
Key features of MultlMate are an Integral
spelling checker and thesaurus, Ball-merge
capability, automatic formatting, scientific and
•athematlcal symbols entry from keyboard, a
document summary page describing the author and
contents of the document and keywords for
searches, ability to do snake and bound newspaper
columns, footnoting, the ability to Import and
export ASCII, OCA, and DIF files, automatic Roman
and Arabic section renumbering, horizontal and
vertical column addition, and full support of all
printer features for the a printers offered under
this contract.
Basic Server
Node/Workstation
Word Perfect
Key features of Word Perfect are an
Integral spelling checker and thesaurus, nail-
merge capability, automatic formatting, automatic
Indexing, footnotes and endnotes, line numbering,
automatic paragraph renumbering, multi-line
headers and footers, the ability to edit two
documents simultaneously, the ability to prepare a
OCA revlsable and final-form document, and full
support of all printer features for the printers
offered under this contract.
Basic Server
Node/Workstation
Lex1type
Key features of Lex1type art tnulatlon of the
Lexltron work processor, vail-verge capability,
automatic formatting, and full support of printer
features.
Basic Server
Node/Workstation
Cl-12
-------
Local Area Network Components
LAN APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE (continued)
31060
31061
31070
31071
Lotus 1-2-3
An Integrated spreadsheet package with
graphics which Is able to exchange data and «acro
files with Lotus. Key features of Lotus 1-2-3
Include mathematical, financial tnd statistical
functions, data sorting and Indexing,
Import/export capability to other Agency Standard
packages, the ability to display Information In
the form of graphs, and to print those Images on
Agency standard printers and plotters, and full
support of all printer features for the printers
offered under this contract. The package Includes
a disk-based tutorial for all features. Presently
this package does not have a networking version.
Order one copy for each LOTUS requirement.
Base Server
Node/Workstation
dBASE III Plus
A data base management system which Includes
multiple Index and data files, relational
connection between dissimilar data bases,
Import/export data files to other Agency standard
packages, encryption/password protection of data
bases and a pull-down menu-oriented command
structure In addition to direct command control.
It also provides file locking/unlocking to prevent
two users from opening the same file for
•edification at the same time.
Basic Server
Node/Workstation (5 Users)
C1-13
-------
Volume I • LAN Design & Plannnlng
LAN APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE (continued)
31080
31090
PC FOCUS
PC FOCUS provides code compatibility with the
Focus DBMS Installed on the EPA IBM 3090, and
provides upload and download capabilities for data
and programs between the mainframe and PCs. It
also provides file locking/unlocking to prevent
two users from opening the same file for
•edification at the same time. For vultlple user
access to files, commands must be provided that
allow record locking/unlocking such that multiple
users are only locked out from modifying the same
record In a file, not from reading the file. A
password security system Is Incorporated that
provides security for data files at the field
level. Further, the data will be encrypted such
that parts of the file cannot be read or modified
without the proper password. FOCUS provides a
transaction-processing server that manages multi-
user simultaneous access to the databases.
Basic Server
LAN Services' Lan Trail ;
A security package that 1s designed to provide
effective data security for network users. The
functional audit-trail system provides control
over unexpected log-1ns and file access. The
program functions with multi-server networks. The
package tracks and reports unsuccessful log-In
attempts, use of network resources, and potential
problems with the network and network users.
Basic Server
Cl-14
-------
Local Ana Network Components
LAN APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE (continued)
31100
IBM LAN Manager
This network eon1torIng and diagnostic
software continuously monitors the network for
hard and soft errors and notifies the operator of
failures requiring 1 mediate attention; It logs
network error and status Information to disk for
subsequent retrieval by date and tine and/or
workstation address; Identifies probable cause and
source of network failures; logically deletes a
workstation from the network upon request by the
operator; controls access to program functions by
password; supports operator use of symbolic names
for network workstations; and provides easy-to-use
menus and operator commands to display status and
test workstation connectivity.
Basic Server
LAN PLANNING PACKAGES
The following planning and Installation documents
are available as separately orderable Items. These
documents are very helpful for planning and Installing
networks.
13000
13010
13020
13030
13040
13050
IBM Token-Ring Network Telephone Twisted-Pair
Media Guide
IBM Token-Ring Local Area Network Introduction
and Planning Guide
IBM Token Ring Network Installation Guide
IBM Token-Ring Network Ada1n1strator's Guide
IBM Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Kit
IBM Local Area Network (LAN) Cabling Systea
Planning and Installation Guide
CMS
-------
Appendix C.2
LAN.COST.WK1: SPREADSHEET FOR COST ANALYSIS
IMPORTANT: BEFORE WORKING WITH THE SPREADSHEET, BE SURE
TO MAKE A COPY OF IT.
The LANjCOST.WKl spreadsheet is set up In the following way:
• It contains an item identified by Contract Line Item Number (CUN) for each
hardware and software item available from SMA for Local Area Networks
(LANs). Documents, training and services (e.g. consulting) available from SMA
are also included.
• Each line item contains a list of the different elements or components within it
(See Appendix Cl for descriptions of each of these components.)
• Each line item is identified by one or more range names (of up to 14 characters)
characterizing that item. Components of Local Area Networks begin with "L-";
general names, beginning with "G-", are defined for such thinp as dollar totals.
Range names for Maintenance are given an "M-" prefix. All range names are listed
at the end of this appendix.
• To scan the alphabetized list of all range names and their respective cell definitions
within LOTUS, GOTO RANGES.
• To print out all items, indicate a print range of "G-FULL-REFT."
NOTE: Remember, to GOTO a range, press function key F5 and enter range name.
Once you have entered the quantities desired for each item (in a copy of the spread-
sheet), you may go through and delete all items with quantities of zero (Le. none pur-
chased). You can then print out the resulting spreadsheet and attach it to your purchase
request
CM
-------
Volume I- LAN Design & Plannnlna
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER QUAN TOTAL
UNIT
CATEGORIES
HARDWARE
SOFTWARE
SERVICES
TRAINING
MAINTENANCE
TOTALS
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
TOTAL PURCHASE
0.00
C2-2
-------
Local Area Network Cost Spreadsheet
CLIN DESCRIPTION COST/PER QUAN TOTAL
UNIT
COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE
11400
11410
11420
11500
11510
11520
11530
11600
11610
11620
11630
11640
11650
11660
11670
Network Interconnect cards/cables
Network Interconnect Card
o IBM Token-Ring Net Adapter II
o LAN Support Prograa Package
8' Type 6 Adapter Cable
o IBM Token-Ring Cable: Type 6
8' Type 3 Adapter Cable + Filter
o IBM Token-Ring Cable: Type 3
Cabling and Concentrator hardware
Multistation Access Unit (MAU)
72' 19-Inch Distribution Rack
Distribution Panel t grounding kit
o Standard Distribution Panel
o IBM Rack Grounding Kit
MAU Component Housing
Cabling System Patch Cables
(1) 8 feet
(2) 30 feet
(3) 75 feet
(4) 150 feet
4-Meter Type 3 Jumper Cables
Standard Wall data connector
o Standard Wall Data Connector
o Faceplate for Data Connector
Type 3 Media wall data connector
o Type 3 Wall Data Connector
o Faceplate for Data Connector
Wiring test plug
o Data Wrap Plug
641.30
25.67
46.98
559.36
721.65
194.47
80.85
25.13
60.09
83.03
220.69
19.12
16.06
13.87
25.13
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
C2-3
-------
Volume I • LAN Design & Plannnlna
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER QUAN
UNIT
TOTAL
11030
11300
11310
11320
11330
11100
11110
11010
11020
11700
FILE AND PRINT SERVER
File and Print Server Syste*
o IBM PS/2 Model 80
Token-Ring Network Adapter/A
Token-Ring Network Cable
LAN Support Program Package
IBM 6157 Tape Backup Systea
IBM Tape Backup Adapter/A
IBM DOS 3.30 Program Package
10 3.5' DS/HC Diskettes
2 Streaming Tape Cartridges
SY-TOS Tape Utilities Program
Network Operating System Software
o Novell PS/2 Advanced Netware286
File & Print Server Memory Expansion
o 32-b1t 2 MB RAM Memory
Expansion Adapter
o 2 Mb Memory Kit for Adapter
Additional 115 Mb Disk Drive
Video Display Units
o IBM PS/2 Monochrome Monitor
o IBM PS/2 12" Color Monitor
NETWORK BRIDGE
Network Bridge Processor (NBP)
0 With 40 MB Hard Disk
- IBM PS/2 Model 60
• IBM DOS 3.30 Program Package
o With 70MB Hard Disk
- IBM PS/2 Model 60
• IBM DOS 3.30 Prograa Package
Network Bridge Interconnect Cards
o IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter
o IBM Token-Ring Cable
o LAN Support Prograa Package
7,910.14
1,633.29
1,127.46
903.50
2,919.16
174.80
470.87
3,660.97
4,327.39
663.15
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
C2-4
-------
Local Ana Network Cost Spreadsheet
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER
UNIT
QUAN
TOTAL
11710
11900
11910
11920
11000
11800
11200
11210
Network Bridge Program
(Included if 1th Server Software)
SNA COMM. SERVER & WORKSTATION SW
SNA Communications Server
o PCOX-One LAN Version (8 copies)
e PCOX 3270-FT Utility (8 copies)
0 PCOX 6U-3270 SDLC
o PCOX-Reroote Hardware
Remote 3278/79 Workstation Software
o PCOX-One Lan Version (1 copy)
o PCOX 3270-FT Utility (1 copy)
ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS SERVER
o Novell ACS Package
NETWORK CONSOLE
Network Console Processor
o IBM PS/2 Model 30
o IBM DOS 3.30 Program Package
o LAN Support Program Package
Network Console Interconnect Card
o IBM Token-Ring Netwk Adapter II
o IBM Token-Ring Adapter Cable
PRINTERS
Standard Laser Printer
o Hewlett Packard LaserJet
Series II w/ Centronics Parallel
Interface
o HP 2MB Memory Expansion Card
o 8' Shielded Parallel Cable
o One Extra Toner Cartridge
Hlgh-Perfonnance Laser Printer
o Hewlett Packard LaserJet
500 w/ Centronics Parallel
Interface
o HP 2MB Memory Expansion Card
e 8' Shielded Parallel Cable
o One Extra Toner Cartridge
0.00
2,051.72
182.99
1,065.19
1,257.47
675.15
2,619.49
4,343.83
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
C2-5
-------
Volume ?• LAN Design 8, Plannntng
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER QUAN
UNIT
TOTAL
12000
12010
12020
12030
12040
12050
12060
10900
Font Cartridges & Downloadable Fonts
1. Courier
2. Prestige Elite
3. Letter Gothic
4. Times Roman Proportional
5. Helvetica - Forns
Downloadable
6. Tines Roman/Helvetica
7. Letter Gothic/Presentation
PLOTTER
o Hewlett Packard 7550A Plotter
with RS-232C Serial Interface
o 6' Serial Interface Cable
o Transparency pens
(2 packs of 5 colors)
177.53
177.53
177.53
177.53
177.53
143.12
143.12
2,848.69
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
C2-8
-------
Local Area Network Cost Spreadsheet
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER
UNIT
QUAN
TOTAL
31010
31011
31020
31021
31030
31031
31040
31041
31050
31051
31060
31061
31070
31071
31080
31090
31100
13000
13010
13020
13030
13040
13050
LAN APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE
LAN Wordprocesslng Software
1. WordStar 4.0
Base
Per Node
2. OlsplayVrUe 4
Base
Per Node
3. Ashton-Tate Multlmate
Base (5 users)
Per Node
4. Word Perfect 4.2
Base
Per node
5. Lex 1 type
Base
Per node
LAN LOTUS 1-2-3
Base
Per node
dBase III Plus 1.1 DBMS
Base
Per each 5-Node LAN Pac
FOCUS
LAN Services' Lan Trail
IBM LAN Manager
LAN PLANNING PACKAGES from IBM
1. TRN Telephone Twisted- Pair Media
Guide
2. TRN Intro and Planning Guide
3. TRN Installation Guide
4. TRN Administrator's Guide
5. TRN Problem Determination Kit
6. LAN Cabling System Planning &
Installation Guide
288.35
80.85
406.41
406.41
756.01
178.08
250.18
75.38
633.65
163.88
344.14
344.14
585.58
737.44
696.47
324.47
1,579.76
12.45
22.94
20.21
9.07
73.20
16.93
.
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2-7
-------
Volume I • LAN Design A Plannnlna
CLIN DESCRIPTION COST/PER QUAN TOTAL
UNIT
50010
50020
50030
50040
50050
LAN SERVICES
Senior LAN Analyst
LAN Anlayst .
Senior LAN Field Engineer
LAN Field Engineer
Travel and Subs 1 stance
(Based on JTR plus GiA)
Hourly *
Rate Hours
146.40
72.98
61.73
37.04
**
0
0
0
0
.00
.00
.00
.00
NOVELL SUPPORT SUBSCRIPTIONS
Per f Of
Year Netwrks
10800
10800
10800
FY 1988 Network Support
Basic
Add Users (Optional
FY 1989 Network Support
Basic
Add Users (Optional
FY 1990 Network Support
Basic
Add Users (Optional
2,711.59
2,977.28
3,269.55
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
C2-6
-------
Local Area Network Cost Spreadsheet
CLIN DESCRIPTION COST/PER QUAN TOTAL
UNIT
TRAINING Per 1
Class Classes
4004X
0
1
2
3
4005X
0
1
2
3
LAN ADMINISTRATOR COURSE
At SMA North Carolina
At EPA On-Slte
At EPA Off -Site
Travel and Subsistence
NDPD AND LOCAL SUPPORT PERSONNEL
At SMA North Carolina
At EPA On-S1te
At EPA Off-Site
Travel and Subsistence
2,593.86
1,392.11
4,035.96
1,092.50
2,305.44
1,103.69
3,266.84
819.38
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
4006X BASIC LAN USER
0
1
2
3
At SMA North Carolina
At EPA On-Slte
At EPA Off -Site
Travel and Subsistence
815.27
407.63
647.98
546.25
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
4007X ADVANCED LAN USER
0
1
2
3
At SMA North Carolina
At EPA On-S1te
At EPA Off-Site
Travel and Subsistence
815.27
815.27
1,295.97
546.25
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
4008X EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW
0
1
2
3
At SMA North Carolina
At EPA On-Slte
At EPA Off -Site
Travel and Subsistence
778.21
778.21
1,351.77
546.25
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
4009X LAN APPLICATIONS DEVELOPERS
0
1
2
3
At SMA North Carolina
At EPA On-Slte
At EPA Off -SHe
Travel and Subsistence
815.27
815.27
1,416.14
546.25
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
02-9
-------
Volume I • LAN Des/on & Plannnlng
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER
UNIT
QUAN
TOTAL
4010X NATIONAL PROGRAM MANAGERS
0
1
2
3
At SHA North Carolina
At EPA On-S1te
At EPA Off -Site
Travel and Subsistence
815.27
815.27
1,416.14
S46.25
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
C2-10
-------
Local Ana Network Cost Spreadsheet
CLIN DESCRIPTION COST/PER QUAN TOTAL
UNIT
MAINTENANCE COSTS
(Note that price 1s MONTHLY charge for maintenance contract.)
2140X
0
1
2
2150X
0
1
2
2103X
0
1
2
2131X
0
1
2
2132X
0
1
2
2133X
0
1
2
Network Interconnect Card ft Cables
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SNIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
Cabling & Concentrator Hardware
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
File and Print Server System
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
Memory Expansion Adapter
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
Memory Expansion Adapter Kit
ON-SITE <"•
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
115Mb Disk Drive
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
2.05
2.50
1.70
4.60
5.55
3.75
80.70
96.85
65.75
11.20
13.40
9.10
9.10
10.90
7.40
24.50
29.40
19.95
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Ml
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Pbnrmlng
CL1N
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER QUAN
UNIT
TOTAL
MAINTENANCE COSTS
(Note that price 1s MONTHLY charge for maintenance contract.)
2110X
0
1
2
2111X
0
1
2
2101X
0
1
2
2102X
0
1
2
2170X
0
1
2
2100X
0
1
2
IBM PS/2 Monochrome Monitor
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
IBM PS/2 Color Monitor
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
IBM PS/2 Model 60-041
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non -Warranty only)
IBM PS/2 Model 60-071
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
Network Bridge Interconnect Cards
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
IBM PS/2 Model 30
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
1.75
2.10
1.40
4.80
5.75
3.90
25.20
30.25
20.50
37.10
44.55
30.25
5.60
6.70
4.55
11.90
14.25
9.65
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
C2-12
-------
Local Ana Network Cost Spreadsheet
CLIN
DESCRIPTION
COST/PER
UNIT
QUAN
MAINTENANCE cos is '
(Note that price Is MONTHLY charge for aalntenance contract.)
TOTAL
2180X
0
1
2
2120X
0
1
2
2121X
0
1
2
2090X
0
1
2
IBM PS/2 Hodel 30 Interconnect Card
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
HP LaserJet Series II Printer
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
HP LaserJet 500 Plus
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
HP 7550A Plotter
ON-SITE
In warranty
Out of warranty
SHIP/CARRY-IN (Non-Warranty only)
2.05
2.50
1.70
23.00
27.60
18.75
38.45
46.20
31.35
27.35
32.80
22.25
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
C2-13
-------
Volume I- LAN Design & Plannntng
RANGE NAMES DEFINED IN SPREADSHEET
G-COST-SWWARY
G-RANGES
6-REPT-FULL
6-REPT-HW
G-REPT-MAIKT
6-REPT-SERVICE
G-REPT-SW
G-REPT-TRAIN
G-SUBS-HW
G-SUBS-MAINT
G-SUBJ-SERV
G-SUBS-SW
6-SUBJ-TRAIN
G-TOTS
L-115MB
l-ASYNCH
L-CABLING
L-CONNECTOR1
L-CONNECTOR3
L-COURIER
L-DATAWRAP-PLUG
L-DBASE
L-DISPLAYVRITE
L-DIST-PANEL
L-DIST-RACK
L-ELITE
L-FOCUS
L-FONTS
L-GOTHIC
L-GOTHIC-DVNLD
L-HELVET1CA
L-HP7550A
L-IBH-GUIDES
L-JUMPER-CABLE
L-LAN-MNGR
L-LANTRAIL
L-LASERJET-500
L-LASERJET-II
L-LEXITYPE
L-LOTUS
L-MAU
L-MAU-HOUSING
L-MEHORY-ADDED
L-MEMORY-KIT
L-MULTIMATE
L-NETWARE286
L-NIC
L-NOS
L-NOVELL-ACS
L-PATCH-CABLE
L-PCOX-ONE
L-PLOTTER
L-PS2-M30
L-PS2-H60
L-PS2-H60-041
L-PS2-M60-071
L-PS2-H60-NIC
L-PS2-M80
L-SERVER
L-SKA
L-SNA-SOFTUARE
L-TEST-PLUG
L-TIMES
L-TIMES-DWNLOAD
L-TRN-ADAPTER
L-TRN-CABLE-3
L-TRN-CABLE-6
L-VIDEO-COLOR
L-VIDEO-MONO
L-WORDPERFECT
L-WORDSTAR
N-115HB
M-CABLING
M-LASERJET-500
M-LASERJET-II
M-MEHORY-ADDED
M-MEMORY-KIT
M-NIC
H-PLOTTER
M-PS2-H30
M-PS2-M30-NIC
M-PS2-H60-041
M-PS2-M60-071
M-PS2-M60-NIC
M-PS2-M80
M-VIDEO-COLOR
M-VIDEO-MONO
C2-14
-------
Appendix C.3
LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) TRAINING
• TRAINING OFFERED WITH PURCHASED SERVICES FROM SMA
The LAN contract provides for several formal types of training as described below.
Additional training is offered with certain services that can be purchased from the SMA
LAN contract (See Appendix C4 for a description of these services.) Hie training that
is offered with specific services consists ofc
• LAN Installation Service for the Network Server
A day of on-site training with the system for (he LAN Administrator and his/her
associate is offered at the time when server installation is completed. This ac-
tivity includes a hands-on walk-through of network and server operations,
management responsibilities, demonstrations of spooler setup and hard disk
backup operations, user and group list management, the menu and command line
utilities, and other functions which the LAN administrator may be expected to
perform.
• LAN Installation Service for the Network Bridge
Training for the LAN Administrator in the configuration and operation of the
bridge is provided as pan of the installation of the network bridge.
• LAN Installation Service for Communications Gateway
Training for the LAN Administrator in the configuration and operation of the
gateway is offered as pan of this service.
• FORMAL COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
CLIN4004x - LAN Administrator Course
DESCRIPTION: The LAN Administrator Course is designed to provide the training re-
quired to properly administrator a LAN within the Agency's guidelines. This course
is recommended for all LAN Administrators and their backup(s).
CLASS SIZE: The tnarimiim class size for this course is 10 students. There will be no
more than three students per PC for the hands-on lab portion of this course.
DURATION: The LAN Administrator Course includes 3 days of lecture and hands-on
instruction.
EQUIPMENT: Equipment will be provided for a hands-on lab. If the course is onsite at
EPA. EPA is responsible for providing the equipment; otherwise, SMA will provide
it
C3-1
-------
Volume / • LAN Design & Planrmlna
COURSE OUTLINE: The LAN Administrator Course will teach the following skills.
EPA LAN Policy and Standards
Network
How to Install a Network Interface Card
How to Install a Multiple Access Unit (MAU)
How to Cable Workstations to the MAU
Proper labeling of connections
Initial component testing
File Server
How to Install NOS Software Component on FOe Server
How to Create Workstation/User ID and file partition
How to Set workstation/user password and security levels
How to Set up print spooler for network printers
Initial server testing
Workstation
How to fattall NOS Software Component on Workstation
How to Create automatic login script
How to Modify menu and other software to work with network
Initial workstation testing
Initial LAN System Installation testing
How to Stan file server
How to Start workstations
How to Test network access, print spooler, file access
How to Back up file server
Communications servers - SNA and Asynchronous
Ongoing administration issues
How to back up, and how often
Control of File Server disk space and print spool
Network management utilities
Network problem determination utilities
Adding/deleting users
Adding hardware/software
Local policies and procedures
Problem Determination
Testing a Network Interface card
Testing a File server
Testing a Workstation
Potential problems
Who to fffl for assistance
-------
Local Ana Network Training
CLIN 4005x - NDPD & Local Support Personnel
DESCRIPTION: NDPD & Local Support Course is designed to provide personnel
responsible for providing support to LANs within the Agency with the training re-
quired to properly support a LAN within the Agency's guidelines. This course wfll
provide an in-depth study of the operation of LANs for those staff members who will
provide technical support to the LAN administrators. The emphasis will be on
problem determination and resolution and the tools and utilities necessary to per-
form that task.
CLASS SIZE: The marinnim class size for this course is 10 students. There wfll be no
more than three students per PC for the hands-on lab portion of this course.
DURATION: The NDPD & Local Support Course includes 2 days of lecture and hands-
on instruction.
EQUIPMENT: Equipment will be provided for a hands-on lab. If the course is onsite at
EPA, EPA is responsible for providing the equipment; otherwise, SMA will provide
it
COURSE OUTLINE: The NDPD & Local Support Course wfll teach the following skills.
How to Install a Network Interface Card
How to Install a Multiple Access Unit (MAU)
How to Cable Workstations to the MAU
How to Install NOS Software Component on File Server
How to Create User ID and file partition
How to Set user password and security levels
How to Set up print spooler for network printers
How to Install NOS Software Component on Workstation
How to Create automatic login script
How to Modify menu and other software to work with network
How to Backup file server
How to backup, and how often
Control of File Server disk space and print spool
Testing a Network Interface card
Testing a File server
Testing a Workstation
Who to call for assistance
CUN 4006* - Basic LAN User
DESCRIPTION: Basic IAN User Course is designed to provide personnel responsible
for using LANs with the training required to properly use a LAN within the Agency's
guidelines. This course shall be designed primarily as an on-site orientation session
when a new LAN has been installed.
•
CLASS SIZE: The maximum class size for this course is 20 students.
DURATION: The Basic LAN User Course takes 1/2 day.
C34
-------
Volume I- uesign irmmg
EQUIPMENT: No equipment is required, although if provided on- site, EPA may choose
to have a LAN available for demonstration and one-on-one review following the lec-
ture portion of the class,
COURSE OUTLINE: The Basic LAN User Course will teach the following skills.
Differences between a LAN and a standalone PC environment
How to begin using the LAN.
How to access files on the LAN, and bow they are backed up.
How to use the print spooler on the LAN.
"What applications are appropriate and available for a LAN.
EPA policies regarding software usage.
Dealing with LAN Problems, and where to seek assistance.
CLIN4007X - Advanced LAN User
DESCRIPTION: The Advanced LAN User Course is designed to provide personnel
responsible for using LANs with the training beyond that provided in the Basic LAN
User Course. This course looks beyond menus, providing LAN users with an intro-
duction to the commands and features behind the menus. The user will finish the
course with an understanding of not only how, but why, LAN's work.
CLASS xiy.K* The maximum class sir* for this course is 20 students.
DURATION: Tie Advanced LAN User Course takes 1 day.
EQUIPMENT: No equipment is required, although if provided on- site, EPA may choose
to have a LAN available for demonstration and one-on-one review following the lec-
ture portion of the class.'
COURSE OUTLINE: The Advanced LAN User Course will teach the following skills.
How to control the print queue
How to save print jobs for different forms
Modification of EPA and NOS menus
How to add new features to menus
Use of TSR software in the LAN environment
Tips & Tricks to using a LAN
EPA polices regarding software usage
Dealing with LAN Problems, and where to seek assistance.
CT TN 4008x — Executive Management Overview
DESCRIPTION: The Executive Management Overview Course is designed to provide an
executive level overview of applications of LANs in the Agency, and the issues raised
by their use.
CLASS SET**-- There is no limit on the class size for this course.
DURATION: The Management Overview Course requires 1/2 day.
-------
Local Ana Network Training
EQUIPMENT: No special equipment is required.
COURSE OUTLINE: The Management Overview Course will cover the following issues.
What is a LAN?
What can a LAN accomplish?
The Agency's policies on LANS.
Software licensing issues of LANs.
How to acquire a LAN
Personnel costs associated with a LAN.
Applications appropriate for a LAN.
CLIN4009* - LAN Application Developers
DESCRIPTION: LAN Application Developers Course is designed to provide personnel
responsible for developing applications within the agency with the information they
need to write applications that are compatible with the Agency's LANs.
CLASS SIZE: The «narimntn class size for this course is 20 students.
DURATION: The LAN Application Developers Course includes 1 day of lecture.
EQUIPMENT: No special equipment is required for this course.
COURSE OUTLINE: The LAN Application Developers Course will teach the following
skills.
EPA Policy, Standards, & Configurations
File Sharing Techniques
File and Data locking & unlocking on a LAN
Use of shared resources
Printing to LAN print spoolers
Issues involved in developing software for LANs.
Applications appropriate and available for a LAN.
CLIN4010x — National Program Managers
DESCRIPTION: National Program Managers Course is designed to provide personnel
responsible for managing EPA's national program with the information they need to
assess the impact of LAN's on their individual Programs.
CLASS $iy-tfr The tn«»itmim ^a« jize for this course is 20 students.
DURATION: The NDPD & Local Support Course includes 1 day of
lecture.
EQUIPMENT: No special equipment is required for this course,
COURSE OUTLINE: The National Program Managers Course wffl teach the following
concepts.
What is a LAN?
C3-5
-------
Volume I • LAN Design A Plannnlna
What can a LAN accomplish?
The Agency's policies on LANS.
Software licensing issues of LANs.
Issues involved in software development for LANs.
Applications appropriate and available for a LAN.
fV>mTTinnira tinny
-------
Appendix C.4
LOCAL AREA NETWORK SERVICES
• LAN INSTALLATION
The installation of some local area networks win require levels of expertise not readi-
ly available within the Agency. The following services are available through the SMA con-
tract on an as-needed basis to those sites which request the services.
The SMA contract provides a number of services on a cost basis. When purchasing
a service, you will need to work with SMA to agree on the number of hours and proper
labor mix. There are four categories of labor. These are:
Senior LAN Analyst: $146.4
-------
Volume I - LAN Deslan & Plannnlna
MAU via appropriate patch cable connections at the distribution rack, and run-
ning system diagnostics and other tests of the server and the network. Installa-
tion also includes appropriate labeling of the MAU and distribution panels.
An additional service which is included in the installation is a day of on- site train-
ing with the system for the LAN Administrator and his/her associate at the time
when server installation is completed. This activity shall include a hands-on walk-
through of network and server operations, management responsibilities,
demonstrations of spooler setup and bard disk backup operations, user and group
list management, the menu and command line utilities, and other functions which
the LAN administrator may be expected to perform.
4) Network bridge: Services include, but are not limited to, attaching the network
bridge processor and network interface cards to the rings to be connected, sys-
tem addressing and routing configuration, system operational verification, assis-
tance to the LAN Administrator in reconfiguring user profiles for access to
inter-ring resources, and training for the LAN Administrator in the configuration
and operation of the bridge, as appropriate.
5) Network communications gateway: Services include planning for and installa-
tion of the gateway server on the ring, and/or installation of the communications
card in the server, as appropriate; software installation and configuration; system
verification, including actual access to the remote EPA facilities; assistance to the
LAN Administrator in reconfiguring user profiles for access to the gateway and
installation of workstation programs; and training for the LAN Administrator in
the configuration and operation of the gateway.
6) Network console or workstation: Hardware services include installing the Net-
work Interconnect Card (NIC), if required; attaching the workstation or console
to the wall faceplate or MAU, as appropriate; connecting and labeling the remote
MAU and distribution panel; and testing the installation. Software configuration
services include installing the network shell on the workstation, configuring the
AUTOEXEC and other startup files appropriately for access to the network, ad-
ding the users' IDs to the network servers' users and group lists, and creating the
users' login profiles.
NETWORK EVALUATION
The SMA Contract provides support in planning, designing, and evaluating existing
and contemplated Local Area Networks in instances where local levels of manpower
and/or expertise are not available. The following services are provided on an as-needed
basis to those sites which request the services.
The following types of services are available:
1) Original Local Area Network planning and design: This service includes
analysis of requirements, determination that a LAN is the correct solution to the
requirements, assessments of existing facilities (including but not limited to
C4-2
-------
Local Aroa Network Services
wiring, personal computers, et cetera), and development of Agency standard
LAN plans including elements necessary at the pre-order phase. This activity wfll
typically result in a defined wiring plan and a basic Agency LAN plan.
The Contractor wfll conduct a configuration assessment which defines what ele-
ments wfll be required for the LAN, what exists at present, and what new com-
ponents wfll have to be acquired. As an adjunct, a detailed floor plan wfll be
prepared which depicts planned workstations, file and print servers, communica-
tions gateways, with attendant connectivity.
A materials list wfll be completed to identify all physical components of the LAN,
existing and to be acquired, and identification of the components including quan-
tities, estimated costs, and planned usage.
This activity wfll result in a recommendation of the LAN operating software con-
figuration, communications gateway software, a completed TSR, and other com-
ponents such as LAN versions of applications software.
Completed Rights Tables and Directory Lists will be set up as a preliminary plan
to control the network software usage permitted to each workstation/user.
The Contractor wfll conduct a briefing upon the conclusion of this planning ac-
tivity in which the findings, recommendations, and plan wfll be presented to the
Agency personnel requesting the services.
2) Initial evaluation of existing LAN: This service is to analyze and assess the
operation of an existing LAN. The evaluation can result in recommendations for
changes in the LAN such as the addition of file or print servers, addition of com-
munications gateways, wiring upgrade to higher grade cables, reconfiguration of
existing resources, etc. The Contractor wfll use whatever software and hardware
diagnostic products are necessary to determine the LAN's ability to meet the re-
quirements of the specific Agency LAN plan for the LAN being evaluated. The
LAN will be evaluated under nominal and peak load situations.
3) Anticipated and active problem analysis and resolution: SMA provides ad hoc
and blanket services to support problem determination and resolution. This can
include a range of required responses from "hot spots" where a functioning LAN
has ceased to operate correctly, to analysis necessary for assessment of a planned
increase in workload. An additional problem determination example could be
the isolation of defective or loose wiring connections and lines.
On-site personnel wfll be provided to perform diagnostics and network evalua-
tion to determine the cause or effect of network characteristics or changes. When
required, the Contractor wfll use software and hardware to measure network per-
formance characteristics to define potential or existing bottlenecks.
The results of this category of service wfll be a resolved problem situation, a
recommendation for LAN alterations which wfll result in improved LAN perfor-
mance, and optionally, upon request, a briefing presenting an assessment of the
problem and recommendations for hs resolution, or suggested methods for gain-
ing improvement to network performance.
C4-3
-------
Volume I - LAN Design A Planrmlng
NETWORK SUPPORT
This support consists of subscribing through SMA to Novell's telephone support and
accessing Novell's host computer facilities (e.g, for downloading system patches and bug
fixes). It is provided on an annual subscription basis to all EPA offices purchasing a local
area network from the SMA contract, as well as for the existing installed base of personal
computers already in local area networks within the Agency.
This service includes telephone access to assistance for installation, orientation,
operations, and day-to-day user questions. These may be concerning system configura-
tion, LAN performance optimization, maintenance, general utilization of the equipment
and software, and hardware and software problem determination and resolution.
Telephone access to this technical support is available continuously, with a maximum four
(4) hour response time.
If this subscription service is purchased, a man'mum of two (2) users may be iden-
tified as contacts for the network being supported. Additional user contacts may be added
for a system for an additional fee.
-------
Appendix D
REPRINT OF ARTICLE FROM "WIC CONNECTION11, JUNE, 1987
USER MODEMS NOW AVAILABLE
UNDER AGENCY CONTRACTS
By Bruch Almicb, National Data Processing Division
EPA recently awarded two contracts that will enable theAgency to procure Penril
Dataline 2400 and GDC Corporation Model 208B + modems. This article describes each
of these modems and outlines the procedures that must be followed to obtain them.
Pencil Datallnk 2400
The Penril Datalink 2400 modem is an inexpensive unit that operates with either an
asynchronous ASCII terminal or a personal computer. The modem is fully Hayes (AT
command set) compatible and can transmist/receive information at speeds ranging from
300 to 2400 baud. It can be quickly connected to a system using a standard RS232C inter-
face.
Before the contract was awarded, the modem was tested in the "originate" and
"answer" modes using both the Agency's personal computers and terminals. In addition,
the modem was subjected to a signiCcnat period of "rough handling" in the 6eld. The
modem passed with flying colors and the decision was made to make it available for pur-
chase.
Two important features that are built into the modem include:
• The ability to automatically sense the speed and "dialect" of the remote unit and
iwitch between 300,1200, and 2400 speeds of operation, and
• The ability to detect whether the remote modem is "speaking" MNP error cor-
rection level 3 and then automatically switch to a packetized error protection
mode of operation as defined in the MNP standard. (In EPA, MNP is supported
on the 2400 baud asynchronous dial-up rotaries at all major node sites (Regions,
NEIC, Cincinnati, Las Vegas, RTF, and W1Q on the National Data Communica-
tions System.)
O-i
-------
Volume 1 - LAN Design & Plarmnlna
This modem should be purchased by anyone (for $358) using an application where
300-1200-2400 baud asynchronous ASCII dial-up terminal access is desired and especial-
ly in cases where isolation from errors due to line noise in the MNP mode is required. The
ordering information is as follows:
Contract line Item Number 0007A
Description: 300-12002400 Baud
Async. Dial Modem
with MNP Option
(PenrflDatalink2400)
Contract Number 68-01-7356
Warranty: 1 year, return to factory
Technical Assistance: 1-800-638-6581 (US)
30V921-8603(DCArea)
Model 208B+
A second contract was established with the GDC Corporation to enable the procure-
ment of their Bell 208B compatible 4800 baud synchronous dial modem. The Model
208B + is priced at $723 and should be purchased by those who use dial-Remote Job Entry
(2780/3780/HASP/SNARJE) batch terminals or those who communicate with PCs and ter-
minals that have a "dial-3270" IBM full screen capability (e.&, PCs equipped with IR-
MACOM). The ordering information is as follows:
Contract Line Item Number: 0001A
Description: 4800 Baud Synchronous
Standalone Dial Modem,
Bell 208B Compatible
(GDC208B+)
Contract Number. 68-01-7355
Warranty: 1 year, return to factory
Technical Assistance: 1-800-243-1030
Procurement Guidelines
The Agency requires that a justification be written whenever the abovementioned
modems are purchased. The justification should include the following information:
• Names, telephone numbers, mailing addresses, and locations of the end users who
wfll use each of the modems ordered.
• Host(s) and applications to be accessed by each modem ordered.
• Paths to be used by each modem (e^. Tymnet, local dial at major node ate,
WATS, etc.) when host/applications are accessed.
Procurement requests, including the necessary justifications, should be funded and
forwarded to Donald Fulford, Director, National Data Processing Division (NDPD),
Research Triangle Park, NC for approval. The requests wfll be processed within 5 days of
receipt and forwarded to the contracts office that handles these contracts (Headquarters
PCMD, C/O: Ben Fulton). Hie requester wfll be contacted if there is a problem with ap-
proval; if no problems are encountered, Ben Fulton's office will issue a delivery order to
the requestor that wfll serve as the official document of purchase.
D-2
-------
Modem Contracts
Other Contracts Available
A number of other contracts are used to satisfy the requirements contained in Agen-
cy and user Telecommunications Service Requests (TSRs). These contracts enable the
Agency to procure the following equipment:
• Microcom AX9600C, a stand-alone 9600 baud asynchronous ASCII terminal dial
modem that meets the v29 standard. Cost $1,023.
NOTE: It will be necessary to provide this modem on both sides of the session
since there are currently none connected to the EPA National Data Communica-
tions Systems.
• The Codex 2260, a stand-alone 9600 baud synchronous dial modem that meets
the vJ2 standard. Cost $2,446. Again, provisions must be made to purchase
compatible modems on both sides of the session since there are none currently
connected to the National Data Communications Systems.
• Rack mount (host side) 300-1200-2400 baud asynchronous dial modems that are
compatible with the Penril 2400 and other Agency 300-1200-2400 baud modems.
Since they are intended for host/machine room applications, theTSR process is
required to ensure a proper and cost effective design.
• Hardwired limits distance modems for synchronous "metallic pair" use at dis-
tances of up to 5 miles and speeds of 300-9600 baud. TheTSR process is required
to ensure that proper design criteria are met as these modems are installed.
Combinations of rack mount units, stand-alone units, and other accessories are also
available including a 56 kilobit per second Channel Service Unit for high speed DDS ac-
cess. If user requirements are expressed or revealed during the planning phase of the TSR
process, this equipment will also be available.
If you have any questions about the small modem contracts, contact your ADP ser-
vice group, your local information center, RTP user support (FTS/6297862), or me
(FTS/629-3306; Comm: 919/541-3306; or E-Mail BALMICH).
-------
GLOSSARY
ACCESS
The ability to work with files. With NetWare, usually used in connection with files
stored on network disks. Various access rights may be assigned to users.
ACCESS RIGHTS
Qualifications on what a user is able to do with files in • directory. Examples are
Read-Write, or Read-Only Access Rights.
ADAPTER
A device mounted on a card which plugs into the motherboard for communicating
between the CPU and a peripheral
ANCESTOR DIRECTORY
Any directory level above some other specified directory level (a parent directory, a
grandparent directory, etc.).
APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE .
Programs that make computer hardware and systems software perform a useful
function; examples include accounting software, word processing software, and
spreadsheet software.
APPLICATIONS
A set of coded instructions that tells the computer how to perform specific tasks.
Application programs are not generally modified by users; they are used to generate
reports and data files. In EPA, three types of Application programs exist They are:
• Commercially available applications, such as Lotus 1-2-3, Wordstar, and
dBase Ell+.
• EPA specific applications, such as WASTELAN, which are designed to '
perform specific tasks within the Agency.
• User applications written in a higher level language such as dBase, to perform
specific tasks.
ARCHIVE
To back up, or store, data. Archiving preserves copies of files; if original files are
damaged or destroyed by some unusual circumstance (system failure, server disk or
controller damage, accidental erasure, etc.), important data is not permanently lost
Archiving a file is considered to be permanent storage of the data.
ASCII
The American Standard Code for Information Exchange is a system for representing
letters, numbers, and special control characters by a pattern of seven bits defining
128 codes. The first 32 are for control codes and the remainder for letters or
characters.
Glossary-1
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Planrnlng
ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS
A communications protocol used for low-speed communications, typically ranging
from 300 to 50,000 bits per second in bandwidth; commonly used with a modem to
communicate with a remote computer over telephone lines, or to tie terminals to a
computer in a multi-user system. See ALSO RS-232-C, SERIAL INTERFACE,
MODEM. The EPA E-Mail system uses asynchronous communications.
ASYNCHRONOUS GATEWAY
A server which provides workstations on a network access to a shared asynchronous
communications device, typically a modem or dataswitch connection. With
appropriate software, the gateway may also provide remote workstations access to
other network resources, such as printers and bard disk drives.
AUTOEXEC.BAT
The name of a batch file containing DOS commands. If this file exists in the root
directory, it is executed as soon as the operating system is loaded.
BACKUP
1. To copy files onto a second storage device so that they may be retrieved if the data
on the original source is accidentally destroyed.
2. A stored copy of ? file, to be used in case of a malfunction which causes a loss of
data in the original file. Backups are kept only for a short period of time, usually with
a rotating group of tapes.
BANDWIDTH
The capacity of a communications channel. Bandwidth is typically stated as bits per
second (bit/sec) or cycles per second (Hertz). Across a network, bandwidth indicates
the rate at which information can be passed.
BANNER
A one-page information sheet, printed as the first page of a printout A banner
identifies the printout's creator. Banner information also includes the filename, the
station number, and the print date.
BASEBAND
A communications method in which the information-bearing signal is placed directly
onto the cable in digital form. No translation is necessary for a baseband system at
the sending or receiving end, because the I/O of microcomputers are also digital
BATCH FILE
A set of instructions for the disk operating system (DOS) stored in a file on disk,
When invoked, the computer executes the commands in the file. Batch files end with
the extension '.BAT.'
BAUD RATE
A measure of the speed of data transfer, approximately equal to the number of bits
transmitted per second.
Glossary-2
-------
Glossary
BENCHMARK
Software run on a system to measure some aspect of system behavior, or
performance. Different systems can be compared by running the same benchmark
program on them.
BIOS
Basic Input/Output (I/O) System. The part of the disk operating system in each
workstation which performs the actual communication with input and output devices
such as printers, disks, keyboards, and consoles.
BISYNCHRONOUS
Binary synchronous. A protocol developed by IBM for data transmission which is
controlled by a clocking signal
BIT .
A binary digit either 0 or 1, indicating one of two states: off (0) or on (1).
BOOT
To load a computer's operating system into the memory of the computer.
BOOT DISK
A floppy diskette which contains the necessary system files.
BOOT UP
See BOOT.
BOOT WITHOUT FLOPPY
See REMOTE SYSTEM RESET.
BRIDGE
An active component that connects two identical networks and usually filters network
traffic so that only messages destined for another network are passed to it over the
bridge.
BROADBAND
A communications method characterized by a large bandwidth. The bandwidth is
usually split, or multiplexed, to provide multiple communications channels. A
broadband system users analog transmissions; thus a modem is required at the
lending and receiving ends to convert them again.
BUFFER
RAM (see RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY) set aside to hold information, such as
blocks of disk data or program output destined for a printer.
BUS
A network cable topology characterized by a single cable that runs past all the
workstations and servers, connecting to each of them either directly or through a
short drop cable. The ends of the bus are electrically terminated with resistors.
GIossary-3
-------
Volume I • LAN Design & Plannnlng
BYTE
Normally, the eight bits that represent a character or number in binary code.
CABLE
See TWISTED-PAIR CABLE and CO AXIAL CABLE.
CACHE
A collection of disk buffers managed by systems software to provide increased disk
performance. When applications need disk blocks that are already in the cache, they
can get them at fast RAM-access speeds rather than slower disk-access speeds.
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT
The Central Processing Unit (CPU) is the part of a computer that can do arithmetic
and logical operations, and is the component that runs computer programs.
CLUSTER CONTROLLER
A dedicated computer designed to handle information from a group, or cluster, of
terminals and connect that group to another computer, usually a mainframe.
COAXIAL CABLE
Type of cable commonly used in local area networks; consists of a center metal
conductor covered by two layers of insulator with a grounding shield between them.
Usually more expensive than twisted- pair cable, but with less signal loss and higher
noise immunity.
COLD BOOT
Reloading a computer's operating system, by turning the power to the computer off
and back on.
COMMAND
A user-entered instruction which specifies a computer operation to be performed.
COMMAND FORMAT
The proper way to type a command for entry, including any key words, spacing,
parameters, delimiters, or other special requirements.
COMMUNICATION
Sending data from one workstation and receiving the data at another workstation or
at a server.
COMMUNICATION MEDIUM
The wiring or other method used to physically transmit data impulses. Wiring may
be coaxial cable, or dual twisted pair cable. Communications media also include
non-wire type media such as fiber optics, infrared, and microwave.
CON
DOS reserved name for the keyboard and screen. For input, refers to the keyboard;
for output, refers to the screen.
Glossary-4
-------
Glossary
CONFIQ.SYS ^^.
Name of a file containing configuration parameters read when DOS is loaded.
CONFIGURATION
The definition of optional values. When referring to hardware, describes the
workstation components. When referring to software, specifies default values and
the environment for operating.
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION - the equipment to be used and the way it is to
be connected.
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION - • procedure performed to prepare a software
program for operation or define a workstation's resources to the file server.
CONNECTION NUMBER
A number assigned to any workstation which logs in to a file server, it may be a
different number each time a station logs in. On a NetWare 286 network, the
operating system assigns connection numbers starting at 1 and counting upwards to
100. Whenever a station logs out and a number becomes free, the number is placed
back in the pool of available numbers. The server operating system uses the station's
connection number to control the station's communication with other stations. You
can find out your connection number by executing the WHOAMI or USERLIST
command line utility.
CONSOLE
The display screen and keyboard from which you control the file server. The console
allows users to issue console commands to control the file server's resources.
COPY PROTECTION
Method by which software vendors control the number of working copies that can be
made form the diskettes they distribute containing their software.
CPU •
See CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT.
CRASH (CRASHED)
A «iang term which means hardware or software has stopped functioning properly.
CSMA/CD .......
Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection is a network protocol in which
every network node transmits messages as soon as it needs to and finds the network
cable is quiet A collision occurs if two nodes transmit at the same time. Collisions
•re detected and the transmission is resent after a delay of variable length.
DATA FILE
A file containing information. Usually generated by an application program.
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
An application program that lets information be stored so that it can be easfly
retrieved, modified, sorted, and printed out.
Glossary-5
-------
Volume I • LAN Design & Plannnlng
DATA INTEGRITY
The condition in which data is uncorrupted and usable.
DEDICATED SERVER
Server on a network that functions solely as a server, as opposed to a non-dedicated
server that can also be used as a workstation,
DEFAULT
A value or option assumed by a computer or a network program, when no other value
is specified.
DEFAULT DRIVE
The drive currently in use by a workstation. The drive prompt (A, C, etc.) identifies
the default drive letter.
DEFAULT SERVER
The server to which your default drive is mapped.
DESTINATION
The network workstation, directory, or drive to which data is sent (as opposed to the
Source").
DIRECTORY
Used to organize file storage under MS-DOS and on the file server. A disk directory
can contain files and other directories, sometimes referred to as subdirectories.
DIRECTORY NAME
One or more parameters used to designate a directory which holds files you wish to
work with. A full network directory name lists the name of the to "directory." A full
network directory name lists the name of the file server, the name of the volume, and
the name of each directory leading down to the directory you want to access.
DISABLE
To turn off or prevent certain events from occurring in a processing unit (such as a
network communications card). Actions may be disabled by several means (such as
setting a switch or a jumper, or issuing a command).
DISKDRIVE
A computer hardware device that stores programs and data files. The information
that is stored persists when power to the computer is shut off.
DISK OPERATING SYSTEM (DOS)
Systems software such as MS-DOS or PC-DOS that controls a computer's hardware
and provides higher-level functions so that applications software can access disk
drives, video display, and other input and output devices.
DISKETTE
A removable medium used in a floppy disk drive to store programs and data files.
Also called floppy disk.
Glossary-^
-------
Glossary
DISKLESS WORKSTATION
Workstation node with no floppy or hard disk drives; must use a network file or disk
server for all long-term data storage.
DOS
See DISK OPERATING SYSTEM @HEAD1 - EDITOR
An application program used to enter and revise documents or program listings.
ELECTRONIC CALENDAR
Network applications software that lets you keep track of daily appointments and
schedule meetings in coordination with other network user's calendars.
EMULATION
The duplication of the functional capabilities of one device by another device.
ENABLE
To turn on, or place in a state which will allow certain events to occur in a processing
unit (such as a network communications card). Actions are usually enabled by issuing
a command or setting a switch or jumper.
ENTRY FORMAT
See COMMAND FORMAT.
ETHERNET
A baseband local area network developed by Digital Equipment Corp., Intel Corp.,
and Xerox Corp. Ethernet uses the CSMA/CD protocol and has a bandwidth of 10
megabits (that is, 10 million bits) per second.
EXPANSION CARD
A printed circuit card that plugs into an expansion slot in an IBM PC family computer
to provide additional functionality, such as a connection to the network. •*
EXPANSION SLOT
Space in an IBM PC family computer that accepts an expansion card that adds more
capability to the PC Network transceiver cards are one example of an expansion
card.
FDC
See FEDERAL DATA CORPORATION.
FEDERAL DATA CORPORATION (FDC)
The contractor which is providing personal computers, peripherals, services, and
training to the Agency.
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Gable using light instead of electricity to transfer information; used in some networks,
has high bandwidth, high immunity to noise. Generally more expensive than coaxial
cable or twisted- pair.
Glossary-7
-------
Volume I - LW Design & Plannnlng
FIELD
A block of data within a database record, usually specifying a specific item.
FILE
A collection of related information stored as one unit (under a filename). A file may
contain many separate records (for example, the addresses of all customers). It may
also be a continuous text record (for example, a letter). A file may be stored on bard
disk or floppy disk, and it may be loaded from such permanent storage devices into
the dynamic memory of a workstation, to be viewed or changed.
RLE ALLOCATION TABLE (FAT)
The table on a disk by which DOS allocates sectors of the disk to files.
FILE LOCKING
See LOCKING.
RLE SERVER
A device which is used to control network activity. The file server may be used to
manage file sharing and system security, coordinate station-to-station
communications, and control shareable resources such as disk drives and printers.
On a NetWare/86 or 286 network, the file server is a personal computer which is
loaded with the NetWare Operating System.
FILE SHARING
Feature of most networks that allows a single file to be opened and accessed by more
than one workstation at a time. Applications software must use the appropriate locks
(see also LOCKING) for this feature to work properly.
FIRMWARE
Programmed instructions stored in a silicon wafer chip, attached to a circuit board.
FIXED DISK
See HARD DISK.
FLAG
A mechanism defining access privileges to network directories or files. In NetWare,
possible flag values are Shareable or Non- Shareable, and Read-Only or Read-Write.
FLOPPY DISK
See DISKETTE.
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
Computer hardware used to store programs and data files on diskettes. IBM PC
floppy disks usually hold 360 thousand bytes (that is, 360 kilobytes) of information.
FLOPPYLESS BOOT
See REMOTE SYSTEM RESET.
GIossary-8
-------
' Glossary
FORMAT
(noun) The logical and/or physical arrangement of tracks and sectors on a floppy
diskette or a hard disk. To be usable, a disk must be formatted so that the tracks and
sectors are laid out in a manner compatible with the operating system in use.
(yob - to format a auk) To prepare a disk or diskette to accept data.
FRAME
The token, labeling information, and data transmitted at one time on a token-ring
network.
GATEWAY
A server that connects two dissimilar networks so messages can be passed back and
forth; contains network systems software to perform varying levels of translation on
the traffic between the two networks. An example is the connection of a token-ring
LAN to the Agency's IBM 3090 mainframe computer through an SNA
communications "gateway."
GROUP ACCESS
A method of granting rights to several users so they may access files. The LAN
Administrator creates a group and defines file access rights for the group. The
administrator may then make several users members of the group. Any user who is
made a member of the group has file access rights equal to those granted to the group.
HARD COPY
A paper printout (It is "hard" because it can actually be held, as opposed to a screen
display.)
HARD DISK
A disk drive that stores information on a rapidly spinning hard planer, which provides
fast access and dense storage; usually holds at least 10 million bytes (that is, 10
megabytes) of data. See also DISK DRIVE.
HARDWARE
Physical equipment The electronic and mechanical components of a network, such
as the personal computers, network communications cards, cables, cable connectors,
hub devices, floppy disk drives, and hard disk drives.
HOME DIRECTORY
The directory to which a user's first network drive is mapped when the user logs in
to a file server. The network drive is mapped by the user's existing login script When
setting up the network, the LAN Administrator usually sets up a login script for each
user and thus initially assigns the home directory. The user may change this directory
using the Login Script option under the User Information menu in the SYSCON
menu utility.
HOST COMPUTER
A machine that provides the processing power for attached or remote terminals. A
host computer is usually a mainframe or minicomputer.
Glossary-9
-------
Volume I- LAN Design A Plannnlng
IEEE 802
The Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers standards committee number
802 is responsible for developing networking standards. The 8023 subcommittee
works on a standard derived from Ethernet, 802.4 is based on the ARCnet
token-passing bus, and 8015 is used in the IBM Token-Ring Network.
INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O)
The process of routing data to and from the computer's motherboard or CPU.
INTERFACE
(yob) To make two devices capable of communicating. Used most often to refer to
the design of hardware and software which allows network components to be
connected and information to be transferred.
(noun) A specific hardware or software connection.
INTERNETWORK
Two or more networks (of the same or different hardware types) connected by means
of special bridge hardware and software. You may find that an internetwork is
necessary if you run out of workstation slots on one network. When you buy a second
network, you may want to connect the two networks so that users on either network
can use the resources (printers, disk drives, etc.) of either network.
INTERRUPT
A signal sent to the CPU which breaks the execution of a program.
ISO
The International Standards Organization, responsible for the OSI network model.
Kb: KILOBYTE
A unit of measure for memory or disk storage capacity. Two to the tenth power, or
1024 in decimal. (Personal computer workstations on a NetWare network should
have a minimum memory capacity of 192Kb. A floppy diskette formatted for
MS-DOS 2JC can allow storage of 362Kb of data.)
LAN
See LOCAL AREA NETWORK.
LAN ADMINISTRATOR
Person responsible for an aspects of the network implementation, including
installation and maintenance work, configuring the network, allocating resources,
and granting data-access privileges to network users.
LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)
A system that connects computers together within a restricted geographical area,
usually a mfle or so, to allow sharing of information and hardware resources.
Glossary-10
-------
Glossary
LOCKING
Function provided by network systems software to control access to a single file by
more than one network user. In its most general implementation, a lock may be used
to control any network resource, not just a file.
LOGIN
To perform the process of identifying yourself to the network systems software to
lain access to network resources. With Netware, performed by typing
"LOGIN Vour user name* "password*."
LOGOFF
To execute the process of telling the network systems software that you are finished
using the network for now, usually consists of typing a command such as LOGOFF.
LOSS
Refers to the amount by which a signal is attenuated over a certain distance.
Generally, more expensive cable has a lower rate of loss.
MAINFRAME COMPUTER
A very large computer system often used to process information for a
medium-to-large corporation, or for scientific computations requiring very fast
CPUs. The Agency's IBM 3090 at RTF and the Regional LMFs (IBM 4381s) are
mainframe computers.
MAINFRAME UNK
Connection from a PC or a LAN to a mainframe computer to support message and
file transfer between them; may also support emulation of a terminal and submission
of work to be processed on the mainframe.
Mb: MEGABYTE
A unit of measure for memory or disk storage capacity. Two to the twentieth power
(1,048,576 in decimal).
MACRO
A series of keystrokes or commands that are defined as a single key or mnemonic
abbreviation.
MAINFRAME
A large computer capable of supporting many users simultaneously.
MAP or MAPPING
Setting any NetWare logical drive to point to a chosen directory (on a particular
volume of a particular file server). This is done with the MAP command line utility.
MAU
See MULTISTATION ACCESS UNIT.
MEGABYTE (Mb)
A unit of measure roughly equivalent to a million bytes.
Glossary-11
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Plannnlna
MEMORY
One of the essential components of a computer's central processing unit
Information and programs are actively processed in memory, which includes both
ROM (Read Only Memory, which is permanent memory) and RAM (Random
Access Memory, which is temporary memory, the contents of which are modified as
needed).
MEMORY-RESIDENT
A program that stays in memory while other programs are executed. Specific keys
usually invoke the resident program from within other applications.
MENU
A screen which allows access to the available functions within an application.
MICROCOMPUTER
A small computer system, usually dedicated to a specific task or used by a single
person; also called a personal computer, or PC IBM PC family computers, Epson
equity m+, and Apple Macintoshes are microcomputers.
MICROPROCESSOR
A silicon wafer with embedded circuitry capable of processing information.
MINICOMPUTER
A medium-size computer often used as a multi-user time- sharing system, for
industrial process control, or as a server in a network. The Agency's Primes and
VAXes are minicomputers. ^
MODEM
A device (the term abbreviates modulator/demodulator) that translates serial data
into tones that can be transmitted over a voice communications medium such as a
phone line and translated back into serial data by another modem at the other end
of the line; allows information exchange between two computers via asynchronous
communications.
MONITOR
In hardware, the screen connected to a computer.
In NetWare software, the file server console control program used to monitor the
flow of information between the file server and network users.
MOTHERBOARD
The main circuit board of a computer. Other boards, or cards, may be plugged into
the motherboard to expand the runctions of the system
MS-DOS
Microsoft's disk operating system, a systems software package that provides basic
control of a computer's hardware. Runs on the IBM PC and compatible computers.
Glossary-12
-------
Glossary
MULTIFUNCTION CARD
Printed circuit card containing more than one function to expand the capabilities of
a microcomputer. For example, it may contain RAM (random access memory) and
a network interlace.
MULTIPLEX
To support simultaneous multiple transmissions on 8 single medium.
MULTI-TASK
The concurrent handling of multiple jobs by a single CPU. On a file server, it usually
means that a foreground partition is being used as a workstation.
MULTI-SERVER NETWORK
A single network which has two or more file servers. On a multi-server network,
users may access files from any server to which they are attached (Two or more
multi-server networks could be connected to make an internetwork.)
MULTISTATION ACCESS UNIT (MAU)
A passive wiring concentrator for the star-wired token-ring network. Each MAU has
connectors for eight attaching devices (workstations, servers, and gateways) to gain
access to the network ring, and it is generally located in a wiring closet or at a central
location within an office. Multiple MAUs are linked together to allow more than
eight devices to be attached to the ring.
MULTI-USER
Used to describe operating systems that allow many users (at separate workstations)
to share a system's processing power, and perhaps to also share data and peripherals
(printers, disks, etc.). The NetWare Operating System is a multi-user system.
NETBIOS
ISO session-level interface (short for Network Basic Input Output System) to the
IBM PC Network and the IBM Token-Ring Network; is becoming a de facto standard
adapted by other computer vendors and programmed to by network applications
software vendors.
NetWare
Networking products produced by Novell, Inc. The EPA standard network operating
system for LANs connecting MS-DOS computers is Novell Advanced Netware/286.
NetWare OPERATING SYSTEM
The network operating system produced by Novell, Inc.
NetWare REMOTE
NetWare software which, when combined with appropriate hardware, allows the
transmission and receipt of network data over telephone lines, at distances greater
than allowed over standard network communication mediums.
GlossarY-13
-------
Volume I - LAN Desfan A Ptannnlna
NetWare SHELL
NetWare software which is loaded into the memory of each workstation and which
•shells: DOS to enable the workstation to communicate with the NetWare file server.
The NetWare shell intercepts workstation requests before they reach DOS and
reroutes network requests to a NetWare file server and passes local requests on to
DOS. The shell allows different types of workstations to use NetWare,
NETWORK
See LOCAL AREA NETWORK and WIDE AREA NETWORK.
NETWORK ARCHITECTURE
The technical design of a network; usually refers to the network's topology, protocol,
and workstation-server relationship (peer-to-peer or master-slave).
NETWORK COMMUNICATION
Data transmission between network stations. Requests for services and data are
passed from one network station to another or to a server through a communication
medium.
NETWORK CONSOLE
See CONSOLE.
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD (NIC)
A printed circuit card that provides an electrical interface between a network cable
and a workstation or server. May also contain a microprocessor and network systems
software that provides a higher- level interface to the network, usually no higher than
the ISO session layer.
NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEM
The software that permits applications to execute over the network. Novell
Advanced Netware/286 is the EPA standard operating system for MS-DOS
compatible computer LANs.
NIC
See NETWORK INTERFACE CARD.
NODE
A device connected to a network cable; usually refers to a workstation or server, but
occasionally refers to a repeater or a passive network junction box.
NOISE
Interference with an electrical signal; may come from other electrical equipment such
as fluorescent light fixtures or motors. Coaxial cable generally has greater noise
immunity than twisted-pair.
NON-DEDICATED SERVER
A file server that simultaneously runs the network operating system, and is available
as a workstation.
Glossary-14
-------
Glossary
NON-SHAREABLE
A file that cannot be used by more than one person at a time.
OFF-SITE
With regard to the IAN and DTP training courses offered by SMA, an "off-site"
course u one which is taught at an SMA-provided site, and which uses SMA
computing resources. See also ON-SITE.
ON-SITE
With regard to the LAN and DTP training courses offered by SMA, an •on-site"
course is one which is taught on government property or at a government-provided
cite, and which uses government computing resources. See also OFF-SITE.
OPERATING SYSTEM
The most important piece of software. It controls the execution of all other programs.
OPTICAL FIBER
See FIBER OPTIC CABLE.
OSI MODEL
The Open Systems Interconnect (OSI) model, a seven-layer model developed by the
International Standards Organization and used to describe network systems
architecture.
PARALLEL INTERFACE
Hardware commonly used to connect printers to personal computers, also called a
Centronics-compatible port or a parallel port
PARAMETER
An item which may be specified by a user as part of a command format Example
parameters are a drive (local or network), a directory, and a filename. -•
PARENT DIRECTORY
The directory immediately above another directory. For example,
SYSACCOUNT\R£CEIVE is a subdirectory of (part of) the directory
SYSiACCOUNT. Thus, directory SYSzACCOUNT is the parent of directory
SYS:ACCOUNT\R£CEIVE.
PASSWORD PROTECTION
A method of limiting login access to a network file server by requiring users to enter
a password. Unless the password is entered correctly, access to the server will be
denied.
PATCH CABLE
A cable with plugs used to connect PC workstations with the LAN cable. Can be easily
moved and reconnected
Glossary-15
-------
Vo/ume I • LAN Design & P/annn/ng
PEER-TO-PEER SYSTEM
Network architecture in which all network nodes have equal status and capabilities
in controlling the network bus and communicating to each other. In a peer-to-peer
system, a network node can communicated directly with another node, without going
through an intermediate controlling node.
PERIPHERAL
A device connected to and controlled by a computer, such as a disk drive, printer, or
modem,
PHYSICAL CONNECTION LAYOUT
See TOPOLOGY.
POLLING
A method of regularly checking the status of attached devices.
PORT
Hardware Connectors which allow two devices to be cable together so that they can
communicate. For example, when someone refers to a parallel printer port they
mean a connector to which a parallel printer may be attached.
Software A memory address which is used for purposes of transferring information.
PRINT QUEUE
A list of files waiting to be printed containing output from various network users.
Hie print server software manages this file queue. See also PRINT SPOOLING.
PRINT SERVER
Network server that lets workstations access one or more shared printers; usually
provides print spooling as well as sharing.
PRINT SPOOLING
Method of accepting print output from applications programs as fast as they can
generate it, saving the output in memory or on disk, and sending it to the printer as
last as it can print it Also called print buffering.
PRINTER
A computer hardware device that prints information sent by the computer onto paper
(the printout is also called hard copy).
PRIVATE STORAGE
Network disk or file storage that can be accessed only by a single user.
PROFILE
A file which contains specifications, usually default values, for an application
program.
PROGRAM
See SOFTWARE.
Glossary-16
-------
Glossary
PROMPT
A character or message (from the software) which appears on the display screen and
requires a user response. For example, the drive prompt "D>" and a response
prompt "type H for Help."
PROTOCOL
Method followed by network hardware and systems software to transmit data over
the network. Governs the order in which things happen to ensure accurate and
orderly information transfer. See also TOKEN-PASSING and CSMA/CD.
PUBUC ACCESS
Giving all users access to a particular directory. For example, all users must be given
access to utilities (so that they can execute NetWare command line utilities).
NetWare utilities are usually placed in a directory names SYSiPUBUC and then all
/ users are given access to the directory.
PUBUC NETWORK
A common-carrier network accessed via the phone system or leased lines to cover a
wide geographical area. See also WIDE AREA NETWORK.
PUBUC STORAGE
Network disk or file storage that can be accessed by more than one user, often by any
network user.
QUEUE
To temporarily keep track of the order in which a server's data handling requests are
received, so that the requests may be processed in the same order as received when
the server processor becomes available. An example is the queue which stores print
jobs on a printer.
RAM DISK [
Portion of a computer's memory set aside along with some systems software to
manage it so that it emulates a disk drive. Data can be accessed from a RAM disk
much faster than from a floppy disk, and usually even faster than from a hard disk.
RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM)
Storage within a computer that bold programs and data. Any individual storage
location can be directly accessed by the CPU.
READ
When one device gets data from another. For example, your computer may transfer
data from a bard disk drive into its memory. The computer thus Treads" data from
the hard disk.
READ-ONLY STORAGE
Network disk or file storage that can be read but not written to, modified, or deleted.
READ/WRITE STORAGE
Network disk or file storage that can be read and modified, and usually also deleted.
Glossary-17
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Plannnlng
RECORD
A set of information that forms a single entry within a data base file.
RECORD LOCK
A data protection mechanism preventing more than on user to simultaneously access
the same record in a data base file.
REMOTE
A connection which allows data to be sent and received across great distances, using
telephone lines or some other available ™»«™
REMOTE SYSTEM RESET
A feature which allows auser to boot a workstation on the LAN without using a floppy .<
diskette.
REPEATER
An active network connection component that boosts the electrical signal so that
cable of greater length can be used.
RESTORE *
To copy archived or backed up data back to network directories. •>
RIGHTS
Privileges which are granted (or not granted) in order to control how users may work ,
with files within a given directory. For example, you must have the proper rights
before you may read a file, delete a file, or modify a file. There are eight rights; each
of the rights can be specified for any user or user group or any directory.
RING
A loop of cable with workstations and servers connected to it; similar to a bus but
with the ends tied together instead of terminated.
ROM
Read-Only Memory. An integrated circuit used for storing frequently used computer
instructions and data. Also referred to as an 1C" or "ROM chip." ROM is permanent
memory: data is not erased from ROM when the electricity is turned off.
ROOT DIRECTORY
The logical directory at the top of the directory structure.
RS-232C
Standard low-level protocol used by most •synchronous communications devices;
alcn ipAlfA serial
SCROLLING
Moving the contents of a display screen up or down (often, arrow keys are used to
scroll).
Glossary-18
-------
Glossary
SEARCH DRIVE
A NetWare mechanism permitting files to be accessed from non-specified drives.
Similar to the DOS PATH command.
SECURITY
That part of a network's systems software dedicated to preventing unauthorized
access to programs and data stored on the network. In most cases, users must supply
a password to prove their identity, and once their identity is confirmed the network
systems software allows them to access to a prearranged subset of the network's
resources.
SENIOR INFORMATION RESOURCE MANAGEMENT OFFICIAL (SIRMO)
This official is responsible for the implementation of all computing resources within
an organization, including personal computers and LANs. As such, be or she is the
first authority in the approval chain for a LAN.
SERIAL INTERFACE
Computer hardware that provides an RS-232C standard interface to connect devices
such as modems, printers, and plotters to personal computers. Some low-speed
LANs are based on serial interfaces. See also ASYNCHRONOUS
COMMUNICATIONS and RS-232C
SERVER
A computer on a network that provides a resource to workstations connected to the
network. Typical resources include printers, disk drives, electronic mail, and
connections to other networks. - ,
SERVER SOFTWARE
Networking systems software that runs on a server and makes its resources available
to network workstations. Server software controls the sharing of a single server
resource, such as a printer, by multiple network users.
SHAREABLE
A directory or file that can be used simultaneously by more than one person.
SHELL
A program that runs in each network workstation, intercepting calls to the operating
system, and routing them either out to the file server operating system, or through to
DOS on the local workstation.
See NetWare SHELL
SINGLE-USER SOFTWARE
Programs written for a single-user machine, such as a non-networked PC; may
require modification to work properly on a network - almost certainly requires
modification to allow more than one user to run the program at the same time cuing
the I"*171? data file.
SIRMO
See SENIOR INFORMATION RESOURCE MANAGEMENT OFFICIAL*
Glossary-19
-------
Volume I - LAN Design S Pltnnnlng
SITE LICENSING
Method of licensing software for use by everyone at a certain site for a single fixed
fee (as opposed to requiring that each user have a license for his or her individual
copy of the software).
SOFTWARE
Computer programs. A set of stored instructions and procedures that can be recalled
as needed tor the computer processor to execute. (Contrast with "hardware.")
SMA
See SYSTEM MANAGEMENT AMERICAN.
SNA
IBM's System Network Architecture; covers a wide range of proprietary
communications hardware and software. It is most often associated with systems
used to connect large numbers of terminals through duster controllers to mainframe
computers. See also GATEWAY.
SPOOUNG
See PRINT SPOOUNG.
SPREADSHEET
A numerical modeling tool that permits data to be inserted into rows and columns
and manipulated according to formulas.
STAND-ALONE
An operating mode in which a PC is not attached to a network.
STAR
A network topology with a central hub and radiating spokes. The hub is usually a
server or a gateway or bridge, and workstations are at the ends of the spokes.
Multi-user systems typically use star cabling configurations, with the computer at the
hub and terminals at the ends of the spokes.
STATION
An individual persona] computer connected within a network by a Network Interface
Card (NIC) and some communication medium.
STATION NUMBER
See CONNECTION NUMBER.
SUBDIRECTORY
A directory is a subdirectory only in relation to an ancestor directory.
SUPERVISOR
The login name assigned special privileges and access rights on the network file
server. On EPA networks, the LAN Administrator will be the only person with
Supervisor privileges. . - -
Glossary-20
-------
Glossary
SYNCHRONOUS
A transmission method controlled by a clock pulse and acted on by the sender and
receiver.
SYS:
The root directory and default volume name used by NetWare.
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT AMERICAN (SMA)
The contractor which is providing Local Area Network and Desktop Publishing
components and services to the Agency.
SYSTEMS SOFTWARE '
Software that controls computer hardware and provides a set of functions for
applications software to use so that the computer hardware does not have to be
programmed directly.
TAPE DRIVE
Device that stores data on magnetic tapes (usually on reels or in cartridges).
Frequently used to back up hard disk storage so that data can be restored if the hard
disk copy is damaged.
TEMPLATE
A file formatted for use with an application for a specific function.
TERMINAL
Video display and keyboard combination that lets you type information into a
computer and see computer output on the screen.
TIME-SHARING
System in which more than one terminal user shares a single computer, its resources
being devoted to each use in turn for very brief intervals.
TOKEN-PASSING
Network protocol in which traffic passes from one node to the other. Each node
removes messages intended for it and adds any new messages. The maximum time
required to send a message between any two nodes can be guaranteed.
TOPOLOGY
The layout of the connecting cable in a network. See also BUS, RING, AND STAR.
TRANSACTION
A special method of implementing the read-modify- write cycle used to change
shareable files. The three operations are performed as one indivisible operation in
order to ensure that multiple users may work on the same file without file
contamination. The NetWare Operating System supports transactions as one means
of operating on shareable files.
Glossary-21
-------
Volume I - LAN Design & Plannnlng
TREE
Network topology with a single master node at the root and with every other node
having a single father node and one or more son nodes. Each node's father is the
node closer to the root or the root itself, and each node's sons are any nodes
connected to it and further away form the root There are no loops in this connection
scheme.
TWISTED-PAIR CABLE
Type of cable commonly used in local area networks. Consists of two insulated wires
twisted together, sometimes surrounded by a grounding shield, and covered with an
insulating sleeve. Usually less expensive than coaxial cable, but with a higher degree
of signal loss and lower noise immunity.
TYPE 1 CABLE
A specification written by IBM which defines the recommended wire for use with its
token-ring network. Type 1 cable consists of two individually-shielded twisted pairs
of 22 AWG solid copper wire encased in an outer shielding and jacket. The jacket
may be PVC or teflon, depending on requirements. See also TYPE 2 CABLE.
TYPE 2 CABLE
A specification written by IBM which defines a recommended wire for use with its
token-ring network. Type 2 cable consists of Type 1 cable with 4 additional twisted
pairs of voice-grade wire surrounding the outer shield. Its intended use is to provide
a single cable for both data and voice communications to a workstation. The cable
is available from numerous manufacturers. See TYPE 1 CABLE.
TYPE 3 CABLE
A specification written by IBM which defines an acceptable wire for use with its
token-ring network. Type 3 cable consists of two unshielded twisted pairs of 26 AWG
solid copper wire. This is the type wire normally found in telephone wiring harnesses.
Although token-ring networks may be run over it, there are numerous limitations
which apply when it is used. See also TYPE 1 CABLE.
UNSHARED RLE
See UNSHARED STORAGE.
UNSHARED STORAGE
Network disk or file storage that can be accessed only by a single user si a time.
USER
Someone who uses a computer - typically a workstation, in the context of this book.
USER ACCOUNT
Collection of network use privileges granted to an individual User accounts typically
have user names and passwords associated with them that must be provided to gain
access to the authorized network resources.
Clossary-22
-------
Glossary
USER NAME
Name provided by workstation users to identify themselves to the network systems
software.
USER PROFILE
Information about the privileges and preferences of a network user, may include such
particulars as volumes that the user can access and batch programs to run when the
user first logs on to the network.
UTILITIES
Software used to perform some function that is ancillary to the main problem-solving
application of the computer. For example, the MS-DOS FORMAT program that
prepares floppy disks for use is a utility program.
VIRTUAL DISK
See RAM DISK.
VOLUME
A portion of a disk or files server's storage that can be treated as a unit for purposes
of security; for designating it shared or unshared, or read/write or read-only; and for
associating it with a workstation's MS-DOS drive letter.
WARM BOOT
A complete reload of a "warm" computer's operating system through use of the system
reset keys on the keyboard. (The computer is "warm" at the start because the
electricity is on.)
WIDE AREA NETWORK
A system for connecting computers together over a large geographical area so that
they can share information and hardware resources. May span the globe using
satellite, microwave, and telephone ^nin.
WINCHESTER DISK
See HARD DISK.
WORD PROCESSOR
An application program that allows creation and editing of text files.
WORKSTATION
A computer on a network used primarily to run applications software that may or
may not access network resources. Typically has a video display screen and keyboard
so a person can interact with it Workstations on IBM PC local area networks are
IBM PC family computers or compatibles.
WORKSTATION NUMBER
See CONNECTION NUMBER.
GIossary-23
-------
Volume I • LAN Des/gn & Plannnlna
WORKSTATION SOFTWARE
Systems and applications software that runs on a workstation. Includes the software
that normally runs on a non-networked computer, plus the software that lets the
workstation access the network's resources.
WRITE
To record data on a bard disk, floppy diskette, or some other permanent storage
device.
X25
X25 is an international data communications standard which defines the procedures
for the exchange of data between a user device and a network node in a
packet-switched network. It also establishes the procedures for two packet-mode
devices to communicate with each other through the network.
In EPA, X25 is used for file transfer within (but not between) the following
architectures:
• Agency-standard Prime office automation systems
• Agency-standard VAX laboratory (ORD) systems
X25 is also used for terminal access from any ASCII terminal to any of the following
agency systems through the EPA national network:
• Agency-standard Prime office automation systems
• Agency-standard VAX laboratory (ORD) systems
• The Agency's elctronic mail ("Email") system at Dialcom Corp.
• Line-mode access to the EPA IBM-SNA network including all Regional 4381
Logical Mainframes and NCC 3090 systems, VIA "NPSI," IBM's X^5 "NCP
Packet Switching Interface".
GIossary-24
-------
BIBLIOGRAPHY
A. GENERAL REFERENCES
L Archer, Rowland, The Practical Guide to Local Ana Networks, Osborne/McGraw-Hffl,
Berkeley, California, 1986.
2. Feltman, Charles, "Personal Computers & Organizational Productivity,* Proceedings,
LOCAL NET84, San Diego, CA, October 1984.
3. Flint, David, The Selection of a Local Communications Network,* Proceedings,
LOCAL NET84, London. UK, March 1983.
4. McDonnel, Jerry, "Broadband or Baseband: CSMA/CD or Token, What's the Dif-
ference?" Proceedings, LOCAL NET84, San Diego, CA, October 1984.
5. Omidyar, Dr. C Guy, and Mohan K. Malhotra, Trends and Issues in Local Area Net-
works," Proceedings of the Fiber Optic Communications and Local Area Net-
works Exposition, September 1984.
6. Schneidwind, Norman F., Interconnecting Local Networks to Long Distance Net-
works," Computer, IEEE Computer Society, VoL 16, No. 9, September 1983.
7. Stalling*, William, Local Networks, An Introduction, Macmfllan. New York, 1984.
8. Thurber, Kenneth Jn "Local Network Selection Criteria," Proceedings of LOCAL
NET84, San Diego, CA, October 1984.
B. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK DOCUMENTS
(Reprinted by permission from IBM)
GA27-3677 IBM TOKEN-RING LOCAL AREA NETWORK INTRODUCTION AND PLAN-
NING GUIDE
This publication Is intended for persons who wfll plan for the installation of theTRN LAN.
It can be used for buildings that have already been wired for the IBM cabling system and
buildings for which the IBM cabling system is planned.
QA27-3678 IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK INSTALLATION GUIDE
This publication Is intended for network planners, administrators and hardware installers.
It explains the installation and cabling of IBM 8228 Multistation Access Units, IBM 8218
Copper Repeaters and IBM 8219 Optical Fiber Repeaters.
Bibliography-1
-------
Volume / • LAN Design 6 Planrmlna
GA27-3748 IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
This publication provides information helpful to an administrator of a TRN in activities
involving software and hardware planning, installation, network problem resolution, and
user education and assistance. This publication also can be used by planners, system
programmers, consultants and customer assist groups,
SY27-0280 IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK PROBLEM DETERMINATION GUIDE .
Contains instructions for using the IBM token ring network ring diagnostics.
SY27-0280 IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK PROBLEM DETERMINATION KIT
The kit consists of a binder and the publication. This publication is intended for those who ''
must maintain their network, and who are responsible for the isolation and resolution of
network problems. It is designed to be used with the IBM TRN diagnostic.
GA27-3714 IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK TELEPHONE TWISTED-PAIR MEDIA
GUIDE
This publication describes bow to plan and install a TRN that uses TTP media to connect
Attaching devices to a network. It is intended for executive management, network project '
planners, consultants and designer/installers.
GA27-374T IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK OPTICAL FIBER CABLE OPTIONS
This publication is written for the person who will plan for the use of optical fiber cables
with the Token-Ring Network. Jt describes integrating several types of previously installed
optical fiber cables into a Token-Ring Network. The cables described include 3044 Trunk
Cables, ROLM CBX Trunk Cables, and AT&T PDS Trunk Cables, among others. This
publication contains a test procedure for determining th« transmission quality of optical
fiber cables,
SC23-0892 IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER NETWORK 3270 EMULATION PROGRAM
APPLICATION PROGRAMMING INTERFACE AND HOST REFERENCE GUIDE
This publication introduces and defines the correct procedures for using the PC 3270
Emulation Applications Programming Interface and serves as a reference for PC 3270
Emulation Program host personnel who provide programming support for PC 3270 Emula-
tion Program users.
SC30-3394 IBM ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS SERVER PROGRAM INSTAL- '>
LATION AND CONFIGURATION GUIDE
This publication fc packaged with the IBM Asynchronous Communication Server Program
(P/N 1642003, #2003). This publication is a guide and reference for the IBM ASC
program. It contains the information and step-by-step instructions needed to plan, install,
configure and solve problems. This publication is the basic reference for system ad-''
ministrators, r"d desi^ers/installen.
Bibliography-2
-------
r^~- •-!• :
___ _ _ _ __ _ Bibliography
LY30-5595 IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK MANAGER
This publication is packaged with the IBM Token- Ring Network Manager Program (P/N
6476046, #0907). The publication describes how to install and operate the program, it
contains helpful hints on bow to troubleshoot the ring. It also contains messages and
prescribed actions to take in response to the messages.
5544-37 10 IBM LOCAL AREA NETWORK PRINTMANAGER USER'S GUIDE
This publication is packaged with the IBM Local Area Network PrintManager Program
(P/N 6317042, *9396). The publication describes the major features of the program. It
describes how to install and load the program, how to print files using menus, and how to
format documents for printing. It is used to activate the 3820 Page Printer and to begin
printing all files in the print queue.
GA27-3732 IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK TECHNOLOGY
This publication is directed toward the data processing person. It contains SO short articles
on development, design, and testing of the TRN.
GG24-1584 INTRODUCTION TO ADVANCED PROGRAM-TOJ*ROGRAM COM-
MUNICATION (APPC)
This publication provides an introduction to APPC communications, the new SNA
facilities for distributed processing, LU 62.
GG24-1656 SNA ADVANCED PROGRAM-TO-PROGRAM COMMUNICATION IN A
PEER CICS/VS ENVIRONMENT
This publication is a follow-up of An Introduction to Advanced program-to-Program Com-
munication (APPC), GG24-1584, describing network management considerations in a
peer C3CS/VS environment
SX27-3757 ADVANCED PROGRAM-TO-PROGRAM COMMUNICATION/PERSONAL
COMPUTER PROGRAMMING GUIDE
This publication describes how to develop a program that uses the APPC/PC program
product. APPC/PC enables a program on an IBM PC to communicate with another
program on another system without operator intervention. This publication is intended
for application programmers who will develop programs that will use the APPQPC ap-
plication program interface. The application programmer needs to know how to program
the IBM PC and needs to understand SNA concepts.
GA27-3381 IBM LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) CABUNQ SYSTEM PLANNING AND
INSTALLATION GUIDE
This publication describes the LAN cabling system. It describes bow to plan, order, install,
customize and test cable and accessories. It is intended for users, building owners, ar-
chitects, engineers, communication system planners, building commercial wiring contrac-
tors, and designer/installers.
Bibliograpby-3
-------
C. PERIODICALS
L
2
2.
Bibliography-4
------- |